Schaum's Outline - Steel Structure Design

Up-to-date covers today's complete courses
Clarifies important theory and applications
Shows you how to solve problems step-by-step
Gives you 112

fully worked
problems
Prepares you for

class exams
Use with these courses: Engineering Mechanics Material Science

Structural Design '
SCHAUM 'S OUTLINE OF
THEORY AND PROBLEMS

OF
STRUCTURAL
STEEL DESIGN
(Load and Resistance Factor Method )
ABRAH Al\1 J. ROK AC II. :\I SCE

Direcwr l ( Building f)e.\ign aiiCI Su{t11 an•
\mericm1 lnsritwe uf Steel Conltmcrinn.
Inc.
AUNG MYAT KYAW

EFFECTIVE ENGINEERING GROUP.
SCHAUM'S OU TLINE SERIES

i\IcGraw -HiU
No:'' York San Franl'i,c.:o \\'a.,hinglon. D. C.
AudlanJ Bogm i Carat'U'Li bon London :-
JadriJ \ lc\lco Cil\ :\Illan lon1real <'" Delhi San
Juan Smgapt;rl!
S1 dne1 Tok o Toronlo
- .
Y-
ABRAHAM J. ROKACH i Director of Build ing De ign and Softwan:
at t he
/\mcrican Institut e or Steel Con.<.trul'lion. Inc. Prc,·iou ly. he had been a
practil.:ing trucwra l engineer for twenty year-,. He hol 1h a B.E. degree
from
the City University of Ne\\ Yorl-. and an M.S. from t he Ma :Jch uscm Institute
of Technology. He ha lectured at the Un i \'er ity oi' Illinoi s and c: J o;ewhere
and j, the author of Guide w LRFD and the Reliahilit\' r j Expen S1·srems ./(Jr
Colllfntter-Aidecl StmC/uml De.)ign. He i'> a Fellov. of the Ame rica n Societ)
oi' C i\'i l Eng i neer<. and Secretat') of 1 he A ISC Com mi t tee on Specification .
Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of

STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN (LRFD METHOD)
Cnp nl!l11 () 1 991 h The .'vkGraw-H ill Compalllc,. IlK .\llll hl' '""'1'\t'd l'n111cd ;,, 1hc l'nnnl
St.ue... ut' Anlt. rit.:a F.\...·t:pt :t., pt>nnitt U lllhler the Cup: n ht \L't ol 1"-J ih. no p 1n 1 ·f tlw... puhhc.tt
llln lll;J] h n:pn lduc.:ed c.lf c.Jhtllhu c..·d m.Ill\ form or l" :Ul) 1111.:.m-......r ...tc)red in 01 data a-.c or ,.Cl
n('\dl
'\) -.lt. m. \\ llht'UI tht." prh.tl \\1 itll·n pt:rnu:-.-.ion uf lh ,.· puhJI'...,h
l'.
12 CUS GUS 09
08
ISBN 0·07-053563-
9
Sponsoring Edi tor: John Aliano
Production Supervisor: Stacey Alexander
Editing Supervisor : Meg Tobin. Maureen
Walker
Ubrary of Congress Cataloging-in-PubUcation Data
Rokach , Abraham
J.
Schaum's outline of theory and problems of structural steel design (LRFD
method)/Abraham J .
Rokacb.
p. cm .-{Schaum's outline series)
ISBN 0-07-053563-9
I. Building, Iron an<.i steel--Problems , exercises, etc. Steel, Structural--Problems,
2.
exercises, etc. 3. Load resistance factor design--Problems , exercises, etc.
I. Title. II . Title: Structural steel (LRFD method)
design
TA684.R66 1991
624.1'821-dc20 89-13665
CIP
McGraw -Hill
Preface
In 1986 a new method of structural steel design was introduced in the United
States with the publi cat ion of the Load and Resistance Fa ctor Design
Specification for Structural Steel Building s. Load and resistance factor design,
or LRFD, has jo ined the old allowable st ress design (ASD) method as a
recognized means for the design of structural steel frameworks for buildings.
Although ASD has enjoyed a long history of successful usage and is familiar
to engineers and architects, the author and most experts prefer LRFD because it
is a truer representation of the actual behavior of structural steel and unlike
ASD , it can provide equivalent margin s of safety for all structures under all
loading condition s (as explained in Chap. 1). For these reasons it is anticipated
that LRFD will replace ASD as the standard method of structural steel design .
Th is work is the first Schaum 's Outline on t he subject of structural steel design
. After a l ong and rewarding use of other titles in the Schaum's Series (first as an
undergradu ate and graduate engineering student, then th rough 20 years of profes
sional pract ice, and as a university professor), the aut hor is pleased to have been
given the opportunity to write this book. Because of the newness of LRFD and the
scarcity of instructional materials, th is boo k was written for as wide an audience as
possible, including studentsenrolled in undergraduate and graduate engineering and
architectural curricula, and practicing engineers, architects. and structural
steel detailers. The author believes that everyone in need of instruction and / or
experience in LR FD can benefit from the Schaum's approach
of learnin g by problem-solving . The only prerequis i te for an
understanding of this text is the same as for an undergraduat e course i n st ructural
steel design : a basic knowledge of engineering mechanics.
The auth or wish es to thank Mr. John F.Carleo. Publisher; Mr. John A. Al
ia n o, ExPcut i\'e Editor; M . Margaret A. Tobin, Editing Supervi sor , of the
Schaum Division at M cGraow- H ill, and t heir st aff for th eir valua ble
contributions to this work. pecial thank go to the author's wife, Pninah. for her
patience and assistance with t)'ping the manuscript. Too numerous to mention ,
but significant in developing his knowledge and enjoyment of the subject matter.
are his mentors and professional and academic colleagues, especially the people
at AISC .
ABRAHAM J. ROKACH
Ill
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3

.
N otatio n
Definitions
Mechanical Properties
Availability
Structural Shapes
Design Methods
ASD versus LRFD
Chapt er 2 INTROD UCTION TO • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8

LRFD
Notati on
Ba ic Concepts
Probabilit) Theor>
Loads
Load Combinations
Chapter J TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Notation
Introduction
Cross-Sectional Areas
De ign Tensile Strength
Displacement
Chapter 4 COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . .. . . . 2

NoHHion 3
fntroduction
Local Buckling
Column Buckling
Effective Length FactOr : Judgmental Method
Effecuve Length Factor: Analytical Method
Design Compressive Strength
Column Destgn
Dtsplacement
v
.
VI CONTENTS
Chapter CO)'IPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . 39

\lotation
5 lntroductton
Cumpactnc-,
Fl.:,ur<tl B.:h<t\"lor
Ela tic vcr u' Pla tic Analy is
Dcstgn flc"ural Strength: C1, = 1.0. L < L,
Bt!nding Coefficient C,
Dc'>tgn Flexural Strength: c.
2: 1.0. L.!: L,
Dc •gn f-lexural Strength: L. > L,
Oro's and Net Cross Sections
Dc:Mgn Shear Strength
Di placement and Vibration
Chapter 6 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . 62

Nota tion
I nt roctuct i on
Noncomp<tct Be<tm
Dc tgn Flexural Strength of Plate Girders
D<.: tgn Shear Strength of Plate Girders
W .:b Stiffener
Stiffener Detaih
Rolled \Cr u Built-Up Beam
Chapter 7 MEMBERS I FLEXURE AND TENSION • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • 84

\;utation
Introduction
lmeraction FormulaJ.
Chapter H BEAM-COLUMNS: COM BIN ED FLEXU RE AND COMPRESSION 91

Notation
Introduction
lt11craction Formu
l amplified Secon d-Order A
Si
nalysis Pre l imma ry De ign
Chapter 9 'l'ORSION • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • 0 0 0 • • • • • 0 0 106

t\ota!lon
Introduction
Sh.:ar Center
i\\Oidmg or Minimi7ing Tor ion
Dc,•gn Cntena
St. \'enant Tor ion
Warping Tor'>ion
Ddormauon
..
CONTENTS VII
Chapter COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . U2
10
Notation
Introduction and Other Compression Members Beam
C and Other Flexural Members
o Design Flexural
l Strength Shear
u Connectors
m Special Provision for Steel Decks
n Concrete-Encased Beams
s Beam-Columns: Combined Flexure and Compre ion
Design Shear Strength
Chapter 11 CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Notat1on
Introduction
Welds
Bolt
Connecting E lements and Main Members at Connection
Typical Connections
Bearing on Steel and Concrete
Chapter 12 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATION S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

1'-otauon
Introduction
Concentrated Loads and Reactions
Suff ener Requirements
INDEX .......................................................................................................................................................... 185

Introduction
This book covers structural steel design for buildings using the load and
resistance factor design (LRFD) method. The following au thorities on the LRFD
meth od are cited frequently in the text , usually in abbreviated form .
A ISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, I nc., Chicago, Tllinois.
AI SC LRFD Specification : Load and Resistance Fac10r Design Specification
for Structural Steel Bu ildings, published by AISC.
AISC LRFD Manual: Load and Resistan ce Factor Design Manual of Steel
Construction, also publi shed by AISC.
Equations in this text are numbered as follows. Equati ons taken from the
AISC LRFD Specification are accompani ed by th eir A ISC numbers in parenth
eses, thus ( ); other equations are numbered in brackets, thus l ).
Chapter 1
Structural Steel
NOTATION
E =modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 kip!> per square inch (ksi)
F,, =tensile strength, ksi
F, =yield stress. yield pomt. or yield strength. ksi
DEFINITIONS
Structural steel, as definl!d by AlSC (in the LRFD Specification and elsewhere). refers to the
steel clements of a structural frame supporting the design loads. It includes steel beams, columns.
beam-columns, hangers, and connections.
Beam -A structural n1ember whose primar} function is to carry loads transverse to its
longitudinal axis. Beams are usually horizontal and support the floors in buildings. (See Fig. 1-
1.)
Column-A structural member whose primary function is to carry loads in compression along its
longitudinal axis. In building frames. the columns arc generally the vertical members which
upport the beams. (Sec Fig. 1-1.)
Beam-column-A structural member who c function is to carr) loads both tranwer'>e and
parallel to its longitudinal axis. A building column subjected to hon.wntal forces (such a<, .,.. ind)
is actually a beam-column.
Hanger-A structural member carrying loads in tension along its longitudinal axis.
Connection-The material used to join two or more structural members. Examples of
connections are beam-to-beam and beam-to-column.
MECHANICAL PROPERTI ES
The major advantage of steel is its high strength relative to the strengths of the other common
structural materials: wood, masonry, and concrete. Unlike masonry and concrete, which arc weak in
tension, steel is strong in both tension and compression. Because of its high strength, structural steel
is widely used in construction. The tallest and longest-span structure arc predominantly teel.
Typical stress-strain curves for structural steel are shown in Fig. 1-2. They are based on the
application of tensile force to a test specimen. The ordinates (i.e., vertical axes) indicate stress.
which is defined as load divided by cross-sectional area. Units for Mress are kips (or kilopound ; t.e ..
1000 lb) per square inch, commonly noted as ksi. The abscissas (i.e., horizontal axes) indicate strain,
which is a measure of elongation under tension and is defined as the increase in length divided by the
original length. Units for strain are inches per inch; strain is dimensionless.
The stress-strain curve in Fig. l-2(a) is that of A36 steel, the most commonly used structural
steel. Note the linear relationship between stress and strain in the "clastic range," that is. until the
yield point is reached. The most important design properties of A36 steel [see Fig. 1-2(a)) are
F,, the yield point. the stress at which the proportionality between stress and strain ceases. A36
steel has both an upper and a lower yield point. For design purposes, the yield point of A36 steel
is taken as F.,.= 36 ksi, the minim um lower yield point.
3
STRlJCTURAL STEEL [CIIAP I
Column
... ' Beam
"
Fig. 1·1 Structural teel frame
F,,. the /emile streng1h. the maximum stress that the material is capable of sustaining. For A36
tccl, r;, -58 to 80 ksi.
E. the modulus of elaslicily. which is the (constant) ratio of stress to strain in the elastic range.
For A \6 \!eel. £ = 29,000 ksi.
The \trcss-stram curve in Fig l-2(b) is characteristic of several of the higher-strength steels. All
structural ..,tecls have the arne modulus of ela ttctty (£ = 29,000 ksi). Unlike A36 steel.
however. the higher-strength '>lt!cl.., do not have a definite yield point. For these steels, F.,. is the yield
streng1h "' determined by either of the two methods shown in Fi g. l-2(b ): the 0.2 percent offset
value or the 0.5 percent strain value.
In the AISC Specification and M anuals. F.. is called the yield stress and. depending on the grade
of steel. can he either the yield point or the yield strength, as defined above.
F.
"·
""' Y tcld potnt:
· F 36 ksi
f
c;;
Stram. '" '"

(u)
Y · ld qrength'
F
uI IE
c
i c:
0..: , 1I -;
I I
I I
0.002 0.005
\tr.un . 10 an
!b)
l'ill· 1-2 Stress- train curves for tructural tccls: (a) A36 steel; (b) lligh-strength steel
CHAP. 1] STRUCTURAL STEEL
5
AVAILABILITY
Fourteen types of structural steel have been approved by the AlSC LRFD Specification for use
in buildings. In the LRFD Specification, Sec. A3. I , they are l isted by their ASTM (American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification numbers. The yie ld stress of these steels range from
36 ksi for th e common A 36 st eel to 100 ksi for A5l4 steel. As can be seen from Table 1-1
(adapted from Part 1 of the AISC LRFD Manual) . the yield stress of a given grade of steel tS not a
constant. It varies with plat e thi ckness; very thi ck structur al shapes and pl ates have reduced
yield stresses .
A36 steel is by far the most commonly used ty pe of structural steel for two reasons:
1. In man y application s, th e loads and stresses are moderate. Little, if any. saving would result
from th e use of higher-strengt h steels.
2. Even where st ress considerations would favor the usc of lighter (possibly more economi
cal) high-strengthmembers, other criteria may govern. H eavier member s may be required
to provide increased stiffness to prevent overall or local instability or excessive
deflection. Because stiffness is a function of the geometric propertie\ of the member and is
not affected by stren gt h , no adva ntage would be gained from using high-strength st eel in
such cases.
Table 1-1 Ava ilability of Structural Steel
Steel Type ASTM De igna tion F,. hi Plate Thicknes . in
Carbon A36 36 s8
32 >!!
A529 42 s\
High-mengt h A441 50 s I
low-alloy 46 ' -I zI
42 I -4
40 4 8
A572-Grade 65 65 < I!
- Grade 60 60 s I!
- Grade 50 "S4
-Grade 42 42
Corroston-resistant A242 50
high-wength
low-alloy
46
42
«
-·
I -4
'
A588 50 s4
46 4-5
42 S-8
Quenched and ASl-t 100 - -·
tempered alloy 90 :H-6
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
A structural member can be a rolled shape or ca n be built up from two or m ore rolled shapes
or plates, connected by welds or bolts. The more economical rolled shapes arc utilized when ever
possible. However. special conditi ons (such as the need for heavier members or particular cross-
sect ional geomet ries) may dicta t e the usc of built-up members.
Available rolled shapes arc catalogued in Part 1 of the A I SC Manual. Those most common ly
used in building construction include wide flange (or W), angle (or L), channel (or C), and tee (or
WT). They are hown in Table 1-2 with examples of their nomenclature. Examples of common
built-up shapes are given in Fig. 1-3.
6 STRUCTURAL STEEL [CHAP. I
Table 1-2 RoUed Structural Steel Shapes and Their Designations
Example of Explanation of
Type of Shape Cross Section Designation Designation
W (wtde flange) ,-...J T Wl4x9Q• Nommal depth. 14m; wetght .

.
-...
c .
0
r; 90 lb/ft
,........-' \......., ..L

C (channel) _.......,I - Cl2X30 Depth, 12 in;
.r;
weight. 30 lb/ft
c..
<>
0
-!..
·
-r
L (angle) L4x3x! Long leg. 4 in;
..".J"·:;.
c
Thickne > hort leg. 3 in ;
E
j.- thtckness. !in
'5
-
t l
f. Leg..
dimension
wr (structural tee cut from
W shape)
,...-' .CT WT7x4s· Nommal depth. 7 in. wctghl.
45 lb/ft
c..
' Cu ttmg a Wl-lx90 in half longitudinally results m two \vnx-IS .
Welded plate girder Cover plated W shape
W hape with helf angle
Fig. 1-3 Common built-up structural sh<tpes
DESIGN METHODS
Two method s for selecting structural steel members are recogni.£ed in current engineering
practice in the United States. The allowable stress design (ASD) method has been codified by AISC,
from 1923 to th e present , in nine successive editions of their Specificmion for the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings (also known as the AISC Specification). This document
has been incorporated by reference in virtually every building code in the United States. Cont aining
the AISC Specification as well as numerous design aids for the ASD method has been the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction (also known as the AISC Manual ) . The new load and resistance factor
design (LRFD) method was introduced officially by AISC in 1986 with their publication of the Load
and Resistan ce Factor Design Specification for Strucrural Steel Buildings (also known as the AJSC
LRFD Specification) and the Load and Resistan ce Factor Design Manual of Steel Construction (also
CHAP. I) STRUCTURAL STEEL 7
known as the AISC LRFD Manual). The LRFO Manual contains the LRFO Specification and many
tables and charts to assist users of the LRFD method.
This book, devoted exclusively to the LRFO method of structural steel design, is based on the
AISC LRFO Specification. At the date of publication of this text, almost all U.S. jurisdictions have
approved the use of th e A I SC LR FD Specification. It is anticipated that LRFO will soon be
universally accepted in this country and will eventually become the standard method of structural
steel design.
ASD VE RSUS
LRFO
(This section, which compares the two methods of structural steel design , is not essen tial for
an understanding of the LRFO method or the remainder of this book. Hence, it may be skipped
by students and others. It sh ould, however, be of interest to those readers who have used ASD or
arc otherwise fam iliar with it.)
The ASD method is characterized by the use of one judg mental factor of safety . A limiting stress
(usually F,) is divided by a factor of safety (FS, determined by the authors of the Specification) to
arrive at an allowable stress
Allowable stress= FFs.

Actual stresses in a steel member are calculated by dividing forces or moments by the appropriate
section property (e.g.. area or section modulus). The actual stresses are then compared with the
allowable stresses to ascertain that
Actual stress< allowable stress
No distinction is made among the variou kinds of loads. Because of the greater variability and
uncertainty of the live load and other loads in comparison with the dead load. a uniform reliability
for all structures is not possible.
The LRFD method is explained in detail in Chap. 2 and the succeeding chapters. Briefly, LRFD
uses a different factor for each type of load and another factor for the strength or resistance. Each
factor is the result of a statistical study of the variability of the subject quantity. Because the
diff erent factors reflect the degrees of uncertainty in the various loads and the resistance, a unif orm
reliability is possible.
Chapter 2
Introduction to LRFD
NOTATI
ON
D =dead load
E =earthquake load
L =live load
L, = roof live load
M = margin of safety
Q =load
R =rain load
R = resistance
R,. = nominal resistance
S= snow load
W= wind load
qjJ = reliability index
y = load factor
¢ = resistance factor
a= standard deviation
BASIC CONCEPTS
Load and resistance factor design (LRFD) is a method for designing structures so that no
applicable limit state is exceeded when the strucure is subj ected to all appropriate combinations of
factored loads. Limit state is a condition in which a structure or a structural component becomes
unfit. A structural member can have several limit states. Strength limit states concern safety and
relate to maximum load-carrying capacity (e.g., plastic hinge and buckling). Serviceability limit states
relate to performance under normal service conditions (e.g., excessive deformation and vibration).
The LRFD method. as applied to each limit state, may be summarized by the formula
[2. 1]
ln the terminology of the AISC LRFD Specification , the left side of the inequality is the required
strength and the right side is the design strength. The left side represents the load combinations; that
is, the summation (denoted by L) of the various loads (or load effects) Q1• multiplied by their
respective load factors y1• The left side is material-independent; the loads are taken from the
governing bui lding code and the LRFD l oad factors were derived from statistical building load
studies. Loads and load combinations are covered later in this chapter. On the right side of the
inequality, the design strength for the given limit state is the product of the nominal strength or
resistance R,. and its resistance factor ¢. Succeeding chapters of this text cover the limit states
applicable to columns, beams. and other structural elements, together with the correspondi ng
resistances and resistance factors.
Associated with each limit state are values for R,. and ¢, where R,. (as calculated from the
equations given in the subsequent chapters) defines the boundary of structural usefulness; ¢ (always
less than or equal to one) depends on the variability of Rn- Test data were analyzed to determine the
8
CHAP. 2) INTRODUCTION TO LRFD
9
uncertainty in each resistance. The greater the scatter in the test data for a given re istancc, the
lower its implified explanation of the ba i of LRFD in probabilit y theory.
Th e load effect Q and th e resistance R are assumed to be statistically independent rand om
variables with probability distributions as shown in Fig . 2- L(a ). Let the margin of
safet}
M = R-Q [2.2]
As long as M is positive (t.e., R > Q), a margin of safety exists. However, because Q and Rare
random variables. there will always be some probability of failure (M <0). This unacceptable
probability is shown shad ed in Fig. 2- l (a) and (b). The latter figure is a probability distribution
for M, which is also a random variable.
Rc,I'IJn..:c R
L,oJd clled Q
R
(a)
M
(b)
Fig. 2-l Probability distributions : (a) load effect Q and resistance R ; (b) margin of safety M = R - Q
Referring to Fig . 2-l(b), the probability of failure can be set to a predetermined small quantity
(say, 1 in 100,000) by specifying that the mean value of M be standard deviations above zero; i.e.
M = !Aa,\1 [2. J)
10 INTRODUCTION TO LRFD (CHAP. 2
''here t.f = mean value of

M
a 11 = \tandan.l denation of M
JJ = rehab11il\
•
index
In l:.q [.? J [. the one parameter left to the discretion of the authors of the LRFD Specification is cp:
the load !acwr' y, have been derived independently by other'> from load statistics. The resistance
factor cp depend' on .A a-. well as on the uncertainty in the resistance R,. The selection of a reliability
tnde\ Jl determtne' the value of cp for each limit state. In general. to reduce the probability of
failure . .A would be wcrca-,ed. resulting in a lower value for
cp
LOADS
Structural load arc cla sificd as follows.
Dead load (D)-The weight of the structure and all other permanently installed features in the
building. including built-in partitions.
Liue load (L)-The gravity load due to the intended usage and occupancy: includes the weight
ot people. furniture. and movable equipment and partitions. In LRFD. the notation L refers to
tlnnr live loalh and /.,. to roof live loads.
Ram load (/?)-Load due lO the initial rainwater or ice. excluding the contribution of ponding.
Snow load (S)
W111d load (
W)
t.artltquak.e load (
£).
In dc,1gn. the dead load is calculated from the actual we1ghts of the 'ariou-. structural and
non'>tructural clement,. All the orher design loads are specified by the governing building code.
When beam" ... upport large floor areas or columns support several floors, building codes generally
allow a hvc-lnad reduction. The reduced live load is used in LRFD.
LOAD COMBINATIONS
The required mength i'> defined in the AISC LRFD Specification as the maximum (absolute
value) force obtained !rom the following load combinations.
1.40 (A 4-1)
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5 (L, or S orR) (A4-2)
1.2D + 1.6 (L, or S orR)+ (0.5L or 0.8W) (A4-3)
1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5 (L, or S orR) (A4-4)
1.2D + 1.5£ + (O.SL or 0.2S) (A4-5)
0.9D- ( 1.3W or 1.5£) (A-l-6)
[t:xcepuon : 'I he load factor on Lin combinations (A4-J). (A4-4). and (A4-5) shall equal l.O for
garage\. areas occupied as places of public assembly. and all areas where the live load is greater than
J(Xl lh/ ft•
I
Load D. L. L,. S. R. W. and £represent either the loads themselves or the load effects (i.e..
the force\ or moments cau.,ed by the loads). In the preceding expressions. only one load assumes its
max1mum ltfettme \'alue at a time. while the others are at their "arbitrary point-in-time" values.
Each combinatmn model'> the design loading condition when a different load I!> at 1ts maximum.
CHAP. :j INTRODUCTION TO LRFD ll
Load Combination Load at I ts Lifetime Maximum
(A4-J) D (during const ruction; other loads not

present)
(A4-2)
(A 4-3)
L
L, or S or R (a roof
(A4--1)
load)
(A4-5)
W (acting tn the direction of D)
(A4-6)
E (acting in the direction of D)
WorE (opposing D)
Load combinations (A4-l) to (A4-6) are for computing l> trcngth limit states. In determining
serviceability l imit states (e.g., deflections) the unfactorcd (service) loads arc used.
Solved Problem s
2.1. The moments acting on a floor beam are a dead-load moment of 50 kip-ft and a li\e-load
moment of 35 kip-ft. Determine the required strength.
Becau e dead load and floor hve load are the onI} load acting on the member , L,= S = R = W = £ =
0. By tn\peCtiOn of formulas (A-l-I) to (A-1-6). it is obviou that one of the firM t\\O formula mu t go,
ern. a folio""'
UD = I Ax SO kip-ft = 70 k1p-ft (A -1-1)

1.2D + 1.6L = l.2 X 50 kip-ft + 1 .6 X 35 klp-ft = 116 (A-1-1)
kip-ft
Because It produces the max1mum required strength, the econd load combination governs. The
requ1rcd Mrcngth 1s 116 k1p-ft.
2.2. Floor beams W21 x50, spaced I 0 ft 0 in center-to-center. support a superimposed dead load of
651b/ft 2 and a live load of 40 lb/ft2 . Determine the governi ng l oad combinatio n and the
correspon ding factored load.
Total dead load D =50 lb/f t + 651b/ft! x 10.0 ft = 700 lb/ft
Total live load L = 40 lb/ft 2 X 10.0 rt = 400 lb/ft
As in Prob. 2.1. L, = S = R = W = E = 0.
The two relevam load combinations are
l.4D = 1.4 X 700 lb/ ft = 980 lb/ ft (A-l-l)
1.2D + 1.6L = 1.2 x 700 lb/ ft + 1.6 X 400 lb/ ft = 1480 lb/ (A -1-2)
ft
The l>econd load combination. which gives the maximum factored load. 1480 lb/ft (or
1.48 kips/ft), governs.
2.3. Roof design loads include a dead load of 35lb/ft!, a live (or now) load of 251b/ft . and a
wind pressure of 151b/ft! (upward or downward}. Determme the governing loading .
12 1:-ITRODUCflON TO LRFD (CIIAP. 2
The six load combinations are

Load Combination Factored Load, lb/ft1
(A-1-/) I 4 X 35 = 49
(A4-2) 1.2 X 35 + 0 + 0. 5 X 25 = 55
(A4-J) 1.2x35+ J.6x25+0.8x I S =94
(A4-4) 1.2 X 35 + 1.3 X IS + 0 + 0.5 X 25 = 74
(A4-5) 1.2x35+0+0.2x25 =47
(A-1-6) 0.9 X 35- 1.3 X 15 = 12
The thard load combanauon go\'erns; it has a total factored load of 94 lb/f t .
2.4. The axial forces on a building column from the code-specified loads have been calcu lated
as 200 kips of dead load, 150 kips (reduced) noor live load. 25 kips fro m the roof ( L , or S
or R), 100 kips from wind, and 40 kips from earthquake. Determine the required strength
of the column.
Load Combination Factored Axial Force, kips
(A4-1) 1.4 X 20() =280

(A4·.?) 1.2 X 2(Xl + 1.6 X ! 50+ U.S X 2S = 493
(A4-Ja) 1.2 x 200 + 1.o x 2s + o.s x ISO = 355
(A-1-Jb) 1.2 X 200+ I 6 X 2S +0.8X HXl = 360
( A-1-·1) l.2x200+ I 3x IOO+O.Sx 150 +0.Sx25 =458
(A .J-5a) 1.2 X 200 + I 5 X 40 + 0.5 X ISO = 375
(A4-5b} 1.2 X 200 + 1.5 X 40 + 0.2 X 2S = 305
(A4·oo) 0.9 X 200 - 1.3 X I 00 - so
(A4-6b) 0.9 X 200- I.S X 4() = 120
The requared strength for the column is 493 kips. ba ed on the second load combination.
2.5. Repeat Prob. 2.4 for a garage column.

According to the A ISC LRFD Specification. load combin ations (A 4-J) to (A 4-5) are modified for
garage . areas of public assembly. and areas with live load exceeding 100 lb/ftz. as follows.
1.20 + 1.6 (L, or S or R} + ( l.OL or (A-1-J')
O.RW)
(A -1-·1')
1.20 + 1.3W + I.OL + 0.5 (L, or S orR)
(A 4-5')
1.20 + 1.5£ + ( I.OL or 0.2S)
The solution to Prob. 2.4 i s still valid for ga rages except for load combi nation s (A4-Ja), (A4-4), and
(A4-5A), which become
Load Combination Factored Axial Force , kips
(A4 -Ja ') 1.2 X 2(Xl + I 6 X 25 + 1.0 X ISO =-BO

( A4-4 ') l.2 X 200 + 1.3 X 100 +].()X 15() + 0.5 X 2S = 533
(A4-5a ') 1.2 X 200 + I.S x 40 + 1.0 X ISO = 4SO
CHAP. 2) INTRODUCfiON TO LRFD 13
Because 533 kips is gremer than 493 kips. the required strength for the garage column is 533 kips. which
is obtained from modified load combination (A4-4).
Supplementary Problems
2.6. A beam-column IS subjected to the following forces by the service loads indicated. Axial compression,
P = 60 kips (dead load). Skips (live load). Bending. M = 10 kip-ft (dead load), 3 kip-ft (live
load).
Determine the governing load combination and the required axial compressive and bending strengths.
Ans. Load combination (A4-J) governs for axial compression; the required strengths are P,, = 84 kips ,
M., = 14 kip-ft. Load combination (A4-2) governs for bending moment; the required strengths are
P,, = 80 kips, M., = 17 kip-ft. Both of the preceding P,,-M., pairs should be checked in the design of
the beam-column.
2.7. A member is subjected to the following axial forces: 35 kips (axml compression from dead load) and
30 k ip (axial compression or tension from wind) . Determine the governing load combinations and the
required strengths.
A tu. Axial compression: P,, = 81 kips ; load combination (A+-4). Axial tension: P,, = 8 kips;
load
combination (A4-
6).
2.8. The axial forces on d building column are as follows: SO kips dead load. 40 kips floor live load, 10 kips
roof live load. and SS kips wind. Determine the required strength.
Ans. Axial compression: P,, = 157 kips; load combination (A-1--1). Axwl tension : P.= 27 kips;
load combination (A -1-6).
Chapter 3
Tension Members
NOTATION
A, =effective net cross-sectional area of member. in
A. = gross cross-sectional area of member. in
A, = net cross-sectional area of member. in
£=modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 ksi
F.,= specified minimum tensile strength, ksi
·=specified min i mum yield stress. ksi
g =gage (i.e .. the transverse center-to-center spacing betwee n fastener gage lines), in
l =member length, in
P = (unfactored) axial force in member, kips
P, =nominal axial strength of member, kips
s =pitch (i.e .. the longitudinal center-to-center spacing of any two consecutive holes). in
U = reduction coefficient
=axial elongation of member. in
cp,P,, =design strength of tension member, in
¢, = resistance factor for tension = 0.90 or 0.75
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers members subjected to pure tension. such as hangers and truss members.
When a tensile force is applied through the centroidal axis of a member. the result is a uniform
tension stress at each cross section. Tensile forces not acting through the centroid cause bending in
addition to tension; lateral forces also cause bending. Members with combined bending and tension
are discussed in Chap. 7.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AR
EAS
The design tensile strength of a structural steel member depends on the appropriate cross-
sectional area. The three cross-sectional areas of interest are the gross area A 11 • the net area A,,
and the effective net area A ,.
The gross area of a member at any point is the total area of the cross section. with no deductions
for holes.
The net area is the gross area minus the area of the holes. In computing the net area for tension,
the width of a hole is taken as it; in greater than its specified dimension. Since tolerances require that
a bolt hole be ft, in greater than the diameter of the bolt, the width of a hole is assumed for design
purposes to be twice in in. or A in, greater than the diameter of the bolt.
The net area of an clement is its net width multiplied by its thickness. For one hole, or two or
more holes running perpendicular to the axis of the member, the net width is the gross width minus
the sum of the widths of the holes. However, if a chain of holes extends across a part in a diagonal or
zigzag fashion. the net width is the gross width minus the sum of the hole dimensions plus the
14
CHAP . 3j TENSION MEMBERS 15
quantity J '!4g for each gage pace in the chain. where

s = pitch (i.e.. the longitudinal center-to-center spacing of any two consecu t ive hole ). in
g =gage (i.e .. the tranwerse center-to-center spacing be tween fa!>tener gage lines). in (See
Fig. 3-1.)
It may be necessary to examine several chain s to determine which chain has the lea'>t net width.
P ----;} • t --- P
s
I• •I
Fig. 3-1 Definitions of.f and g
The concept of effecuue net area account s for shear lag in the vicinity of connections. When the
member end connection transmits tension directly to all cross-sectional element of the member. A
equa ls A ,. But if the endconnection transmits tension through some. but not all. of the
cross-sectional clemen t s. a reducedeffective net area is m.ed instead. For bolted and riveted
member
(83-1)
For welded members
(83-2)
Desi gn values for U and A, are given in Sec. 83 of the AlSC LRFD Specification. For W , M ,
or S shapes and structural tees cut from these shapes:
If the tensile force is tran smitted by transverse weld . A, equa ls the area of the direct ly
conn ect ed clement s.
I f th e force is transmitted by bolts. the va lue of U d epends on the cri teria listed in Table 3- L
Table 3- 1 Valu es of U for Bolted W, M , S. Wf , MT. and ST Shapes
Critena u
(a) Flange v.tdth 2: ;x depth: connection is to the flanges: mtmmum of three faMene rs per hne m
the direction of Mre 0.90
(h) Mmunum of three fasteners per line m the direction of Mre s otherwtM not meeting criteria (a) O.R5
(c) Two fa rcncr per line in the direction of tress 0.75
16 TENSION MEMBERS [CHAP. 3
DESI G"' TENSILE STRENGTH

lwo cntcna hmll the design tensile strength cp,P""
a l-or yiel<.hng of the gross cross section
cp, = 0.90
(Dl-1)
h For fracture in the net cross section

cp, =
(Dl-2)
0.75
where cp, = resistance factor for P,, =
F,,A,
tension
P,, - nominal axial strength.
kips
f; = specified m i nimum yield stress. ksi
f" = specified minimum tensile stn:ngth, ksi
Limitation u is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. Since the fraction of the
total member length occupied by fastener holes is usually small. the effect of early yielding of the
reduced cro ' section-; on the total elongation of the member i:. negligible. Hence the gross section is
used. Limit '>tate b deals with fracture at the cross section with the mimmum A ,.
OISPLACt.M ENT
The mcrcasc m the length of a member due to axial tension under servtce loads is
PI
1::1= (3. I]
EA
where 1::1 - axtal elong.ttion ot the member. in
P = (unfactored) axial tensile force in the member. kips
I = length of the member. in
E - modulus of elasticity of steel= 29.000 ksi
Solved Problems
3. 1. Determine the gross and net cross-sectional areas of a plate 12 in x 2 in with a l-in-diameter
hole . (Sec Fig . 3-2.)
Gro" area = gross w1dth x th1ckness
A .= 12 in x 2 in = 24
10
Net area net Y.ldth x th1ckne :.

Net w1dth = grth\ width -hole diameter
l·or dc"gn. hole d1ameter = I in + 1.; in= 1.0610
:O.ct w1dth = 1:!10- Ul6 in= 10.94 in
An= 10.94 in X 2 in= 21.88 m-
CHAP. 3] TENSION MEMBERS 17
P --- • 12 In
.J
.,
2 ln
Fig. 3·2
3.2. Usc the same information as in Prob. 3.1. except with two l-in-diameter holes positioned as
sh own in Fig. 3-3.
Gross width of plat e= 12 AN = 24 as above
in in
Cham ACE or BDF (one hole):
Net w1dth = 12 in- 1.06 tn = LO.94
111
Cha111 ACDF (rwo holes. one space):

'
Net "'idth =gross width - l: hole dtamcter + l: r
4g
(4 in)
= 12 in- 2 x !.06111 +....: ;._
4X6111
= 10.54 in
Becau e 10 54 in< 10.94 111 , chain ACDF is critical in thi ca e
A. = net width x thickne

= 10.54 in x 2 in= 21.0!1
111
£ F
I
I
I ,f o
p II p 12
I c •/ I in
I""
A 8
2in
..I
>=4m
.. •I
Fig. 3·3
3.3. Use the arne rnformation as in Prob. 3.1. except with three l·tn-diamctcr holes positioned as
shown in Fig. 3-4 .
-14 . '
A.-- 111
F G
I F .I -
....
=:...:.-
p
I
I
c• I
I
p ; ·.:
A B
L < $ _
2 in
1.. I
.., .
,. .' '" I
_J
Fig.3-4
Regarding net width. by in pcction. chains BOG (one hole). ACDG (two holes. one :.pace), and FJDEF
(two hole . one space) are not critical. (The reader can verify this by calculation.) For the other chains
Chain Net Width (in) = Gross Width -l: Hole Diameters + l:!...
4g
ACEF 12 -2xl.06 = 9.88 in

., , 0" ., 31
ACDEF L - ·' X I. n +- X - = 10.31 in
4X3
Chatn ACEF with the mmtmum net width .9.88m. • critical.

A .= 9. 8/\ tn X 2 tn = 19.75
in
3.4. Hol es have been punched in the flanges of th e WJOx49 in fig. 3-5 for four l-in-diameter
bolts. The holes lie in the sam e cross-sectional plane; A = 14.4 in 2 . Determin e the net
area.
For de ign. hole diameter = 1 in+ in= 1.13m
A,.= A ,- x hole dtameter x flange thtckne '
1
= 14.4 tn - X 1.13 tn X 0.560 in
A .= 11.88 in 1
l
To.s60'"
\\'10 x 49
10.0
*0.560 in
in
Fig. 3-5
In Probs. 3.5 to 3.8. determine the design tensile strength of a W 10x4lJ in A 36 steel . with
the
conditions stated.
CHA P. 31 TENSION MEMBERS 19
3.5. No holes; the two flanges and the web are all welded to the supporting member.
Here. A,= A,= 14..1 10 . For A36 steel. F.. = 36 ks1 and f;, =51! ks1.
De •gn \trcngth q>,P. = minimum of
0.90FA.=0.90X36hJX 14..1m'=467klp
() 75F.A,= 0.75 X 58 ksi X 14.4 In:= 626 k1p
<jJ,P. = 467 kips, based on yielding of the gro s section
3.6. No holes; only the flanges of the Wl0x 9 are welded to the !>upport.
A.= 14.4 in:
For welded connection . effective net area

A, =area of directly connect ed elemenb
= area of the two flanges
= 2( I0.0 in x 0.560 in)= 1 1.20 in:
Design \trcngth <jJ,P.. =minimum of
0.90F, 11, = 0.90 x 36 ksi x 14.4 in"- 467 1-.•ps
0.75F,A,= 0.75 X 5R ksi X 11.20 in'= 487 k1p'
Agam <jJ,P. = 467 k1ps. based on yielding of the gross sect1on
3.7. The hole pattern of Fig. 3-5. but not at the end upport: the Ranges of the Wl0x49 are
welded to the support.
A.= 14..1 m·
At the \upport, A =flange area= 11.20 m=. as in Prob 3.6. At the holes (a"av from the member end}.
A,= A. = II 8X m·. a'> in Prob. 3.4.
The dc •gn strength lp,P. = the mmimum of
0. 90F.,A< = 0.90 X 36 ksi X 14..1 In:= 4()7 kip'

0.15F,,A, = 0.75 X 58 ksi X I I 2 in'= 487
k1p
0.15F,,A,. = 0. 75 X 58 k i X 11.88 m ' = 517
k1p
The design :.trengt h for tension is 467 kips.
3.8. The connection of the W10x49 to its support is by bolting as in Fig . 3-5, two bolt s per line
along the member l engt h direction (i.e.. a total of eight holes).
Reduction coeffic1ent U =0.75. For bolted connection . A, UA,. "' 0.75 x II.HH in '- 8.91 in:.
Design trcngth <jJ,P,, = minimum of
0.90F,A, =0.90 X 36 ksi X 14..1 in = 467 kip'

0.75F,,A, = 0. 75 X 58 ksi X l-1. 91 in· 3l-18 k1p'
<jJ,P.= 31!8 kip . based on fracture of the net sectiOn
3.9. H ow much service dead load can be carried bv the WIOX49 1n Prob'>. 3.5 to 3.8?
•
As ummg that dead load is the onl}' load. the go,erning load combmauon in Chap. 2 • the first: lAD.
1.40 5 1/>J'n
M aximum '1erv1ce dead load D = lp,P./1.4.
ln Probs. 3.5 to 3.7. cp,P,. = 467 kips. Maximum service dead load= 467 kips/1.4 = 333
kips. In Prob. 3.8. cp,P., = 38!1 kips. Maximum serv1ce dead load = 388 kips/ 1.4 = 277 kips.
3.10. A Wl0x49 tension h anger. 5 ft long, carn es a servtce load of 250 kips. Calculate its axial
elongation .
. _ _!!_ _ 250 kipS X (5.0 ft X 12 in/ft) _ Q Q .
El ongauon 1:1- £ - , k , - . 36 1n
A• -9 •000 Sl X 14.4 m·
In Probs . 3.11 to 3.13, determine the net cross-sectional area and critical chain of holes.
3.11. A 10 in x 1.5 in plate with two : -in holes. as in Fig. 3-6.

Ans. A. = 12.0 m : critical chain i ABCD.
p (.I ;.
I
p lOin
,B•
1 .5 m
1.. •i
fig. 3·6
3.12. A 10 in x l.5 in plate with four : ·in hole . as in Fig. 3-7.

Ans. A,. = 12.0 in ; critica l chain is ACEG .
G
'r•
H
1
•F c
p I p 0
-
(• •D
,.. .. ,
B
I . 5 i n
Fig. 3·7
CHAP. 31 TENSION MEMBERS 21
3.13. A 10 an X 1 .5 an pla t e with five ,:-in holes , as m Fig. 3-8.

AilS An= 11.50 an·: cnucal chain IS ACEFH.
f ig. 3-8
In Prob. 3.14 10 3.16. determine the design tensile trength of the double·channel configurauon (2 C6x 10.5) m
Fig. 3-9. Steel i A36. The cros -secuonal area of each channel I\ 3.(J9m .
C6 " 10.5
Fig. 3-9
3.14. All clement of the channels are welded 10 the support. AI certain sccuon away from the end
connection. a ingle >in-diameter bolt joins the ch anneb. as in Fig. :uo. 10 form a built-up ection.
Ans. 1/J,P,, = 200 kip .
0.314'" -II-
'
b X 1 10.5
C
Fig. 3-10
3.15. Only the web of the channels are welded to the upporl. Away from the support. orne ections have a
-m -d1ameter bolt . a in Fig. 3-9. 10 form a built-up ection. A11s. rp,P. = 16-' kips.
22 TENSION MEMBERS (CH AP . 3
3.16. The connecuon of the channels to their support ts as shown tn Fig. 3-10 with three -tn-diameter bolts in
the dtrection of stres!.. Ans. lj>,P" = 200 kips .
3.17. . Calculate the increa e tn length of the 3-ft-long tension hanger tn Fig. 3-9 (2 C6x 10.5) under an axial
ervice load of 100 ktps. Ans . = 0.020 in.
Chapter 4
Columns and Other Compression Members
NOTATIO N
A 11 =gross cross-sectional area of member, in2
b=width, in
b1 =width of flange, in
d =depth, in
E =modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 ksi
F,, =cri tical comprehensive stress, ksi
F,. =compressive residual stress in flange. ksi
F.,. = specified minimum yield stress, ksi
G = alignment chart parameter defined in Eq. f .J. 2]
G' =alignment chart parameter defined in Eq. [-1. 11
It,, h"' =web dimensions defined in Fig. 4-1 in
I= moment of inertia. in 4
K =effective length factor
KL =effective length, ft
Kl =effective length. in
L = length of member. ft
I= length of member, in
P = (unfactored) axial force in member, kips
P,, =nominal axial strength of member, kips
P,, = required axial strength. kips
r =radius of gyration of the cross section. in
r =th ickness, in
1,.. =th ickness of web, in
t1 =axial shorteni ng of member, in
A,.-column slenderness parameter
A,.= limiting width-thickness ratio for compact section
A,= limiting width-thickness ratio for column design
q>J . =design strength of compression member,
k1ps
¢, =resistance factor for compression= 0.85
INTROD UCTION
This chapter covers members subjected to pure compress1on '>UCh as columns and truss
members. When a compres!>ive force is applied through the centr01dal axi!> of a member. a uniform
compression stress develops at each cross section. Bending is caused by compressive forces not
acting through the centroid or by lateral forces. Bending combined "ith compression is discussed in
Chap. 8.
24 COLUMi'IS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS [CHAP. 4
The strength of comprcs ion members is limited by instability. The instability can be either local
buckling or overall (column) buckling.
LOCAL BUCKLING
The cross sections of structural steel members arc classified as either compact. noncompact, or
slender-element sectiOn!., depending on the width -thi ckness ratios of their
elements.
A section is compact if the Ranges arc continuously connected to the web. and the
width-thickness ratiOS of all its compression elements are equal to or less than A,..
A section is noncompact if the width-thjcknc ss rau o of at least one clement is greater than
A,., provided the width-thickness ratios of all compression elements are equal to or less than A,.
ff the width-thicknes s ratio of a compression clement is greater than A,. that clement is a slender
compression element; the cross section is called a slender-element section.
Steel members with compact sections can develop their full compressive strength without local
instability. Noncompact shapes can be stressed to initial yielding before local buckling occurs. I n
members with slender element s. clastic local buckling i s the limitation on strength.
Columns with compact and noncompact sections are designed by the method described herein
(and in Chap. E of the A I SC LRFD Specification). Nearly all building columns arc in this category.
For the occasional case of a slender-element column, the specia l design procedur es listed in App
.
85.3 of the AISC LRFD Specification are required, to account for local buckling. Because of the
penalties imposed by App . 85.3. it is generally more economical to avoid slender element s by
increasing thicknesses.
To summarize: if. for all elements of the cross section , the width-thkkness ratios (b/t, d/t,... or
hef t.,.) are equal to or lcs than A,. column design should be by the method of this chapter.
Otherwise, the method given in App. 85.3 of the LRFD Specification must be used. The
width -thjckness ratios for columns and the corresponding values of A, are defined in Table 4-1 and
Fig. 4-1, which are based on Sec. B5 of the AISC LRFD Specification.
Table 4-1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios ror Columns
Limiting Width-Tht ckne''

Width- Ratio. i.,
Thickne
Column Element Ratio General A36 Steel
Flanges of W and other I shapes /J / t 95/\(F, 15.8

and channels; outstanding legs
of pairs of angles in continuous
contact
Flanges of quare and rectangular b/r 238/VF.,. -F,* 46.7 (rolled)
box sections; flange cover plates 53.9 (welded)
and diaphragm plate!> between lines
of fasteners or weld
Legs of ingle angle Mrut and h/r 76/#. 12.7
double angle struts wtth epara10rs;
unstiffcncd element' (1.e .. upported
along one edge)
Stems of t ees d It 127/,fi{ 2 1.2
All other stiffened elements (i.e.. b/t
supported along two edges) h, lt. 253/ 42.2
•F, = compres\tvc rc,•tlual trC\ in !lange: W ksi for rolled \hapc'>. 16.5 ksi for welded secuon\
CHAP. 4) COLUMNS AND OTHER COM PRESSION M EMB ERS 25
b = b,i2 h = hl '2
1 b = b,
I•
h h,
.., I•
b.
•I
I•
h.
.L
I> = I>, 2
b
d
h
I
h.
1 \
h - b, - 31
I
It - It - 31
Fig. 4-1 Definmon of width (h d. and h.) and th•cknes' (llange or leg thickness 1 and web thlcl..ne., 1.) for
use in Table 4-1
COLUMN BUCKLING
The most significant parameter affecting column !.lability is the !>lendemess ratio Kl I r, where I is
the actual unbraced length of the column. in: Kl i the effecti\'C length of the column . in: and r is
the radiu of gyration of the column cross section. m . Column strength equations are normally
writren for ideal "pin-ended'' column . To make the '>trcngth equations applicable to all columns, an
effective length facwr K is used to account for the influence of end cond itions on column stabilit y.
Two methods for determining K for a colum n are presented in Sec. C2 of the Commentary on
the AISC LRFD Specification : a judgmental method and an approxi mate analytical meth od . A
discussion of the two method foliO\\ .
EFFECTI VELENGTH FACTOR: JUDGMENTAL METHOD

Six ca cs arc show n in Table -1-2 for individual colum n!>. with their corresponding K values. both
theoretical and recommended. The more conservative recommendations (from the Structural
Stabilit) Research Council) reflect the fact that perfect fixity cannot be achieved in real tructu res.
The LRFD Specification distmguishes between columns tn braced and unbraccd f rames. In
braced frame . sideswa} i inhibited by diagonal bracing or shear walls. In Table 4-2. case d ( the
classical pin-ended column. K = 1.0) a well as ca es a and b repre ent colum ns in braced frames:
K 1.0. AISC' recomme nd!. that K for compression members in braced frames ··shall be taken as
unit y, unlc!>s structural analysis show!> that a sm aller value may be used." It is common practice
to assume K = 1.0 for columns in braced frames.
26 COLUMNS AND OTH ER COMPR ESSI ON MEMBE RS [CH A P. 4
Table 4-2 Effecti"e Length Factors K Cor Columns
WI b) cJ t. ,. d) ) If) t
Buckledby
Shape of Column
L -.;;t1'"
II
ct •.,
'\
p E ,.,
·r·
Shown Dashed Lme
' I
I I
I
I I I
I
I I I I I
I I I
I I I
I
I I
'
I
'
I
.
I I I
"'""
\ I
I
I I
n7 n7 n-r
t t t ,+. it
t .,
Theoretical K value 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0

Recommen ded design
values when ideal conditiom 0.65 0.80 1.2 1.0 2.10 2.0
are approximated
4" Rotation fixed and translation fixed

End condition code Rotation free and translation fixed
fZ{J Rotation fixed and tra nslat ion free
? Rotation free and transla t ion free
Reproduced with perm''"on rrom the A ISC L RFD Manual
Cases c, e, and fin Table 4-2 cover columns in unbraccd frames (sidesway u ni nhibited); K 1.0.
The K values recommended therein may be u ed in column design.
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR: ANALYTICAL METHOD
If beams are rigidly connected to a column, nomographs are available for approximating K for
that column. Two such "alignment charts.. have been developed: one for "'sidesway i nhibited" (i.e.,
braced frames, K s 1.0): the other. for "'sidesway uninhibited" (i.e., u nbraced frames, K 1.0}.
Again, for col umns in braced frames, it is customary to conservatively l et K = l.O. For columns in
u nbraced frames, the align ment chart in Fig. 4-2 may be used to determin e K. Beca u se the
alignme nt charts were developed with the assumption of purely clastic act ion, t h e stiffness red
uction
factors (SRF) in Table 4-3 arc available to account for inelast ic column be havior. (Figure 4-2 has
been reproduced with permission from the Commentary on the A I SC LRFD Specification . Table 4-
3 is a corrected version of Table A in the A ISC LR FD Manual. Part 2.)
Th e procedure for obtaining K from Fig. 4-2 is as follows.
I. At each of the two joints (A and B) at the ends of the col umn. det ermine I (th e moment
of inertia, in ) and I (the unbraced length, in) of each column ci and each beam gi
rigidly connected to that joint and lying in the plane in which buckling of the
column is being considered.
2. At each end of t he column, A an d B
c· = (1/l}c + (1/1),.2
( 4.11
(/ / I}!< I+ (I/ f)t:2
CHAP. 4] COLUMNS AND OTIIER COMPRESSION MEMBERS 27
c.
G.
I U II
illI
., I
'
...
' II.. I:II II
..'• ' rr-J
l'1
"I ,!\) J
• I I :!
)
0
cl
)
111 1
'" " "
"'
" "
' c
' E
:>
0
...
'
!••
<I
®
I '
. I g2 .
c:!
'
" '' "
Fig.4-2 Alignment chart tor effective length of columns in unbraced frames having rigid jotnt
Table 4-3 Stiffness Reduction Fact ors for A36 Steel for Usc
with Fig. 4·2
P,,•/A .k l SRF P,,/ A,. hi SRF
30 0.05 20 0.76
29 0.14 19 0.81
28 0.22 18 0.85
27 ().30 17 0.89
26 0.38 16 0.92
25 0.45 15 0.95
24 0.52 14 0.97
23 0.5X 13 0.99
22 0.65 12 1.00
21 0.70
· !',, • the rcqu•red qrength < nd A, '' 1he gro crO'>'>·,ec Jional a rea or 1hc ,UOJCCI column
3. Adjust for inelastic column action

G 1 =G
xSRF [4. 2)
GH = G1 x
SRF
where SRF is the stiffncs& reduction factor for the column obtained from Table 4-3.
4. . For a column end attached t o a foundation. G = 10 for a ··pin '' support and G = 1 for a
rigid
support are recommend ed.
5. Determin e K by drawmg a straight line from G" to Gu on the alignment chart in Fig. 4·2.
28 COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS (CIIAP. 4
DESIGN COMPRESSI VE STR ENGTH

Column buckling can be either clastic or inelastic . For design purposes. )., = I.5 b taken as the
boundary between elastic and inelastic column buckling.
. Kl
A,.= (£2-4)
r;r
For columns with cross-sectional elements having width-thickness ratios equal to or less than ),, , the
design compressive strength is </J. P,. where
cp, = 0.85
(£2-J)
rr )., $ 1.5, column buckling is inela

tic. F,, = (£2-2)
(0.6581-,')F;
or in the alternate form given in the Commentary on the AISC LRFD Specification
F;, = [exp( -0.419}, ) ]F. (C-£2-1}
where exp(x) = e'.
If i.e> 1.5, column buckling ill clastic.
0.877]
F. r = ).2 (£2-3}
[ F,.
The terms in these equations include
'
),, = slenderness parameter
F, =specified minimum yield stress, ksi
E = modulus of elasticity of steel= 29.000 kst
cp,. = resistance factor for compression
P,= nominal compressive strength, kips
1
A 11 =gross cross-sectional area. in
F,., =critical compressive stress. ksi
Equation (£2-J) is the Euler equation for column instability multiplied by 0.877 to account for the
initial out-of-waightnes of actual columns. Equation (£2-2) and (its equivalent) Eq . (C-£2-J) are
empirica l equations for inelastic column buckling, providing a transition from F,, =F. at ;,, = 0
(i.e.. Kl/r = 0) to the modified Euler equation [Eq . (£2-3)1 for elastic buckling at ),r > 1.5. For
A36 steel
)., = 1.5 corresponds to a slenderness ratio Kl /r of
133.7.
COLUMN
DESIGN
According to Sec. B7 of the A ISC LR FD Specification, for compression members Kl /r

"preferably should not exceed 200...
In design. selection of an appropriate column can be facilitated by referral to tables in one of
two ways. The design compressive strengths cp, P,, of W and other rolled shapes are tabulated in the
A I SC LRFD Manu al. Part 2. Column shapes can be selected directly from those tables. For bui l t-
up
sections and rolled shapes not tabulated. Table 4-4 for A36 steel (and similar tables for other grades
of steel in the AISC LRFD Specification) can be used in iterative design. I n both cases. reference to
tables replaces the need to solve the column strength equations [Eqs. (£2-1) to (£2-4)).
CHAP. 4] COLUMNS A:-10 OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS 29
Table -' -' Design Compre ive Stresses for A36 Steel
De tgn Stress for Compre-.-.ton 'v1embe of 36 kst Specified Yield-Stre\ Steel, cp, = 0.85•
Kl cp, f;_,. Kl <Pc r;,., Kl <P( J :,. Kl K/ q>,.F,,.
¢, /·f·,.
r ksi r ksi r k\1 - r hi - r ksi
. I, 30.60 41 28.01 HI 21.66 121 14.16 161 8.23

-3 30.59
30.59
42
43
27.1:19
27 76
82
83
21.4!!
21.29
122
123
13.98
13.1\0
162
163
8.13
8.03
4 30.57 M 27.64 84 2 I.II 124 13.62 164 7.93
5 30.56 45 27.5 I 85 20.92 p_· 13.44 165 7.84
)
6 30.54 46 27.37 86 20.73 126 13.27 166 7.74
7 30.52 47 27.24 87 20.54 127 13.09 167 7.65
8 30.50 48 27. II 88 20.36 128 12.92 168 7.56
9 30.47 49 26.97 89 20. 17 129 12.74 169 7.47
10 30.44 50 26.83 90 19 \IX 130 12.57 170 7.38
II
12
30.41
30.37
,
51- 26.6l.\
26.54
\II 19.79
19.60
131 12.40 171 7.30
92 132 12.2:\ 172 7.21
13 30.33 53 26.39 93 19.41 133 12.06 173 7.13
14 30.29 54 26.25 94 I \J .22 134 lUIS 174 7.05
IS 30.24 55 2o. 10 95 19.03 135 1 1.71 175 6.97
16 30.19 56 25.9-1 96 18.84 136 11.54 176 6.89
17 30.14 57 25.79 97 18.65 137 1137 177 6.81
18 30.08 58 25.113 98 1846 138 11.20 178 6.73
19 30.02 59 2548 99 18 27 139 11.04 179 6.66
20 29.96 60 25.32 100 I!\.OX 140 lO.X9 180 6.59
21 29.90 61 25 16 101 17.8\1 141 10.73 181 6.51
22 29.83 62 24.9\1 102 17.70 142 10.58 182 6.44
23 29.76 63 24.83 103 17.5 1 143 10.43 J iG 6.37
24 29.69 64 24.67 10-1 17.32 144 10.29 184 6.30
25 29.6 1 65 24 .50 lOS 17 13 145 I II. IS 185 6.23
26 29.53 60 24.33 106 16.94 1-16 10.0I 186 6.17
27 29.45 67 24.16 107 16.75 147 9.87 187 6.10
28 29.36 6R 23. 9<J 108 lo.56 148 9.74 188 6.04
29 29.28 69 23.82 109 16.37 149 9.61 18\1 5.97
30 29.18 70 23.64 II0 I o. 19 ISO 9.48 190 5.91
31
32
29.09
28.99
71
72
23.47
23.29
111
112
16.00
15.81 ,1 151
-_..,
9.36
9.23
19 1
192
5.!!5
5.79
33 28.90 73 23.12 113 15.63 153 9.11 193 5.73
34 28.79 74 22.94 114 15.44 154 9.00 1\14 5.67
35 28.69 75 22.76 115 15.26 155 8.88 195 5.61
36 28.58 76 22.58 1 16 15.07 156 8.77 196 5.55
37 28.47 77 ,. ., ,. .
2 2 .4 0
J 17 14.89 157 S.66 197 5.50
38 28.36 78 -"'-·-- 118 14.70 !58 8.55 198 5.44
39 28.25 79 22.03 119 14.52 159 8.44 199 5.39
40 28.13 80 21.!)5 120 14.34 160 8.33 200 5.33
• When element "'tdth-thtc nc'' rauo exceeds ;.,. ,cc App. R5.3. LRFO Spcctficalton
Reproduced with pcrml\\1011 from the AISC LRFO \>l anual.
30 COLUM:-IS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS !CHAP. 4
Building columns arc most commonly W shape . in the W14-W4 series. The Wl4 and WJ2
eries are well suited to carrying heavy loads in multistory buildings. The W lo to W40 series are
seldom used for col umns because of their inefficiency due to their
relatively low values of r, (the radius of gyration about th e weak y axis). The most efficient
column sect ions arc struct ural shapes with '• = r,. (i.e., equal radii of gyration about both principal
axes). Included in this category arc pipe and tube shapes, which arc often used in lightly loaded
single-story application . Because they are rolled only with relatively mall cross sections.
structural pipes and tubes arc not available for
carrying heavy column loads.
DISPLACEM ENT
The decrease in the length of a member due to axial comprc sion under service loads is
PI
t::. = -- [4.3]
EA :
where 6. =axial shortening of the member. in
P= (unfactorcd) axial compressive force in the member. kips
I= length of the member. in
Solved Problems
ln Probs. 4.1 to 4.3. determine whether the given column shape is a slender-element section:
(a) In A36 steel(/\. = 36 ksi)
(b) IfF,. = 50 ksi
4.1. Wl4X34.
If the width-thickne ratio of an element i greater than i.,. it is a slender element.
Refernng to Table 4-l and Fig. 4-1. for the flange\ of a W shape
95
• f'i - = tf F. = 36 ksi
. 95 15.8
A
• V F. v36
-
= 95 if F. =50 ksi
.Jffi=
13.4 v50
for the web of a W shape
253 it F. = 35 ksi
VS6 =
' - 42.2
253- VF.- if F. =50 ksi
II.,- 253 = 35
8
v'5Ti
From the Propcrtte\ Tables for W Shapes. in Part I of che AISC LRFD Manual (Compact Section
Criteria}. for a WI4X34. flange bit =b1/2r 1 = 7.4, web h, / r.= 43.1.
Since web (lz..f t. --B.I) -> (i., = 42.2). the web of a WI4X34 is a slender element tn A36 steel.
A
WI4X34 is a \lender-clement ection if F. = 36 or SO k\t
4.2. Wl4x43.
From the Properties Tables for W Shapes. for a WI4X43, tlange b/t = b1/2rr = 7.5. web h.fr. = 37.4.
(a) In A36 steel. flange;.,= 15.8. web J., = 42.2. (Sec Prob. 4.1.) Since flange (b/t = 7.5) < ()., = 15.8)
and web (h, / r. = 37.4) < ().,= 42.2). a Wl-\x43 column is not a slender-element section in A36 steel.
CHAP. -1] COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSIO MEMB I :RS 31
(b) However , tf F =50 ksi. flange )., = 13.4. v.eb i., = 35.8. (See Prob. -1.1.) Becau e web (lrJt. =
37.-1) .> (i.,= 35.R). a W14x-13 column 1s a slender-clement -;ccuon 11 f =50 k t.
4.3. The welded section tn Fig. -+-3.
Refernng to fable 4·I and Fig. 4-L for the flange., of a welded bo\ cction
23S
,, =53.9 It
. 238 v36-16.5
A
' -v •
• IF .:._
• 23!!
F.- - --11. 1 tf /·: = 50 1-. ·
y::>O- 16.5
for the web
253 - ')
v'36 -42._ if ": = 36 ksi
253
y'SO = 35.8 if 1';. 5(1 hi
For t h e IX in x Ill in box section in Fig. 4-3.
b = h, = 18 in- 2 x ' in= 17 in
.
lr=I=I= • Ill
I .
b h 17111
-=-= =3-1
in
c '·
(a) In A3o -.teel. bit and h /t. < i., in all ca!>es: there arc no -.J.:nder element\.
(b) H F =50 k 1. there arc abo no slender elemenh. bccau'c />It and h /1••, i., 111 all ca es.
18 In
..I
18 10
--. f- 1= t in (typical) h,
b
- -1
Fig. 4-3
I n Probs. 4.4 to 4.7, determine the effective length factor K. from !'able 4-2. tor the given columns.
4.4. A building column free to rotate at each end. in a braced frame.

As a rc,ult of the hracmg. lateral translation of the end, ot the column '' tnh1b11cd . "Rotation free and
tran latton fixed" at hoth end!> i cased 111 Table 4-2: K = 1.0.
4.5. A buildmg column in a braced frame; deep beam rigidl) connected to the column restrict
rotation of it end .
Th1s corresponds to case a. "rotation fixed and tran..lation fixed" at each end Although K = 0.65 is
tndtcatcd for thl\ ca-.e 111 Table -1-::! . it i-; customary to let K = 1.0 '"a con,erntttve mtnimum .
32 COLUMNS AND OTHE R COMPRESSION MEMBERS (CHAP . 4
4.6. A building column in a ngtd frame (not braced): end rotation is inhibited by deep beams.
"Rotation fixed and translation free" i case c: K = 1.2 i recommended.
4.7. The sam e as in Prob. 4 .6, except that th e base of the column is ''pin-connected" to a
footing.
"Rotation fixed and translation free" at the top and ·•rotation free and translati on fixed" at the
bottom i case f: K = 2.0.
In Probs. 4.8 to 4.10, use the alignment chart to determine K . All steel is A36 .
4.8. The column shown in Fig. 4-4.
W21 X 50
(typ1cal beam)
-;: A T
& x 8] .; Column requ1red strength:
- .::: p = 750 I<Jps
= 3·!I B
I == 1
fig. 4-4
All columns are W 14x99. 15 ft 0 in l ong: all beams are W2 1 xSO. 30ft 0 in long. The webs of
all members are in the same plane. as shown.
For the typical column. Wl4X99: I,= 1110 in'
I= 15.0 ft X 12 tn/ft = 180 in
I, 1110 in• . ,
-= =6.17tn
I, 180 in
For the typical beam. W21x50: I, = 948 in•
I= 30.0 ft x 12 in/ft = 360 in
fE = 984 i.n· = 2.73tn'

I. 360 tn
According to Eq . (4.I I. the alignment ch art parameter
G' = (1/1), + (1/1),2

(I/{)., + (I/1).:
At both the upper (A) and lower (8) joints
G =G =2X6.17tn'=1 2 .26
'' " '1 X ') 73 '
- -· 10
From Eq. (4.2), G = G' x SRF.

Determining SRF (the stiffnes reduction factor):
P,, = 750 ktp = 25 8 k
.·
?9
- I. • . Sl
A, m
lnterpolali ng in Table 4-3. SRF = 0 39 At joint> A and B. G,., = Gn = G' x SRF = 2.26 x 0.39 = 0.88. In
Fig. 4-2. a stratght hne drawn from G, = 0.88 to G,= 0.88 intersec" wtth K = 1.3.
CHAP. 41 COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS 33
4.9. Repeat Prob. 4.8. with the Wl-lX99 columns (in Fig. 4-4) turned 90°.
For the typacal column. \\'14x99 : /, = 402 in•
un •
I= 180 in I• II,. - ""- an--.,·-">.3. tn '
180in
Typical beam 1.11.= 2.73. a in Prob .
4.8.
At JOints A and 8
.= 2 x 2.23 in '_ ().,.,
G . ., . ' - .o..
_ x2.73a n
The stiffnc reduction faciOr. SRF= 0.39. as above. AI joints A HOd B. GA = Gn = c· X SRF=
0.!l2 X 0.39 = 0.32.
In Fig. 4-2. a straight line extended from G, = 0.32 10 G11 = 0.32 ind ica t e thai K = l.l.
4.10. The column shown in Fig. 4-5. Column connection to the footing is (a) rigid. (b) pinned.
The WIO x33 column is 12ft 0 in high; the W16x26 beam is 30ft 0 in long. The webs of
the
column and the beam are in the plane of the frame.
Wl6 X 26
X Column requaredtrength
c P. - 200\.a
Fig. 4-5
For the WIOX33 column: I,= 170

in"
I= 12.0 ft x 12 in /ft = 144 in
I, 170 in" ,
-= =1.18in
I, 144 in
For the W l6x26 beam:/,= 301
in•
I= 30.0 ft x 12 m/ ft = 360 an
I, 301 in" .
-= =0.84tn '
I. 360 in
From Eq . 1-1.11. G = 1.18/0.84 =
1.41
P. 200 kip
-= .=20.6ht
A. 9.71an·
From Table 4-3. by interpolauon. SRF = 0.72. At joant A , G, = G', x SRr = 1.41 x 0.72 = 1.02.
(a) For rigtd anachment to the foundation, G,. = 1.0. K = 1.3 in Ftg. 4-2.
(b) For pan connection to the foundation. G11 = 10. Drawing a hne tn Fig. 4-2 from G, = 1.02 to
Gn = 10 andicate that K = I.9.
34 COLUMNS AND OTHER COM PRESS I ON M EMBERS [CHAP. 4
4.1 J. I n A36 steel. select a 6-in pipe (sec Table 4-5) [or a required axial compressive strength of
200 kips: K L = 10.0 ft
Table 4-5 6-io Pipe Sections
A. m · r. 10
Standard wetght 5 5R :!.25

Extrastrong R 40 2.19
Double extrastrong 15 60 2.06
Try a 6-in tandard weight pipe:
Kl == 10.0 1. 2 in/ft == SJ.3

X
r .25 t n
From Table 4-4 by interpolation, cp,F;. = 26.34 ksi.
The design mcngth for this pipe. cp,P. = ¢, F, , =A .=26.34kip x5.58in z = l 47kips <
200kips
required .
Try a 6-in cxtra trong pipe:
K/ 10.0 ft X 12 in/ ft
-= -, 19. = •S4."
r · '"
lnterpolaung tn Table 4-4. cp F,, = 26.13 k i . The design strength. cp, P.= 1/1.F ,A ,= 26.13 kips/in
x
8.40 tn = 219 ktps > 200 ktps required. This is okay.
4.12. Determine the destgn strength of a W8x40 column (A36 steel) .

K,L, = K,.L,. = 15.0 ft
For a W8X40 >ection , A= ll.7 in>, r, = 3.53 in. r, = 2.o.t in . Since r, < r,. K ,/, / r, governs.
KJ , 15.0ftxl2m/ft
-= = 88.2
r, 2.04 in
From Table 4-4, cp,F,., = 20.32 ksi.
The design strengt h of the column
2
cj>, P,, = b,FaA, = 20.32 kips/in X 11.7 in = 23R kips
4.13. From the Column Tables in the A ISC LRFD Manual. select a W lO column (A36 steel) for a
required strength of 360 kips: K,L_. = K,.L, = 12.0 ft.
From Table 4-6 (reproduced with permission from the AISC LRFD Manual), it can be een that in A36
steel. for K,L, = 12.0 ft. the design axial strength of a WIOX49 column, cp, P.= 372 kips. Since the
372 kips > 360 kips required strength. usc a WIOX49 column.
4.14. Select the most economical WlO column for the case hown in Fig . 4-6. Given: A36 steel:
K = I .0: required strength= 360 kips
.
From Fig. 4-6· K,L , =l.Ox2-t0ft=24.0ft. K,L, = L.Ox 12.0ft = 12.0ft. Assume y-axis buckling
govern . From Table 4-6, for K,L, = 12.0ft. select a WIOX49 (!p, P. =372kip > 360kips
required) . Check r-axis buckling .
Table 4-6
y
F., = 36 ksi
F.,. =SO
X X
ksi COLUMNS
W shapes
Design axia l strength i n kips ( cJ> = 0.85) y
Desi gn ation WlO
Wt ./ft 60 54 49 45 39 33
F. 36 so 36 50 36 50 36 50 36 so 36 50
0 S39 748 483 672 441 612 407 S6S 3S2 489 297 413
6 51 7 706 464 634 422 577 380 515 328 444 276 373
7 S09 692 4S7 621 416 56S 371 497 320 428 269 360
8 500 675 449 606 409 55! 361 478 3l\ 412 261 345
- <.)
a.
u
9
10
1l
491
480
469
657
638
617
440
431
420
590
572
SS3
401
392
382
536
520
S02
350
337
324
458
436
41 2
301
290
27S
393
374
353
252
243
233
329
312
294
".. '.
< )
12 -157 59S 409 533 372 484 311 388 266 332 222 276
..
:
.!:! 13 444 571 398 512 361 465 296 364 2S4 310 211 257
·3 . -':2
- 14 430 S47 385 490 3SO 444 282 339 241 289 200 239
- .... 416 468 424

...,)
';;, 15 523 373 338 267 315 228 267 189 220
<>I)
16 401 497 360 445 326 40 252 290 ?- 246 1 77 202
3 I:.>
J:! 17 387 472 346 422 314 382 ::m 266 201 225 166 184
-
J>
,_.. ••
0c- ·"' 18 371 446 332 399 301 36\ 222 243 188 205 155 167
.
-- !:! 0...
OliO/>
19
20
356
340
42i
395
318 376
30-1 3S3
288
-)
? 7"
340
319
207
192
221
1"9
17S
162
185
167
\44
1 33
150
13S
-
·-- - 22
G)0
> -
0 "0 '
3U9 J46 276 309 250 278 16.1 164 138 138 112 ll2
24 27t 299 248 266 224 239 138 138 1\6 I :6 94 94
<)
l!:: 26 248 ?-S:>. 21 227 199 204 118 118 99 99 80 80
LLl 28 219 220 195 ;96 17S 176 102 102 tiS 85 69 69
30 191 191 170 170 !53 153 'l8 88 74 74 60 60
32 168 168 150 1 50 134 134 78 7F 6S 6S 53 53
33 158 158 141 1 41 126 126 73 TJ 61 61
34 149 149 133 133 119 119
36 133 133 118 118 106 106
Propcrtie
u 1.38 !.52 1.38 1.53 1.39 1.54 1.75 1.93 1.77 1.96 1.81 2.00
P.,. (kips) 99 138 83 1 16 73 101 79 109 64 89 55 77
P.., (ksi) 15 21 13 19 12 17 13 1H ll 16 10 15
P.,(k ips) 209 246 143 168 l1 1 131 121 142 88 104 69 81
P,., (ki ps) 94 130 77 106 64 88 78 108 57 79 38 53
L.,(ft) 10.7 9.I 10.7 9.I 10.6 9.0 8.4 7.1 8.3 7.0 8.1 6.9
L,(ft ) 48.1 32.6 43.9 30.2 40.7 28.3 35.1 24.1 31.2 21.8 27.4 19.7
A (in 17.6 1 5.8 14.4 13.3 I 1 .5
1
) 9.71
I, (in") 341 303 272 248 209 170
I>
4
) 116 103 93.4 53.4 45 36.6
(in
r, (in ) 2.57 '_).).6 2.54 2.0I 1.98 1.94
Ra tio r./ r,. 1.71 l.71 1.71 2.15 2 16 2.16
Note: H eavy line indica te Kl r of 200.
Reproduced wnh permissi on from t he A ISC LRFD Manual.
35
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESS ION [CHAP. 4
36
MEMBERS
si,--I----\S
:
: -
0
.
-
....
s\----I------1, lmcrmcdmtc
lntcm1cdmtc IC\'Cl
....
s
-----I------ Ele\ation
S
Framing plan;
Fig. 4·6
For a W\Ox49. the ratio rJr, =I.71. (See bvttom line in Table 4-6.) The equivalent K, L, for
use in the Column Tables:
K,L, 24.0 ft
(K,. L,)••,.... = I = 71 = 14.0 ft
r, r\. I.
In Table 4·6. for KL = 14.0 ft. the WIOX49 with a design 'trcngth cp,P. = 350 kip> i not
adequate.
Usc a WI Ox 54 column with a design trcngth <j>, P. = 385 kip (KL = 14.0 ft) > 360 kips
required. Stnce r,/ r, = 1.71 for the Wl0x54, as originally a, umed, recomputation of (K,L,).....
is not necessary.
4.15 . A Wl0X49 column. lOft long. carries a ervice load of 250 kips. Calculate its
axial shortening.
PI 250 ktp X ( \().() ft X 12 tn/ft)
. , ,
Shortemng. 6 = 29.(X)() ktp/ tn"14. 111
= 4
EA.
= o.on m
CHAP. 4] COLUMNS AND OTIIER COMPRESS I ON MEMBERS 37
4.16. The section shown in Fig. 4-3 is used for a 40-ft column: K, = K, = 1.0. Determine t he
design compressive strength i r the steel is A36.
The design compressive strength
( £2-/)
The value of <P,F;, can be obtained from Table- . if Kl / r is known. I n this
problem
Kl = 1.0 X 40.0 ft X 12 in/t't = 480 in
r= [i
-y71
A = ( 18 in)"- (17 inf = 35.0 in '
I = I . = I = (lR in)" - ( 17 in l' = 1788 in•

• • 12
1788 in• .
r= 7 15
35.0 in "= · lll
Kl 480 in
-= = 67.2
r 7. 15in
By interpolation in Tabl e 4-4. for Kl Ir = 67.2. ¢,F;, = 24. 13 ksi, t h e desi gn compressive strength
rp,P.= 24. 13 kip;/ in' X 35.0 in'= 845 kip;
Are the following columns slender-clement sections if
(a) F;=36ksi?
(b) F.= 50 ksi?
4.17. Wl2X26. AliS. (a) Yes. (b) Yes.
4.18. WJ2x35. Ans. (a) No. (b) Yes.
4.19. From Table 4-2. determine the effective length factor K for a column totally fixed a t the bottom and
totally free at the top. Ans . K = 2. 1: case e.
4.20. Use the alignme nt chart to calculate K for the colum n in Fig. 4-7 (A36 steel). All colu mns are W l2X
-15,
15 ft 0 in long; a ll beams are WJ6X31. 20f t 0 in long. The webs of all members are in the same
plane. Ans. K = 1.3.
4.21. Complete the design of the column in Prob. 4.8. Assume K, = 1.4, L,. = 15.0 ft, for buckling
perpendicular to the frame in Fig. 4-4. Select tht: most economical Wl-1. A!IS. WI4 X 109.
4.22. Complete the design of the column in Prob. 4.9. Assume K, = 1.4. l., = 15.0 ft. Select the most
economica l Wl4. Arzs . Wl4X99.
4.23. Repeat Prob. 4.14 for a required strength of 300 kips. Ans. WIOX45
38 COLU M NS AN D OTHER COMPR ESSION MEMBERS [CHAP . 4
Roof
Wl6 X 31
(typical beam)
A
c
V>E .c:
"x"g"' o Column requared strength:
P. ft 150 kips
N - "'
I I
z
I B
Fig. 4-7
4.24. Calculate the decrease in length of the 24-ft column in Prob. 4.22 under an axial load of 200 kips.
AilS. D. = 0. 1 5 i n .
Chapter 5
Compact Beams and Other Flexural Members
NOTATION
A = cross-sectional area of member, i n 2
2
A,..= area of the web, in
b =width. in
b1 =width of flange, in
Ct> = bending coefficient. defined in Eq. [5.10]
C,.. =warping constant , ino
c =distance from the centroid to the extreme fiber, in
d =overall depth, in
E =modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 ksi
F,. =compressive residual stress in flange. ksi
Fv =specified minimum yield stress, ksi
ji, =max imum normal stress due to bending, ksi
G =shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11.200 ksi
h = web dimension defined in Fig. 5-7, in
he , h...,= web dimensions defined in Fig. 5-2, in
I= moment of inertia ,
in• J =torsional constant ,
in 4 Lh = unbraced length ,
ft
Lm =limiting unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity (Cb > 1.0). ft
L,, =limiting unbraccd length for full plastic bending capacity \Co= l.O), ft
L, = unbraccd length which is the boundary between ela,tic and inelastic lateral-torsional
buckling. ft
I = length of member. in
M =bending moment, kip-in
Ma =elastic buckling moment . kip-in
M,. =nominal flexural strength of member, kip-in
MP =plastic moment, kip-in
M, =buck ling moment at L,. = L, and Ch = 1.0. kip-in
M 1 =smaller end moment in an unbraced length of beam, kip-in
M2 =larger end moment in an unbraced length of beam, kip-in
P =concentrated load on member, kips
r = radius of gyration. in
S =elastic section modulus. in ·'
t = thickness, in
1,.. =thickness of web, in
V =shea r force, kips
39
40 COMPACT BEAMS A D OTHER FLE:XURAL MEMBERS [CHAP. 5
vn =nominal shear strength. kip

w =unit load. kips per linear ft
X 1 =parameter defined in Eq. (FI-8)
X 2 =parameter defined tn Eq. (Fl-9)
x = subscript relating symbol to the major principal centroida l
axil. y =subscript relating ymbol to the minor princ1pal centroidal
axis Z = plastic section modulus. in
1:1 =deflection of beam. in
).."=limiting width-thickness ratio for compact section
lJ>hM, =design flexural strength, kip-in
tp11 =resistance factor for flexure= 0.90
cp,, V,, = design shear strength. kips
¢,. = resistance factor for shear= 0.90
INTR ODUCTION
This chapter covers compact flexural members not subjected to torsion or axial force.
Compactness criteria as they relate to beams are described in the next section ; noncom pact flexural
memberlo are covered in Chap. 6. Axial tension combined with bending is the subject of Chap. 7;
axial compression combined with bending IS discussed in Chap. 8. Torsion and the combination of
torsion with flexure are covered in Chap. 9.
The strength of flexural members is limited by local buckling of a cross-sectional element (e.g..
the web or a flange), lareral-torsional bucklmg of the entire member, or the development of a plastic
hinge at a particular cross section.
The equations given in this chapter (and in Chap. F of the A I SC LRFD Specification) arc va lid
for flexural members With th e following kinds of compact cross sections and loadings: doubly
!
r::::- --
--
1 ............
• •
I·
(tl)
Q \
\
I
Shear center
Fig. S- 1 Example of beams covered in Chap. 5: (a) W shape (doubly symmetric) loaded in a plane of
symmetry: (b) channel shape (singly ymmetric) loaded through hear center in plane of symmet ry or parallel
to web
CI IAP. 5J COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 41
symmetric (e.g., W, box. and solid rectangular shapes), loaded in a plane of symmetry [as in Fig. 5-
l(a)) and singly symmetric (e.g., channel shapes), loaded in the plane of symmetry or through the
shear center parallel to the web las in Fig. 5-l (b)].
The shear center is defined and its significance is explained in Chap. 9. Shear center location for
channels arc given in the Properties Tables in Part 1 of the AISC LRFD Manual.
Load:. not applied as shown in Fig. 5-l(a) and (b) will cause torsion. or t\\iSttng of the member.
However, if restraint against torsion is provided at the load points and points of support, the
equations of this chapter are still valid.
COMPACfNESS
The concept of compactness relates to local buckling. As described in more detail in Chap. 4.
cross sections arc classified as compact. noncompact, or !.lender-element sections. A section is
compact if the flanges are continuously connected to the web, and the width-thickness ratios of all its
compression elements are equal to or less than ;.,,. Structural steel members with compact sections
can develop their full strength without local inc;tability. In design. the limit state of local buckling
need not be considered for compact members.
Compactness criteria for beams (as stated in Sec. 85 of the AISC LRFD Specification) arc given
in Table 5-1 and Fig. 5-2. Jf the width-thickness ratios of the web and flange in flexural compression
arc equal to or less than ).P, beam design is by the standard method described in this chapter.
Otherwise the special provisions of Chap. 6 (taken from the appendixes of the A1SC LRFD
Specification) are required.
Tabl e 5-1 Limiting Width -Thickness Ratios for Beams
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratio.

;.,.
Width-Thickness
Beam l.:.lcment Ratio General A36 Steel
Flanges of W and other I shapes and b/r b/ r 65/#. 10.8

channels
Flanges of 'quare and rectangular box 190/ Vf. 31.7
secuon\: flange cover plate and
diaphragm plates between lines of h./r •.
fasteners or welds
Webs in ncxural compression 640/#. 106.7
FL EX URAL BEHAVIOR
The distribution of internal normal strains and stresses on the cross section of a beam is shown in
Fig. 5-3. It is based on the idealized stress-strain diagram for structural steel in Fig. 5-4, which is a
simplified version of the actual stress-strain curves in Fig. 1-2.
A shown in Ftg . 5-3. the normal strain di tribution is alwayc; linear. The magnitude of train is
proportional to the distance from the neutral (or ccntroidal) axts. On one side of the neutral axis.
the fibers of the flexural member are in tension (or elongation); on the other side. in compression (or
shortening). The distribution of normal stresses depends on the magn.itude of the load. Under
working loads and until initial yielding, stresses (which are proportional to strains in Fig. 5-4) are
also linearly distributed on the cross ser.:tion. Beyond initial yielding. the strain will increase under
additional load. The maximum stress. however. is the yield stress f".. Yielding will proceed inward.
from the outer fiber to the neutral axis. as the load is increased, until a plasuc lunge is formed.
42 COMPACf BEA MS AND OTH ER FLEXU RAL MEMBERS
.
.
, (CHAP . 5
h,
I
b • b1 - 3t
h, h. - 31
Fie.5-2 Definitions of widths (b and h,) and thickness (flange thickness r and web thickness r.,) for use
in Table 5-1
Cross
1\
J
Beam sce1ion
Stresses
Strains
F•.--.
Compre$sion + Tension Workin

g
load
Initial
yielding
Plastic
hinge
Fig. S-3 Aexural strains and stresses

CHAP. 5) COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBER S 43
Strain. in/in
Fig. 5-4 Idealized stress-strain diagram for structu ral steel
The plastic hinge condition (under which the entire cross section has yielded) represents the absolute
limit of usefulnes s of the cross section. Only beams which are compact (i.e., not susceptible to local
buckling) and adequately braced (to prevent lateral-torsional buckling) can attain this upper limit of
nexural strength .
The relationships between moment and maximum (extreme fiber) bending stresses, tension or
compression , at a given cross section have been derived in a number of engineering mechanics
textbooks . At the various stages of loading, they are as follows:
Until i nit ial yielding
M =Sf,. (5.1)
At initial yielding
[5.2)
At full plastification (i.e.• plastic hinge)
(5.3)
Because of the presence of residual stresses (prior to loading, as a result of uneven cooling
after rolling of the steel member). yielding actually begins at an applied stress of F,- - Equation
[5.2] should be modified to
[5.4)
Equation [5.3] is still valid. however. The plastic moment is not affected by residual stresses.
(Because of their existence in a zero-moment condition before the application of loads, the tensile
and compressive residual stresses must be in equilibrium .)
The terms in Eqs. [5.I] to [5.4] are defined as
M = bending moment due to the applied loads, kip-in
M, = bending moment at initial yielding. kip-in
MP = plastic moment. kip-in
S = elastic section modulus, in 3
Z = plastic section modulus , in 3
f ,. = maximum normal stress due to bending, ksi
F, = specified minimum yield stress, ksi
F, = the maximum compressive residual stress in either flange; 10 ksi for rolled shapes;
16.5 ksi for welded shapes
Elastic section modulus S = (5.5)

c
44 COMPACT BEAMS A:-10 OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS (CHAP. 5
where I is the moment of inertia of the cross section about its centroidal axis. in ; and c is the
distance from the centroid to the extreme fiber, in. The Properties Tables in Part I of the A I SC
LRFD Manual i nclude the values of/, S, and Z for all the rolled shapes listed.
ELASTIC VERS US PLA STIC

ANALYSIS
Design by either clastic or plastic analysis is permiucd by the A1SC LRFD Specification (Sec.
A5.l). The more popular elastic analysis has been adopted throughout this text. When an elastic
analysis procedure (such a!. moment distribution or a typical frame analysis computer program) is
used. the factored moments are obtained assuming linear elastic behavior. Although thi assumption
i incorrect at the strength limit states. the fact that clastic analysis is less complex and is valid under
normal service loads has led to its widespread use.
Several restrictions have been placed on plastic design. They are stated in the AISC LR FD
Specification in Sees. A5.1. 85.2, C2.2, El.2. Fl. l . H 1.2, and
lJ.
DESIGN FLEX URAL STR ENGTH: Cb = 1.0, Lb

s L,
The design strength of flexural members is <f> >Mn, where <l>t> = 0.90. For compact sections. the
design bending strength is governed by the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling.
As the name implie!., lateral-torsional buckling is an overall instability condition of a beam
involving the simultaneous twisting of the member and lateral buckling of the compression flange.
To prevent lateral-torsional buckling. a beam must be braced at certain intervals against either
twisting of the cross section or lateral displacement of the compression flange. Unlike the bracing of
columns (which requires another structural member framing into the column), the bracing of beams
to prevent lateral-torsional buckling can be minimal. Even the intermittent welding of a metal (floor
or roof) deck to the beam may be sufficient bracing for this purpose.
The equations for the nominal flexural strength M, follow from the preceding discussion of
flexural behavior. Length L, is defined as the distance between points of bracing. Compact shapes
bending about their minor (or y) axes will not buckle before developing a plastic hinge.
[5.6}
for bending about the minor axis regardless of Lh.

Compact sections bending about their major (or x) axes will also develop their full plastic
moment capacity without buckling. if Lh s L,,.
M,x = M,,. = Z, F, [5. 7)
for bending about the major axis if Lb s Lp.

Jf L, = L.. lateral-torsional buckling occurs at initial yielding. From Eq. [5.-lj.
M,_. = M.. = S,(F,- F,) [5.8}
for bending about the major axis if Lh =

L,.
lf Lp < Lt> < L., M, for bending about the maJor axis is determined by linear interpolation
between Eqs. (5. 7} and
[5.81:
[5.9}
CHAP. 51 COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 45
In the foregoing
3
z, = plastic section modulus with respect to the minor centroidal (or y) axi.,, in
3
Zx = plastic section modulus with respect to the major centroidal (or x) axis, in
1
S, =elastic sect ion modulus with respect to the major centroidal (or x) axis, in
Lengths LP and L, are defined in Sec. Fl.2 of the AISC LRFD Specification as follows.
For !-shaped sections and channels bending about their major axis
300ry
LP =Vf: (FI-4)
For solid rectangular bars and box beams
_ 3750r,. ,,..-:;
LP- M viA (Fl-5)
p
where '• = the radius of gyration with respect to th e minor ccntroidal (or y) axis, in
A =cross-sectional area, in
1= torsional constant, in•
The limiting laterally unbraced length L, and the corresponding buckling moment M, are
determined as follows .
For 1-:.ha ped section!>, doubly symmetric and singly symmetric with the compres:.ion nange larger
than or equal to the tension nange. and channels loaded in the plane of the web
L,= ;J
> '
Vl+Yl+X 2(f; -F,}'- (FI-6)
M,= (f;- F_)Sx (FI-7)

- Jt {EGjA
where X I- s. ( F1-8)
v ----:z- (FJ-9)
x =4S( )z
2 (v GJ
where E = modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 ksi
G =shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 k si
ly = moment of inertia about the minor centroidal (or y) axis, in4
C,.. = warping constant , in 6
For symmetric box sections bending about the major axis and loaded in the plane of symmetry,
M,and L, shall be determined from formulas (Fl-7) and (Fl-10), respectively .
For solid rectangular bars bending about the major axis
57,000r, Y.fA
L = . (FI-10)
' M
'
M, = F;S. ( Fl
-11)
Values of 1and C.. for many structural shapes arc listed in Torsion Properti es Tables in Part I of
the A ISC LRFD Manual.
The practical design of steel beams (Cb = 1.0) can best be done graph1cally by ( I} reference to
the beam graphs in the section entitled Design Moments in Beams, in Part 3 of the AISC LRFD
Manual , where q>hM, is plotted versus Lb for F; = 36 and SO ksi or (2) constructing a graph similar to
Fig . 5-S from data in the Load Factor Design Selection Table, also in Part 3 of th e AISC LRFD
Manual.
46 CO'v1PA<..I BEA 1S A:-10 OTHE-R FLE.XURAL MEMBERS !CHAP. 5
/ +,M, for c. = 1.0
+.M forc. = 10
/
---------4------------------4--------L.
L,
l<'ig. 5-S Dt:termination of design flexural strength t/J.M,. (C,. = 1.0)
BENDING COEFFICI ENT

Cb
The bending. coeffictcn t is defined as
[5. JO]
where M 1 is the smaller and M is the larger end moment for the unbraced segm ent of the beam
under considera ti on. If th e rotatio n s due to end mom ents M 1 and M2 are in opposite directions,
then M 1 / M 2 is negative; otherwise, M 1 /M2 is positive. Coeffic ient C1, = 1.0 for unbraced cantilev
ers and for members where the moment within part of the unbraccd segment i s greater than or
equal to the larger segment end moment (e.g.. simply supported beams, where M1 = M 2 = 0).
Coefficient Cn accounts for the effect of moment gradient on lateral-totsional buckling. The
LRFD moment capacity cquationc; were derived for a beam with a constant moment braced only at
the support . failing. in lateral-torsional buckling: C o = 1.0. I f the moment diagram between two
successtve braced potnt'> ts nor constant, th .. described regton is less susceptible to lateral-torsional
buckling.: in general, 1.0 < C 1,< 2.3.
DESIGN FLEXU RAL STREN GTH: Cb <:! 1.0, J.b

s L,
Incorporating C1, requires modification of Eq!>. [5.8] and [ 5.9]. Equation [ 5. 7] docs not change.
M,.x = M,,. = /.., F. [5. 7]
for bending about the major axis if Lh s Lm. H owever.
,\-In, = CnM, = C,S,(F.- F,) s M,., (5.11]
for bending about the maJor axts if L o = L,. and th e linear interpola tion equation. Eq
(5.9].
becomes
Mn
M,) = C, M,.- (M,,- Lh- L1,)] (F1-3}
s M,.
L, _ L,.
[ (
for Lm < Lh < L,. All the terms in the equ ations are as defined above. The relation ships are
shown graphically in Fig. 5-6. where it can be seen th at L., is the unbraced length at which Eqs.
[5. 7[ and ( F1-3) intersect.
CHAP. 5] COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 47
;,M, for
- ?-...........
C, = 1.0 \ /
t,M., for C, > 1.0
cp,M" for C,= 1.0 ---" "-..
L-----+----------t---1----- !.,
L, L,
Fig. S-6 Determination of design flexural strength tf>,,M., (C1,> 1.0)
The design of steel beams (1.0 < Cn < 2.3) should be done graphically by developing a plot
similar to that in Fig. 5-6. After determining Cb with Eq . (5.W], one can find the other required
parameters (L,.. cJ>nM,., L" and ¢&M,) in the Load Factor Design Selection Table in Part 3 of the
AlSC LRFD Manual.
When C,, > 1.0, there is a twofold advantage in including C, > I.0 in Eqs. [5. I 1] and ( FI-3 ),
and
noi conservatively letting C, = 1.0 (as in the graphs in Part 3 of the AlSC LRFD Manual): (1)
the unbraced length for which M, = MP is extended from L,. to L,,. and (2) for Ln > L,, the
moment capacity M, is multiplied by Cn. The reader can find these facts depicted in Fig. S-6.
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH: Lb > L,

If ihe unbraced length L1, > L, and C, = L.O. elastic lateral-torsional buckling occurs. Th ere is a
significant reduction in the flexural design strength ¢nM, as Lb increases beyond L,. Intermediate
bracing should be provided. if possible. to avoid such uneconomical designs. However. if L, > L,
(FJ-12)
for bending of a compact section about its major axis.
The critical elastic moment M e, is defined as follows. For doubly symmetric 1-shaped members
and channels loaded in the plane of the web
(Fl-13)
For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box sect ions
M = 57.000C, VM
rr L,/ r,.
(Fl-14)
48 COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS [CHAP. 5
GROSS AND NET CROSS SECTIONS

Flexural members are usually designed on the basis of their gross sections. According to Sec. B I
of the AISC LRFD Specification. the rules for beams with holes in the flanges are as follows:
(I) No deducation is made for holes in a given flange if the area of the hol es is equal to or less
than 15 percent of the gross area of the flange.
(2) For holes exceeding this limit, only the area of holes tn excess of 15 percent is deducted .
DESIGN SHEAR STRENGTH
The shear strength of beams c;hould be checked. Although flexural strength usually controls the
selection of rolled beams. shear strength may occasionally govern. particularly for short-span
members or those supportin g concentrated loads. In built-up members, the thickness of the web
plate is often determined by shear.
For rolled shapes and built-up members without web stiffeners. the equations in Sec. F2 of the
AISC LRFD Specificat ion can be somewhat stmplified. as follows. The design shear strengt h is
1/J,, vn' where 1/J.. = 0.90.
h 418
For-<
t.., v fly
V,, = 0.6f;A [5. 12]
418 h 523
For <-s
vFy t.., vFy
418/..[i\
Vn = 0.6F,A I I [5. 13]
I
h h h
h
h
Fig. S-7 Definition of h for various hape

CHAP. 5] COMPACf BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 49
h
523
For -> -:-
7":: 132,000
t,. vF, V,, =A... (h/t../ (5.14)
where V,, = nominal shear strength, kips

2
A ... = area of the web. in = dt...
d =overall depth . in
t,. =thickness of web . in
It = the following web dimensions . in: clear distance between fillets, for rolled shapes;
clear distance between flanges for welded sections (See Fig . 5-7.)
The limit states for shear strength are yielding of the web in Eq. [5.121, inelastic buckling of the
web in Eq. (5.13], and elastic buckling of the web in Eq. (5.14].
DISPLACEM ENT AND

VIBRATION
The two primary serviceability considerations for beams are displacement and vibration.
Traditionally , the maximum deflections of floor beams have been limited to W, of the span under
the service live load specified in the governi ng building code. Depending on the use of the member
and its span , other deflection criteria (stated in inches or in fractions of the span) may be more
appropriate . Formulas for maximum beam deflections under various loading conditions are given in
many textbook s on engineering mechanics and in th e AlSC LRFD Manual , Part 3. under the
heading Beam Diagram s and Formul as. The most common beam loadings are shown here in
Table 5-2. together with the resultin g m aximum shears. moments, and deflections.
Table 5-2 Beam Formulas
Loading Condition Maximum Value Location
Simple beam-uniform load

wl
w M =- Midspan
8
jj I
A I
wl
V=-
2
Ends
'
6=
swr Midspan
M 384£/
Simple beam-concentrated loa d at center
r #/
PI
M =-
4
p
Midspan
{12 /12 V=- Ends

I• •I• ..I 2
PI'
6= Midspan
M 48£/
50 COMPACf BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXU RAL MEM BERS [CH AP. 5
Table 5-2.--<ontd.
Loading Condition Maximum Value Location
Simple beam-concentrated load at any point

p
X M=Pab
Point of load
I
'\
'//// 0 V=
'/// > b Right end
I
a .,,...
I b 6
= Pab(a + 2b)\ha(a + 2b)
x = ""v a(a; 2b)
1: :1
M
I a 27£//
Cantilever beam-uniform loa d
w M
wf
I Fixed end
=-
• 2 Fixed end
I V = wl
M
I
'
wr Free end
6 = 8£/
v---
I
Canti lever beam-concentrated load at free end
I
r M = PI
V=P
PI
Fixed end
Fixed end
Free end
I I 6 = 3£/
Beams that are otherwise satisfactory have occasionally been the cause of annoying floor
vibrations. Particularly sensitive are large open floor areas with long-span beams. free of partitions
and other significant sources of dampi ng, or energy release. To prevent excessive vibration it has
been customary to specify the minimum depth of floor beams as a fraction (e.g., 211 ) of their span.
Another approach is to perform a simplified dynamic analysis. The subject of structural dynamics is
beyond the scope of this text. Information on beam vibrations is available in several published
journal papers. including:
T. M. Murray , "Acceptability Criterion for Occupant- induced Floor Vibrations,' '
AISC Engineering Journal, 2d Quarter. 1981 .
T. M. Murray, "Design to Prevent Floor Vibrations."' A I SC Engineering Journal, 3d Quarter,
1975.
CH AP. 5] COMPACf BEAMS AND OTli ER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 51
Solved Problems
In Probs. 5.1 to 5.3, determin e whether the given beam is compact: (a) in A36 steel (F..= 36 k i).
(b) if F..= 50 ksi.
5.1. W6X 15.

If the width -thicknes:. ratio of an el ement is greater than J.,.. t he ec tion is noncompact.
Referring to Table 5-1 and Fig. 5-2. for the flanges of a W shape
65
65 \[36 = if F. = 36 ksi
)..
10.8
,, = VF,
65 F.. =50 ksi
y'SO= 9.2 if
for the web of a W h

ape 640 tf F. = 36 kst
640 '1/36 = 106.7
)..,, = VF, =
640 F.. =50 ksi
90.5 if
vso=
From the Properties Tables for W Shapes. in Part 1 of the A ISC LRFD Manual (Compact Sccuon
Criteria): for a W6x 15
b bl
flange -=-= 11.5
I 211
web- ",_· =21.6
Since fl ange (b/t = 11.5) >(.A."= 10.8). the W6x 15 beam i noncompact in A36 :.teel. Like\\t c.
11 t:.
n oncompact if F. =50 k:.t.
5.2. WJ 2x65.
From the Properties Tables for W Shapes. for a Wl2x65
b b,
flange =- 9.9
1 21,
lr,
web =24.9
r.
(a) fn A36 steel
flange;.,, = I 0.8
web !.,, = I 06.7 (See Prob. 5.1.)
Since flange (b/t = 9.9) < (}.,. = 10.8), and web (hJt. = 2-'.9) < (}..P = 106.7), a W 12x65 beam
t\
compact tn A36 steel.
(b) Howevc:r. if F.. = 50 ksi
flange;.,,= 9.2
web i..l' = 90.5 (See Prob. 5.1.)
Because flange (b/t=9.9)>(}.,.=9.2), a WI2X65 beam i;, noncompact if F.. =50 ksi.
COMPAt"T BEAMS AND OTHER Fl FX U RAL MEMBERS (CIIAP. 5
5.3. The bu ilt -up beam 'ectmn in Fig. 5-8.
Referring to Fig. 5-2:

b b, Jilin
flange-= - 9.0
I 2t1 2 X I in
web h, = 40 in
RO.O
I. 0.5
Ill
(a) The beam 1., comp< ct in A36 steel because flange (b/t = 9.0) < (J.P = 10.8) and web (h f t.=
XO. II l <.. (}.,. = 106.7)
(b) The beam 1\ a l\o compact if F. =50 ks1 hccau\e flange (bit= 9.0) < ().P = 9.2) and web (lr,l t. =
8().()) <' (i.,. = l){J.5)
::I..1. r
T
I I
T
-
-
c
-tin "0'
c
- - :: "'
N 0 • X
"' "'
..1.
L 1 j J
T
.5 18'"
-I
f- ..I
Fig. 5-8
5.4. For the croc;c; <,cellon m Fig. 5-8. with four l 1 -in·d1ameter holes for bolts (two holes per
flange. a'> shtmn). dctcrmmc the de ign values of
(a) S., the cla,tic \ection modulus for maJor axis bendi ng.
(b) Z,. the pla\llc section modulus for major-axis bending.
For de;ign purpose\, Ihe width of each bolt hole i tak en a . in greater than the nominal dimension
of th e hole. The " 15 percent rule" is then applied to d etermin e whether the gross section may be
used in flexura l de ign For each flange
llole area= 2 x ( !,'., + ,'.)in x l1n = 2.25 in
Gros; area= 18 in x I111 = 18 in '
•
llole area 2.25 Ill"
Gross area l!illl"
Since the ar.:a of the hole' 1\ less than 15 percent of the flange area. the holes rna> he d1sregarded; the
grm.> eros; \Ct:llon 1\ u\ed in flexural design.
(a) S, = 1,/c. v.hcn.: r 1s tho: major ce/1/rordal ax1s. f'or the symmetric secuon in Fig . 5-7. the centroid
ca n be located by inspection. (Otherwi t:. ct lculali on W(lulu be required.) Abo
d --12 in
c=.., ") =.. , lin -
- -
CJIAP. 5] COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 53
The contributions of the two flange& and the web to the moment of inertia /, are
Elements
18inx(l m)1 _ _ ·] .•
( . . ) 2 32
8 20
2 Flange [ + I 10 X I10 ( .) tn)" X = b,l 10
12
0 .5 i n x ( 4 0 i n) '
Web - - - -- -=+ - - - - In' - 0. = 2 ,
.•
667
'· 17,799 .
L
1
S = in' = 84 8
10
'
21 in
(b) Z, =!AD, where A is the cross-sectional area of each element and D represents its distance
from the centroidal axis. In calculating z.. the upper half of the web (in flexural
compression) and the
lower half (in flexural ten ion) are taken \Cparately .
Elements AD
2 Flanges ((18in xI in) X 20.5 in] x 2= 738 in'

2 half-Webs 1(20in x0.5in) x lOin X2=200in'
z. 938in'
Z, = 938 in'
5.5. Repeat Prob. 5.4 for four I ; -in-diameter holes.

For each flange, gross area= 18m (as in Prob. 5.4). 15 percent of gross area = 0.15 x 18in 2 = 2.70 m
.
hole area = 2 x (Ij!, + 1 )in x I 10 = 3.25 in .
In flexural design, only the hole area in excess of 15 percent of the flange area is deducted. Design
hole area= 3.25 in - 2.70 in 2 = 0.55 in 2 for each flange.
(a) Adjusting /, in Prob . 5.4:
Hole/, = !AD = (0.55 in x (20.5 m) ] x 2 = 462 in'
Net section /, = gross section /, -
hole /,
4
= 17,799in -462in'
= 17.337 in'
. I, 17.337 in ,
Net sechon S, = -= = 826 m
c 21 in
(b) Adjusting Z, in Prob . 5.4:
Hole Z, =!AD = (0.55 in 2 x 20.5 in) x 2 = 23 in '
Net section Z, = gross section Z, - hole z.
= 938 in ' - 23 m '
= 915in·'
5.6. For a simply supported W24x76 beam, l aterally braced only at the supports. determine the
flexural design strength for (a) minor-axis bending and (b) major-axis bending. Use the Load
Factor De ign Selection Table for Beams in Part 3 of the A lSC LRFD Manual , an
excerpt from which appears herein (with permi ssion) as Table 5-3. Steel is A36.
54 COMPACf BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL M EMBERS (CHAP. 5
+.M.= 540 kip-ft

t ---------- c . -
W 2 4 X 76
1+.M, 343 kip-fi 1.0
L-----------+--------------- --------4---------
L.
L, = S.O ft L. = 23.4 ft
Fig. 5-9
The W24x76 is a compact section. This can be verified by noung that in the Properlies Tables in Part 1
of the A ISC LRFD Manua l , both b1/2tr and h,/t •. for a W24X76 beam arc less than the respective fl ange
and web values of A1, for F,. = 36 ksi (Table 5- 1 ).
(a) For minor- (or y-) axis bending. M., = M,,, = Z,.F., regardless of unbraced length (Eq. [5.61).
The flexural design strength for minor-axis bending of a W24 x 76 i always equal to rp,M., =
rp,z, F, = 0. 90 x 28.6 in ' x 36 ksi = 927 kip-in = 77 kip-ft.
·
(b) The flexural design strength for major-axis bending depends on C, and L,. For a simply
supported member. the end moments M, = M,= 0; C,= 1.0.
Figure 5-9 can be plotted from the information in Table 5-3:
For 0 < L.< ( L,. = 8.0 ft). rp,M.= rp.M,. = 540 kip-ft
At L, = L, = 23.4 ft . q>,.M•• = q>,.M, = 343 kip-ft. Lmcar mterpolation • required for L,. < L,<
L,. For
L,. > L,. refer to the beam graphs tn Part 3 of the AISC LRFD \
1anual.
Table S-3 Excerpt from Load Factor Design Selection Table (AISC LRFO Manual,
Part 3)
For F, = 36 ksi
z.. rp,M". rp,.M,. L,, L,

tn Shape kip-ft kip-ft ft ft
224 W24X 84 605 382 8.t 24.5

221 . W21 x93 51.)7 374 7.7 26.6
212 WI4X120 572 371 15.6 67.9
211 W18X97 570 367 11.0 38.1
200 W24X 76 540 343 8.0 23.4

198 WI6X100 535 341 10.5 42.1
196 W21X83 529 333 7.6 24.9
192 WI4X 109 518 337 15.5 62.7
186 Wl8x86 502 324 ll.(J 35.5
186 Wl2Xl20 502 318 13.0 75.5
177 W24 X 68 478 300 7.8 22.4

175 Wl6x89 473 302 10.4 38.6
Nott! : nexural design strength q,,.M .= q,.MP as tabulated I'> •ahd for t.s L.., If ( • = 1.0,
L., -t.,.: othcnnse . L,. > LP . Here q, = 0.90.
CHAP. 51 CO PA<..I BEAMS A:-ID OTIIER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 55
5.7. For the same W24x76 beam in major-axis bending, laterally braced at its centerline. with
either a uniform load or a concentrated load at the center, determine the flexural design
strength.
According to Eq. [5-101
c = [1.75 + l.05 M,, + 0.3 (M,),] < 2.3
Refer to Table 5-2. l-or ctthcr unbraced half of the beam under either loading mdicated. M, = 0 and
M2 >0; M ,/ M 2 = 0. In Eq [5-/0[, c
= ( 1.75 + LOS X 0 + 0.3 X 0) =
1.75.
Figure 5-10 can be denved from Fig. 5-9 aJ. folloo.>.s . For all L,. the design flexural \lrcngth for
C, = 1.75, rp.M••(C,= I.75) = I.75 x rp,M,,(C,= 1.0) :s rp.M,... The previous (C, = 1.0) dcstgn flexural
strengths are multiplied by ( C,. = I.75): however. the pht!.tic moment strength ( rp,.M,.. = 540 kip-ft)
cannot be exceeded.
W24 X 76
c.;,M, I 75 X 540 ktp-ft = 945 ktp- C, = 1.75
h
- --
-- -- --
--
= 600
C ;,.M. = I 75kip-
X 343 kip-ft
--
- -- -
--- -- - -.._,
'..... .....
-
L---------------------------------1-r-------- L,
l., = 8.0 ft L, = 23.4 ft
fig. 5-10
5.8. Select the most economical rolled shape for a 27-ft simply supported floor beam. The upper
(compression) Range of the beam is adequately welded to the floor deck at I ft 0-in intervals.
Dead load supported by the beam (including its own weight) is 1.3 kips per linear foot; live
load is 2.6 kips per linear foot. Steel is A36 . Assume:
(t1) There il> no member depth limitation .
(b) The deepe t (architecturally allowable) member is a W21.
(c) The deepel>t desired member is a Wl8.
For the case of dead load and floor live load only. th e critical load combination tn Chap. 1 tS formula
(A-1-2):
1.20 + I .6L + 0.5( L, or S orR)= 1.2 x U kip/ft + 1.6 x 2.6 kips/ft + 0 = 5.7 kips/ ft
For uniformly di,tributcd loads. maximum M = wl !/ 'ro and V = wl /2. (See Table 5-2.)
5.7 kips/ft x ( 7ft)!
Required M., = = 521 kip-ft
8
kip> 27ft .
Requtred V,, = 5.7 f x --;- = 77 ktps
t -
Here . Lb = 1.0 < Lr (all rolleJ shapes).
56 COMPACT BEAMS AND OTH E R FLEXURAL MEMBER S [CHAP . 5
(a) In Table 5-3, as in the beam Selection Table m the LRFD Manual. the most economical bea ms
appear in boldface print . Of those beam . the one of least weight for which tJ> M = tJ> Mv
521 kip-ft is a W24x76.
Check ing shear strength with Eq . [ 5.12] , for hIt. < (418/VF. = 418/\136 = )69.7
V. = 0.6F,A. = 0.6 X 36 ksi X dt.
tj>,. V. = 0.90 X 0.6 X 36 ksi dt. = 19.4 kSI X dt•.
For a W24X76, h/ t..,. = 49.0 < 69. 7. (See Properties Tables for W Shapes in the AISC LRFD M
anual. Part 1.) Then <P.. V,, = 19.4 k si x 23.92 in x 0.440 in= 205 kips> 77 kips required . Use a
W24x76.
(b) By im.pection of Table 5-3. the least-weight W21 for which tJ>.M.. = tJ> MP,?: 521 kip/ft is a
W2 1X83. Checking \hear: q>,.V. = 19.4 k 1 x dt•. For a W21X83, tj>,.V. = 19.4 ksi x 21.43 in x
0.515 m = 214 kips > 77 k1ps required . U\e a W21 x83.
(c) By inspection of Table 5-3. the lca t-weight Wl 8 for whi ch •MP, 2:: 521 kip-ft is
a W18X97. Checkin g sh ear: tj>,.V,,=l 9.4ksiXdt•. For a W18x97. tj>,.V,, c= 19.4ksi x 18.59inx
0.535in = 193kips >77 kips required. Use a WI 8x97.
(Note. In lieu of calculations, the design hear strengths tj>, v. for W shapes can be found tabulat ed
in the \ection Uniform Load Constams in Part 3 of the A I SC LRFD M anual.)
5.9. Repeat Prob. 5.8 assuming th at the floor deck is not pr esent and the beam i s laterally braced
only at midspan and the supports.
27 ft
L,. = .,
-
= 13.5 ft
For this case, C, = I.75, '" m Prob. 5.7. From Fig. 5- 10, 11 b evident that L. = 13.5 ft < Lm for a
W24 x76. Similar plots wi ll show the same values for the other bea m sections in Table 5-3. For these
shapes. the design tlexural \trength tj>,.M,,. = 1/>,,M,,.•• as for the fully braced case. Accordingly. the
results of Prob. 5.8 are still valid.
5.10. Repeat Prob. 5.8 for a beam braced only at its end supports.
Here, C,. = 1.0. For som e of the W shapes in quest i on . L,. > L,. The beam graph s in Part 3 of the A
ISC
LRFD M anua l (for c.= 1.0. F. = 36 ksi) arc helpful in this ca e. In the graphs, the solid lines
denote
the most economical W shape. the dashed line\ mdicate alternate . One page of the AISC beam graphs
is repr::>duced (with permi, IOn) as Fig. 5-11. where it can be een that at L, =27 ft .among the members
with cp.M. 2:52 1 kip-ft. a W21 x 101 (solid line) is most economical: a W 18x 119 (dashed line) can be
used if beam depth i s limited to 18 in .
5.11. Determine C1, for the span of the continuous beam shown in Fig. 5-12.
(a) Lateral braces arc pro\ ided only at the supports.
(b) Lateral braces are provided at midspan and the supports.
(a) In Eq . 15.10]. M ,! M = -(500 kip-ft/500 kip-ft) = - 1.0 where M ,/ M 1 i s negative because the
end moment .. M, and M! cau..e rotations in opposite direction
M M '
C,= I 75+ I 1 <2.3
U5-'+0.3M(- )
= 1.75 +
t\1. ..
-
1.05( -1.0)
-
. ..
+ 0.3( -1.0)'
= 1.75 - 1.05 + 0.3
= 1.0
CHAP. 5J COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER rl LXLRAl \.1EMBCRS 57
Beam deMgn momentS (f = 0.9. C, = I. F = 36 !up> tn I
\ I I \ 1I ,
,,
\ I
I
\-
\ I \
\ I
\ I \
\
\ I \;
I 1\ IJ
.I I\ • \
670
I ' 1 I \ II
IN
I•
I I \ II
! I\
•
\ \ I
2i' 630 \
\ \
I I
c \ I
\
620 \ I
,z:: I
,00.. 610 I
I
t!. I
600
I
590
"'
I
580
I
...
i• I
I
I
560 I
I
550 I
I
--·
I
\
54
0 \ II
\
530
t_ \:,'- \
\ \
\'
520
8 10
12
1.t 16 p
. - 34 6 38
L:nbra<ed leng1h.II
Fig. 5-11 (Reproduced h'lfh pemii.HIOII from lht• A/S( I RFD Humwl)
58 COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS !CHAP. 5
I
(
s ----7\ ----
- -----
--- - r
J
------ WL --
- 1
I
200 Lp.ft
Required fle ural
strength. M,
500 lop-ft
Fig. 5·12
(b) In Eq. (5.10]. M,f M,= +(200 kip-ft /500 kip-ft) = +0.4 for both halves of the span. Here. M,/ M
is positive because the moments M 1 and M, cause rotations in the same direction.
ch = 1.75 + I.OS( +0.4) + 0.3( +0.4)'

= 1.75 + 0.42 + 0.05
=?
-- - -
. ,. ,
S.U. Determine C11 for the span of the continuou beam shown in Fig. 5.13. Lateral bracing is
provided only at the supports.
In Eq. 15.10]. M1f M, = +(400 kip-ft/400 kip-ft) = +1.0, where M,/ M 1s positive because the end
moments M, and Ml cause rotations in the same direction.
ch_- 1.75 + 1.05 M, + ?

-·3
o.3
(M')l -
Ml ,'>1!
= I.75 + I 05( +I 0) + 0.3( +I.O)' < 2. 3
= 1.75+
1.05+0.3:::;2.3
=3.10 <2.3
= 2.3
---- 7\-. ---------- - ------ ------;Jr

7r-\
J > -- -
-
-:
---- ----
400 lop-ft
Required nc ur l----------------- .---------------

strength. If,
-- 400 Jup-ft
..ig. 5-13
CHAP. 5] COMPACT BEAMS AND OTIIER FLEXURAL MI.:.MBERS 59
5.13. Determine the following parameters for the built-up section in Fig. 5-8: <Pt>Mp.. <P tM,, LP'
and L, (strong axis bending) . Assume A36 steel.
According 10 Eq. [5.7], MP, = Z,F,. As determ10ed 10 Prob. 5.4. Z, = 9J8 in'.
1
tp.MP, = tphZ, F, = 0.90 X 938 in X 36 ks1
= 30.391 kip-in = 2533 kip-ft
According to Eq. [5-8]. M, = S,(F, - F,). The residual stress 1-; = 16.5 kips for welded
hapes. As
determined in Prob. 5.4, S, = 848 in'.
1/> M, = 1/>bS,( F, - F,) = 0.90 X 848 in 'X (36- 16.5)ksi
= 14.882 k•p-in = 1240 kip-ft
According 10 Eq. (FI ·•1), for 1-shapcd member
L = 3 0 0r ,
,, VF .
The radius of gyration
r:• -
The contributions of the two flanges and the web to the moment of inertia /, are
Elements
2 Flanges [
I in X (18in)\ o] X
2 = 972 10•
12
Web
40inx(0.5in) ' . •
12 +0= 0 .410
'·
Cro s-sectional area A= ( IR in x l10) x 2 + 40 in x 0.5 in= 56 in" and
r, = =4.1710
300x4.17in
LP= VJ6 =208in = 17.4ft
According to Eq . (FJ-6), for !-shaped member
=;·: VI+ VI+ X !( F, - F,)!

wher
L,
. '
e
/
_ .'r
£GJA X, - S,
\ 2
x.= 4 s ( )!
- I• GJ
Here, r,= 4.17in. F;-F.=(36 - 16.5)ksi = 19.5 ks•. S,=848in '.
A=56in", £=29.000ks•. G=
11,200 ksi, and
'kbt
;.... 1 =i{ll8inx(lin)'J2+[40inx(O.Sin)']}
3
= 13.67 in•
60 COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS (CHAP. S
For l- hapcd members. c. = (JJ )(d- r,) . Then

X ,= 4((/J4)(d- r, )' l ( ):= [S,(d- r1 )]
· I, GJ GJ
2
8 8in'x (42-l)m ]
=[ =0.05
11.200 k i X 13.67
In
56 in2
4
:rr 29.000 k i X 11.200 k i X 13.67 in X
X, =R48in' \ 2 = 1306
4.17 in x 1306" . ,
L,= _ . yl +V 1+0.05( 19.5 ksi)"
I9 .) hi
= 658 in= 55ft
5.14. Simply supported 30-ft-long floor beams. Wl8X35. are spaced 10ft 0 in cen ter-to-center.
What is their maximum deflection under a live load of 50 lb/ft 2?
- lb lb kip\
w = :>0-, X IO.Oft = 500- = 0.5-
ft · ft ft
For a WIRx35 beam. I,= 510 in. From Table 5-2. for a uniformly loaded simply supported beam.
the maximum deflection
kips
5x0.5-x(30ft)
fl
---- 19 .----x
kipS . ( 12 in / fl)'
31\4 X- X 510 4
.000 In
m·
= 0.62
Since live load deflecuon in
L 30 ft X 12 in/ft
6 = 0.62in <-= =!.Om
360 360
it should generally be acceptable .
S.J S. Determine the maximum deflections of the same WJ8x35 beams under concentrated loads of
7.5 kip at midspan .
From Table 5-2, for a concentrated load on a simply supported beam at midspan; the maximum
deflection
7.5 kip X (30ft)' X (12 in/ ft)'
Pf' = ----'--'---:-:'---'---.:....
6 = 8£/ (}()( kips _ .
41\ X 29, ) X) I 0 10
m·
= OA9 in
Are the beam-; in Probs. 5.16 and 5.17 compact

(a) In A36 steel?
(b) If F.,= 50 ksi?
CIIAP. 5] COMPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURA L MEMBERS 61
5.16. WJ4xlJO.
Ans (a) Yes. (b) No
5.17. W2\X6R.
Am. (a) Yes. (b) Yes.
5.18. For the WIOX49 in Prob. 3..1 (Chap. 3). determine the appropriate design cross section for bendmg.
Am The gross section
5.19. The '>imply ..upported beam 111 Fig. 5-14 b subjected 10 a concentnued factored force of 50 k1p . Steel1s
A36. Assume continuous latl!ral bracing.
(a) Determine the re4uired !lexural strength.
(b) Select the most economical W shape.
(c) Select the most econom1cal \\'21.
(d) Select the most econom1cal \\16.
An.s . (a) M., = 400kip-ft. (b) W:!4X62 . (c) W21Xn!t (d) Wl6X77.
P, = 50 k1p
I ,/9,.
16ft 16 ft
Fig. 5-14
5.20. The beam in Fig . 5-14 " braced at the suppom and quarter point.,
only. Determine C, for each
unbraced length.
Ans . (See Fig. 5-15.)
C.- I 75 1.30 l 1.30 I 75
# --4-----r-
Fig. 5-15
5.21. Sel ect th e most economical W ;ection for the beam in Fig. 5- 14. hraced at the (a) supports and
4uarter points only: (b) support> and m1d pan on ly: (c) '>upports only.
An . (a) W:!4x62. (b) W24X62. (c) WlRX97
5.22. The unfactored concentrated Ji, e load for the \\'24 X62 beam in F1g. 5-14 is 20 kips. Determmc the
mmomum hvc-load deflect1on
Am. t:.. = 0.61 in.
Chapter 6
Noncompact Beams and Plate Girders
NOTATION
A= cross-sectional area of member. in 1
2
A,,= cross-sectional area of stiffener or pair of stiffeners. i n
1
A .. = web area. in = cit.,
a= clear distance between transverse stiffener<;. in
a,= ratio of web area to compression flange area
b =width, in
b,=width of flange. in
Ct> =bending coefficient. defined in Eq. [5.10J
C.,= shear parameter defined in Eqs. (A -GJ-5) and (A -GJ-6)
D=coefficient for usc in Eq. (A-G4-2)
d =overall depth. in
F,, =critical plate girder compression flange stress. ksi
F, =compressive minimum yie ld stress. ksi
F.. 11
=specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material. ksi
lr. lr , = ''eb dimensio.1s dd1ned in Fig. 6·2. in
I = moment of inerti.a. ir."
1,= mom.:nt of inertia nf stiffener or pai r of stiffener . in•
J = torsional c...>nstant. in•
j =coefficient defined m Eq. (A-G4-I)
k = coefficient defined in Eq. (A -G3-·+)
L,= unbraced length. It
M, =nominal flexural strength of member . kip-in
M,, =plastic moment. "1p-in
M, =limiting buck l ing moment when ). =A, kip-in
M., =required flexural strength, kip-in
R,.c;= plate girder flexural coefficient. defined in Eq . (A-G2-3)
r = radius of gyration. 111
rT =radius of gyration of the compression flange plus one-t h ird of the compression
portion of the web taken about an axis in the plane of the web. in
S =elastic <,ection modulus. in3
S,.,. =elastic section modulus referred to the compression flange. i n '
S., =clastic section modulus referred to the tension flange. in 3
r =thickness. m
t1= thickness of flange. in
1., =thickness of web, in
V,, =nominal shear strength. kip'>
62
CI lAP. 6) NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 63
V,, =required shear trcngth. kips

x =subscript relating symbol to the major principal ccntroi da l axis
y = sub cript relating ymbol to the minor principal ccntroidal axis
Z =plastic section modulu . in'
A = tenderness parameter (e.g., w1dth-th1ckness ratio)
;,,. = large t value of). for which M., - M,
A,= largest val ue of ,1. for which buckling i
inelastic
<fJhMn =design flexural trength. J..ip-in
lp,. = re 1 tancc factor for flexure = 0.90
cp,, V,, = des1gn sheartrength, kips
cp,. =resistance factor for shear= 0.90
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers fh:xurc of noncompact members. that 1 . beams with a width-thickness rat io
(for flange or web) > A,.. The subject of the next cction is noncom pact beams with a width -t
hickness ratio (.A): A,.< A .A,. Plate girders w11h slender webs ().> ).,), u ually stiffeneu. are
covered .n the following section.
1\0NCOMPACT BEAMS
The flexural design strength b ¢hM,, where cp,. = 0.90. For noncom pact beams, the nominal
flexural strength Mn i the lowe t \'alue determmed from the limit '>tatcs of
lateral-torsional buckling ( LTB)
flange loca l buck ling ( FLB)
web loca l buckling ( WLB).
For .A,.< A<).,. M, m each limn state is obtamcd b) linear intcrpolauon between M,. and M,. as
follows.
For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckltng,
). -A 1 1 I
M,. = C,. [M,.- (M 1, M,)( )., _ ;,,) J < M,. (A-Fl-2)
For the limit states of flange and web buckling
M., = lvf , - ( M, M,)(). - ;.,. (A-FI-.1)

)
1 1
A, -.A,,
For all limit states, if ). <A,. M., = M,.. Exprc'>sion for M,,. "' well as for M,. ).. A,, and ;., in
each limit state, arc given in Table 6-1 (which IS an abridged versiOn of Table A-F l. l in App. F
of the A lSC LRFD Specification).
As shown schematically in Fig. 6-l. the flexura l design of noncompact bea ms ca n be
accomplished by
Looking up in Table 6-1 value-. forM,. and M,, ).1, and A, tor each of the relevant limit state .
Graphically interpolating in each case to obtam an ,\.fn for the gtven k
Sel ecting the minimum M, as the nominal flexural strength.
64 NONCO M PACf BEA MS AN D PLATE GIRDERS (CHAP. 6
Table 6-1 flexural Strength PIU'1Imeters
Cross Sect1ons MP Limit State M, ). ).p ).,
Channels and doubly and F.,Z, LTB:doubly <F, - F,)S, 30 See Eqs. (F/-6), (F/-8),
L• songly symmemc!-shaped
symmetric r,
vr and (F/·9) on Chap 5
beams bending about

major aJus
members and
channels .
LTB: singly
(F, - F,)Su L, 300 Value of ). for which
symmetric -
members
,F,S., 'r M., = M,, with C• = I
b 65
FLB (F., - F,)S, - \
I
Yr. 1 4 1 10
for rolled shapes
lf . 1_06
VF.. _ _ for welded shapes
16 5
64 970
WLB F,S, - I.h,
vr .,ff,
.
Channels and doubly sym- F,Z, FLB F,S, Same as for major-a is bending
met ric !-shaped members
bending about minor axis
Solid rectangular bars L, 3570 ViA 57,CXXJ ViA

F,Z, LTB
bendmg about major axis r, MP M,
F,S,
Symmetric box secuons

loaded in a plane of F,.Z LTB (F., - !:!! 3570 ViA 57,00) ViA
F,)S, r, MP M,
symmetry
-
b 190 238
FLB F.,S, I VF.. - F,
h, 640 970
WLB F,S,
I. F. VFy
M,
= = = =- .::::.::::..::::-------- - M, (LTB) I
M (WLB)
'
-- M,f;-d;g;;- -
Mi rtinn;; M, (FLB) : 1
M , I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
.l, .l, .l, .l, .l,
FLB LTB WLB
Fig. 6-1 Nominal flexural strength of a noncompact beam (example)

CHAP. 61 'JQNCOMPACT BEAMS A:-10 PLATE GIRDERS 65
Shear capacity hould also be checked, as indicated 111 Chap. 5. The design hear strength is
¢,.V,,. where¢,. =0.90 and V... the nominal shear strength. is determined from Eq. (5. 12]. (5. JJI.
or
(5.14(.
The definition of the terms used above are
A = slenderness parameter= minor axis slenderness ratio Lh/ r,. for LTB = flange width
thickness ratio h / t, defined in Fig. 5-2. for FLB =web depth-thickne% ratio h,/ t ,
defined in Fig. 5-2. for WLB
;.,. = the largest value of i. for which M,. = M,,
1.., =largest value of A for "hich buckling is melastic
M,. =nominal flexural !.trength. kip-in
M,. =plastic moment. kip-in
M, = buckling moment at A = J.." kip-in
Ch =bending factor. as defined in Eq. (5.101
vn = nominal shear strength. kips
Additional terms used in Table 6-1 are
F. =specified mm1mum yield stress. k\1
z. =plastic ection modulus about the maJOr axis. in
3
Z, = pla\tic \Cction modulus about the minor axis. in·'

S, =elastic section modulus about the major axis. in'
1
S,c = S, with respect to the outside fiber of the compression flange. in
S., = S, with respect to the outside fiber of the tension Bange. in'
S, =elastic section modulus about the minor axi!-., in'
Ll> =laterally unbraeed length. in
r, = radiu of g) ration about the minor ax1s. in
b, t, h,. t = dimen-;ions of cross section. defined 111 1-'ig. 5-2. in
A= eross-sect10nal area. m'·
J =torsional con tant. in•
F, =compressive residual stress in the flange = 10 ksi for rolled shap<..:s = 16.5 ksi
for welded shapes
PLATE GIRDERS
In the A I SC LRFD Specification. two terms arc U!-.Cd for nexural members: beam and plate
girder. The differences between them are as follows.
Beam Plate Girder
Rolled or welded shape Welded \hape

No web stiffeners and Web stiffeners or
web h) t.. s 970/ webi!J t.. > 970/ . or both
Stiffeners arc discussed later in this chapter. Web stiffeners arc not required if web h)t ... <
260 and adequate shear stn.:ngth is provided by the web in accordance with Eqs. (5.12] to (5. 14].
(Please note: Two different parameters in the A I SC LRFD Specification refer to the clear height
of the web: h and h,. In Sec. B5 of the LRFD Specification they are thus defined:
For webs of rolled or formed secuons. h is the clear distance between flange les!l the fillet or
66 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIR DE RS !CHAP. 6
corner radius at each flange; h, is twice the distance from the neutral axis to the inside face of
the compression flange less the fillet or corner
radiu .
For webs of bui lt-up sections. h is the distance between adJacent lanes of fasteners or the clea
r distance between flanges when welds are used and h, i t\\ icc the distance from the neutral
axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the
compression flange when welds are used.
The distinction between h and h, is shown in Fig. 6-2. where it can be seen that for doubly symmetric
cross sections. h = h,.)
c=;::::==J --- Compression flange'>-- •I I
lr.
-- Neutral ax"
--
"
h
l_
c=::::: :::J----- r-' ...... I
flanges ---
Tension
(a)
h .f_ ,
..L
Fig.6-2 Definitions of J, and 11,: (a) singly symmetric built-up sections; (b) doubl) ymmetric bui lt-up sections
For plat e girders, the maximum permissible web sl enderness 11 / t,.. depends on the spacing of the
stiffen ers.
If a
< 1- h 2000
-- .), - <w. (A-GI-l)
h t.. - F.
If
a - h 14.000
h > l.:>, (A-Gl-2)
t:<\/F.,(F., + F,)
where a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners. in
1M = web thickness, in
F, =speci fied minimum yield stress of steel, hi
F, =compressive residual stress in flange= 16.5 ksi for plate girders
Plate girders are covered in App. G of the A I SC LRFD Specification. The tiffe ning of slender
CHAP. 6) NONCOMPACf BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDE RS
67
plate girder webs enables them to exhibit significant postbuckling strength through "tension field
action." After the web buckles, a girder acts like a Pratt truss: the stiffeners become vertical
compression members, and the intermediate web panels act as diagonal tension members.
DESI GN FLEX URAL STR ENGTH OF PLATE

GIRDERS
The design flexural !>tre!!Sth is <PbM,, where ¢, = 0.90. To determine the nominal flexural
strength M,: if hef t,. s 970VF., sec Chap. 5 for compact hapcs, and see the previous sect ion of
Chap. 6 for noncompact shapes.
If hJr .. > 970/ VF,. (i.e.. the web 1s slender), M, is governed by the limit states of tension
flange
yielding and compression flange buckling, as follows.
For yielding of the tension flange
(A-G2-1)
For buckling of the compression flange
(A-G2-2)
The nominal flexural strength M" is the lower value obtained from these equations, where
/r, 970 )
R 1.c. = 1 -0.000Sa, (---:7":!"' < (A-G2-3)
1., V r 1.0
where a,= ratio of web area to compression flange area
F;, =critical compression flange stress, ksi
F;. =minimum specified yie ld stress, ksi
S,c =elastic section modulus referred to compression flange. in 3
s.., =elastic section modulus referred to tension flange, in 1
The critical stress F;, in Eq . (A-G2-2) depends on the slenderness parameters)., ).1, )." and Crc·
For),<).,
F; ,= !-, (A-G2-4)
(A-G2-5)
For ). > ).,
(A-G2-6)
The slendern ess parameter are determined for both the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling and
the limit state of flange local buckling: the lower value of F;, governs .
For th e limit state of lateral-torsional buckling
), = L,
(A-G2-7)
r,
). 3 0 0
,, - \ 1 'F ; (A-G2-8)
). 75 6 (A-G2-9)
, -V F .
(A-G2-JO)
Cpr, = 286.000C,
68 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS [CHAP. 6
where C, is determined from Eq. [5.10] and rr is the radius of gyration of compression flange
plus one-third of the compression portion of the web taken about an axis in the plane of the
web, in. For the limit state of flange local buckling
J... = bf
(A-G2-11)
2t1
= 65
J...
PVF_, (A-G2-12)
J... = 150
r
(A-G2-13)
c Pf"i = I I '200 (A-G2-14)

C,= I
The limit state of web local buckling is not applicable .
DESIGN SHEAR STRENGTH OF PLATE GIRDERS

The design shear strength is ¢v V,, where ¢u = 0.90.
For h lt... $ 187Yk!i\.
(A-G3-1)
For hit_. > 187
1 - C,, )
vn = 0.6A...Fy (C,, + 1.15Vl + (a/h)2 (A-GJ-2)
except for end panels and where

3.0
a or
-> [6. 1]
h 260
(hit
S
In such cases tension field action does not occur and
Vn = 0.6AwFvC,, (A-G3-3)
I n the preceding equations
5
k=5+(a/h)2 (A-G3-4)
except that k = 5.0 if Expression [6.1) is true or if no stiffeners are present; A. is the area of the web.
2
in = dt..,; and dis the overall depth, in.
If
187
C,. = h/ (A-GJ-5)
1,..
If
44.000 k
-h>234 -. C,, = (h/t..,)2Fv
(A-GJ-6)
t.., Fv
CIIAP. 6] ONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDL:.RS 69
W EB STIFFEN ERS
Transverse stiffeners arc required if web h/r .. > 260 or \\eb shear trcngth, as determined from
Chap. 5 (for unstiffcncd beams). is inadequate. The stiffeners hould be spaced to provide sufficient
shear '>trength tn accordance with the preceding provision!> for plate girderl..
Additional requirement for stiffeners are
I,>at.,] [6. 2]
.
whenever stiffeners are required
and A., 2: !- lo. 15Dht,..( I- C,,)¢,,

f,_.,
V,, - (A -G.J-2)
IHt ] 2:0
for tcn i on field

action
2.5 ,-2> (A-G4-1)
where j= 0.5
(a/h)·
and /,,=moment of inertia of a transverse web stiffener about an ax1s 1n the web center for
stiffener pairs or abou t the face in cont<1ct with the web plate for single '>tiffener'>, in 4
A,, = cross-sectional area of a transverse web stiffeners. in
F, =specified minimum yield stress of the girder steel. ksi
F. ..,= specified mmimum yield stress of the stiffener material.
k-.i
D = 1.0 for tiffenerl> in pairs
1.8 for l.ingle angle stiffeners
2.4 for single plate stiffeners
V,, = required shear strength at the location of the tiffener. k i
and C,. and V,, are a defined
above.
Plate girders with web!> that depend on tension field action [i.e.. their !>hear strength b governed
by Eq. (A -GJ-2)J, must satisfy an additional criterion, flexure-shear interaction.
If
t h en
(A-G5-1)
must be true. Here, V,, and Mu arc the required shear and moment trcngths at a cross section
calculated from t he factored loads; V,, and Mn are the nominal shear and moment strengths
( V,, :5 </> V,, and M,:5 <f>M11 ; </> = 0.9}.
STU'FENE R
DETAILS
Spcc1al requirements appl> to stiffeners at concentrated loads or reaction-.; '>CC Chap. 12.
The web stiffeners provided in accordance wi t h the prO\ i'>ions cued in thl\ chapter may be
onc-s1ded or two-s1ded. If a pair of stiffeners is used. they can be welded to the web only. Smgle
stiffeners are also welded to the compre ion flange. a are <,tiffencr" attached to lateral bracing. The
welds connecting !>tiffeners to girder \\ebs are stopped short of the flange four to !>ix web thickne se
from the near toe of t he web-to-flange weld .
70 \IONCOMPACT BEAMS A\10 PLATE GIRDERS !CHAP. 6
ROLLED VERSUS BUILT-UP BEAMS

Because they are more economical than their welded equivalents. rolled beams arc used
whenever possi ble. Rolled W shapes (the mo t popular beam'\) are available in depths of 4 to 40 i n
(W4 to W40). Wel ded girder arc used when ( 1) the depth must exceed 40 in or (2) the rolled shapes
available for the specified depth do not provide sufficient bending strength (a function of Z,) or
stiffness (a function of /, ). Regardless of whether rolled or welded shapes are utilized. beams are
normally oriented to take advantage of the superior maJOr-axts properties (Z, > Z, and /, > /,.).
Solved Problems
6.1. For the welded section in Fig. 6-3 (selected from the table of Bu ilt-Up W ide-Flange Sections
in Part 3 of the A ISC LRFD Manual), determine t he design moment and shear strengt
hs. Bending is about the major axis; C, = 1.0. The (upper) compression Range b
continuously braced by the floor deck. Steel is A36.
r
c
-
c:
00
V)
c:
-----'----.l
!
- -r , - 7 II\ in
18 In
ftg. 6-3 -
First. compactnc\> \hould be checked. Working wtth Tahlc 6- 1 (for a doubly 'ymmctric I 'hapc bending
about ib major axis):
Flange },= h IHit = 9 .0
=!!.!
I 211 -1 X I Ill
(For the definition l>l' h tor a welded I 'hape. cc Fig. 5-2.)

65 65
Flange )., - = 10 X
= =-:=
\ f \ 1ci .
For the flange ). < , Therefore. the Hangc ., compact. ttnd \.1., = 'W,., for the limtt 'tate of Oange
).1 local
buckltng (FLB)
),_ lz, 56 in (I
Web - - 7 - I-'"·
/1\ 11,10
Web 6411 6411 = I 0(!.7

;..,, = -
,r:: . -:
V 1-, V16
Y70 970
Web )., = I - - - = I 61.7
\ ,., \1111
CHAP. 6] NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 71
For the web . (A, = 106.7) <(). = 128.0) < ()., = 161.7). The web is noncom pact ; M,. < M ,
< M,, for the limit state of web local buckling (WLB); M,... is determined from Eq. (A-FI-3).
Next , a check is made of lateral bracing . relating to the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling
(LTB). For this continuously braced member , L, = 0; M"" = M,.• for
LTB. Summarizing:
Limit State
LTB t\1,.•
FLB M,.•
WLB M,. < M" .< M,,
The limit state of WLB (with minimum M"") governs . To determine M,., M,., and M.. for a doubly
symmetric l-shaped member bend i ng about the major axis. refer again to Table 6-1,
There M,,. = F,Z., M,. = F.,.S, for WLB and from Eq. (A-Fl-3) (for WLB) :
M,.,. = M,. - (M,, - M,.) ; .,

)
( ,
.-). ;
)
,
The properties Sx and Z, of the cross section in Fig. 6-3 must now be calculated.
/, d 58 in
S =
• c. where c = 2 2
= 29 in
=
The contributions of the two flanges and the web t o the moment of inertia . are
BT'
Elements -- +AD 1
12
2 Flanges
18 in x(1 in)'
+(!Sin x I
.
tn)(28.5in) 2 J = 29,244 in4
[ 12 2
Web .0:._.44_i n_: x +0=
(c5:.6:....i;.n:.
)·' 12
35,647 in•
35,647 in" ,
S = = 1230 in·
' 29 in
To determine Z., we calculate AD , where A is the cross-sectional area of each element and D
represents its distance from the centroidal x axis.
In calculating z. , the upper and lower halves of the web are taken separately.
Elements AD
Flanges ((18 in X 1in) x 28.5 inj2 = 1026 in'

2 Webs ((28 in x 0.44 in) X 14 in)2 = 343 in.1
z. 1369 in '
Z, = 1369 in '
Determining flexural strengths. we obtain
= F. z = 36 kips / in' x 1369 in'=4 07 k' .f

M,, ' ' 12 in/ft I tp 1
2
=F. = 36 kips / in x 1230 in '= k' -f
5 3690 1
M,. ' ' 12 in/ ft tp
4107
0::: -----
3946
I
3690 I _
----- I
I
106.7 161.7
128.0 ). for WLB
lr
==
A A, I,
Fig. 6-4
The value of M.. can be obtained by linear interpolation using Fig . 6-4 or Eq. (A-F/-3): M,., =
3946 kip-ft.
The design flexura l strength tJ> M.., = 0.90 x 3946 kip-ft = 3551 kip-ft .
Shear strength for an unstiffencd web is governed by Eq. [5./2]. [5.1Jj. or [5.!41, depending
on lzlrw.
Here , hi t. = 56 in /0.44 in= 128.0.
Equation [5.141 governs:
132.000 (58 in x 0.44 in) x 132.000

V,. =A, (h /I,) = (121!.0) 1
= 204.4 kips
The design shear strength tp,. V.. = O.YO X 204.4 kips = 184.0 kips.
6.2. The welded beam in Prob. 6.1 frames into a column as shown m Fig. 6-5. Design web
stiffeners to double the shear strength of the web at the end panel.
lA
v
a I
I
lA
'
Fig. 6-5
At end panels there is no tension 11eld action. The nominal shear strength for a stiffened web 1S
determined from Eq. (A -GJ-J): V.. = 0.6AJ; C... Assuming
-h > 234 -0
C,. = 44.00< (A-GJ-6)
k
F.
•
1, (11/1,. )•F,
CHAP. 61 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 73
Substituting for C,. in Eq. (A-GJ-J). we obtain

44.000 k.
26.400 k.
v. =0.6A.r; x (h/r.l'F. =A. (hit.>'
A indicated in the text of thi-, chapter. the ca c of no tiffeners corre ponds to k = 5. (This can be
verified by comparing the ju t-derived expressiOn for V,, with Eq . [5. /4].)
To double the shear strength. let k = 2 x 5 = 10. In Eq. (A-GJ-4)
5
k =5+
· '= 10
(a/h)
Thi implies a/h = 1.0 or a = h: thu . the clear di tance between tran vcr e web stiffeners a = h =56 in .
Checking the origmal a-. umption. we obtain
h= 56 In. = > (234 -=234 -= O.k.

(
121!.0). 123.3)
t. 0.44 Ill F, 36
Stiffener design can be determined as follows. Because tension field action b not utilized , Eq . (A -G4-
2) and (A·G5-1) can be ignored. However, Formula (6.21 must be satisfied: 1., ?.at:.j
2.5
where j = (a Ih )' - 2 2: 0. 5
.., -
-·'
j = )T- 2 = 0.5
1,, 2:56 in x (0.44 in) ' x 0.5 = 2.34 in"

Try a pair of stiffener plates. 2 in x !an as in Fig. 6-6
--
5 44 in
'"'" I/
Fig. 6-6
The moment of inertia of the stiffener pai r abou t the web centerline
_ 0.25 in x (5.44 in)'_ ." ? . "
/.,-
12
-:us m >_.34m o.k.
Try a smgle Miffener plate. 3 m x! in. as in Fig. 6-7.
/Web
3.5 an .----- Stiffener
- '-
--J f-- 0.25 in
Fig . 6-7
The moment of inertia of the stiffener about the face of the web
0.25 in X (3.5 in)' ' 7 •
I,, •- -• ·'··' an 1
"c> '
_) .3... , o.k.
m
3
6.3. See Prob. 6.1 and Fig. 6·3. Change the web thickness to r.. = 1in. Determine the design
moment and shear strengths.
Checking web lendcrne '· we obtain
h. = 56 in = 2.,4 ) > (. _ 970 _ 970 )
( .,- · - A, ·I.-r= = 161.7
'· 0 _) m v /-, \'36
Because the web is \l ender. the member is cla \incd a a plate girder. and the flexural de ign provt
ion of this chapter govern [Eq. (A-G2-1) to (A-G2-/<I) [ . (Since 11/t,. = 224 < 260, the girder web
need only be stiffened if an increa t: in ib hear strength i required .)
The flexural de ign equat i ons can be solved as follow :
For the limit state of LTB
(A -G.?-7)
because Lh = 0 for continuous

bracing.
For the hm1t tate of FLB
b, IX in
). =- = ., = (A-G.?·Il)
9.0
2t1 - X 1 Ill
65 65
9.0< (.l.,, =VI-;= V3(i = IO.R) (A-G2-12)
Because ;. < .l.,, for both LTB and FLB
F• , = = " 36 " (A -G2-·J)

F\ k• i
for thts plate girder.
J
("·
970
RrG = I -0.00()5a, -):s (A-G.?-J)
1.0
'· \F..
The ratio of web area to compression flange area
_56 in x 0.25 in_
a,- . -I1.7R
l XinXIIIl
R,.(; = I - 0.0005 X 0.78(224 - 161.7) = 0.9R
The nominal flexural \trcngth M., is the mimmum of
£W,, =S.,R,-<,F (A-G2-l)
MW_,., = S.. Rrt. F,, (A-G.?-2)
For a doubly ymmetnc hape. S,,=S,. =S,. From aho,c. F..= F. by Eq . (A-G.?-.J). Therefore.
both equations for M., reduce w
M•• = S,R,.,,F,
in this case.
Determining S,, we obtain
d 58 in .
=I,
S•
c•
where c= ., =29m
=
-
.,
CHAP. 6[ NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 75
rhc contributions of the mo flanges and the web to the moment of menta /, arc
BTJ
Elements -+AD '
u
18inx(lin)' . ·]
2 Flange
[ l1 + IR 10 x ltn) -,9._,...... .an '
(28.5m)·:!
Web :: 3.659 in'
0 ,"_))_(_6.10)'
12 + o.
I, 32.903Ill1
.. _ 32,903 in"_ . ,
.,, - 29 in - II35 10
_ • _1135 in ' X 0.98 X 36 kaps/ in !_ k. .
M., - S, R,.(;F,.- 2. If - :1337 1p·1I
I an t
The clc ign ll.::xu ral trength lf>,M., = 0. 90 x 3337 kip-ft = 3003 kap-ft.
Shear strength for an unstiffcncd web is governed by Eq. [5. J2f, [5./J], or [5. J.lj. depending
on h/ r•.
Here , h/ r. = 56 in/0.25 in = 224.0
523 523 )
224 > ! = = l\7?
( \ F, \136 ·-
Equation [5. J.Jf go,ern\
132.000 (58 in x 0.25 in) 132.000
V =A =--------
• • (h/t.)' (224.0)
= 38.1 kips
1he de\agn hear \trength ¢,. V., = 0.90 x 38. I kips= 34.3 l.ap .
6.4. Design web stiffeners for the end panels of the plate girder in Prob. 6.3, to increase shear
strength. As umc a= 24 in.
Ten aon field action i not permitted for end panels of girder\. The nomanal shear \trength as obtained
from Eq. (A ·GJ-J) in thi chapter: V., = 0.6A•.F,C,,.
To determine C,.:
5 5
k =5 + I •).=5+ (24 .an/56 . )',= 32.2
(a h an
Since ( (
5 6 in
=0 2 5 . = 224
)
> -= 234
ffj., ?
:...:.:.: ;; 221 .4
h -
234
r. . an F, 36
+1,000 k
c:. ...
= (hIr., )"F, by Eq. (A -GJ-6)
SuhMIIuttng for C, an Eq. (A-GJ-3), we have
+1, !XXJ J.
vn = 0. 6A.F, X I '
(h r.) F
26.4!Xl k
= r1.., ...
(11/r.)
(58 an x 0.2510)26.400 x 32.2

- (56 in /(1.15 an)
= 246 kip
76 ;-JONCOMPACT BEAMS A 'JD PLATE GIRDERS (CHAP. 6
1he de.,1gn 'hear 'trength becomes 1/>. v.= 0.90 x 246 kip = 221 l..1p\. a large mcrea'e over the:U.3-
kip
'trcngth ot an un.,Hff.:n.:d ''eb (m Prob. 6.3).
S11ftcncr dc\lgn (\ ith no tension field action) conml\ of compl}'mg w11h FomlUia (1\..?l . /, > m j
....,.._'i ..
J= _.,Jn-.
(a /11):- ·•
....-
-----:- 2 = II ll
(24 in / 56 in): ·
1
1,? 24 in x (0.25m) x 11.6 = 4.35 m
Among the po''1ble \tiffener configurations are

(u) A 'inglc ...urfener plato: 4 in x! in
!The moment of inertia of the single stiffener about the face of the web
U.25inx(4in) ' _ . .J)- O.k .l
. ·
f,, = = .JJ ll ..,_
1
4
3 ':l I Ill
(h) 1\ pair of tiffener plates 3 i n X! in

!The moment of inertia of t he stiffener pair about the web .:cntcr l inc
0.25x(6.25in) ' _ , ,
/,, = = ':1.09m 4.3510 o.k.l
12
6.5. Repeat Proh . 6.4 for an intermediate web panel. tncluding tension field action.
f\, 111 Prob . 6.4, 1.. -= 32.2. hit.= 224, and C, i determined from Ell (A-GJ-(1) .
M.OOO k 44.000 x 3.2
C,. = , = -= o 7S
(hft.) f; (224)' X 6
The 1Hlm1nal ...hear •arcngth (mcludmg tension field acttonl "go,erncd by Eq . (A-GJ-.?).
V,= 0.6A F. [ . I- (,. ]

( ,.
I 15\11 + (u / h)'
+
k ip s [ ]
V.- 0.6 X (58 111 X 0.25 in) X 36 .- , 0.71i +,r; I - 0 = 300 k1p
7!!
· _ ,
m· l.ISv I+ (24m/':16m) ·
fhc dC\Ign '>hear trength IS 1/J, V. = 0.90 X 300 kip = 270 kip
St1tfcner de ign taking advantage of tension field action muM comply wirh formulas (6..?],
(A-G.J-2), and (A-G5-1). The de igm in the solution to Prob. foA comply with formu la 111.21. Check ing
lormuh1 (A -G'-1-2), we obtai n
A, > -FF. [o .I s D1lt.,( l v. - l!!t ·1 d)
- (.•.) .
\ ' t cj>,.
A \UOlC v.. = tp,. v.. = 270
kipS.
(a) A '>Ingle tiffcncr plate 4 1n '< ', in
A , ·36 "" r 0.15x2.4X56inx0.25inx(1- 270 ktp... - IX(025m) = - 0.02in .

0.7!!)X ·J
. 36 bi 270 kip\
1\n) '>lll!!le ,llffener plate (A,> 0) ts satisfactor)
(h) A pa1r of \llffencr plate .3 111 x in
16 k" [ ] •
A (} 15 X 1.0 X 56 in X 0.25 in X (1- 70 - 18(0 = -11.66111 -
0.78) X 25m)·
36 bi 270l..1p'>
An p;ur of \llffcner plates (A ,> 0) is okay.
CIIAP. 6] NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDLRS 77
Regardmg cntcnon (A-G5-I) (flexure-shear tntcracuon) . 1', = :!70 l-.1p,, V.. = 3CXJ kip .
.H.= 3337 k1p-ft (from Prob . 6.3). Let the requtred flexural 'trcngth \1.. 15110
k1p-lt at the .,arne cro ection
Becau'e
V "70 k1ps ) ( v 100 k1p' )
( "= - . = 0.18/ft > 1.33 : = 1.33 X ) J7 k ..f = 0.1:!/ ft
M.. 1500 k1p-ft M. .... .. 1p t
ernenon (II -G5- I) ( ftcxurc-,hear interaction) need not be '>ati,hed
6.. 6.. Determine the minimum web thickness for the plate gin.kr in Fig. 6-3, both with and
without web sti ffcner': as u me A36 steel.
According to the AISC LRFD Specification (App. G), in un tiffcnctl g1rdcr' 11/t., muM be le> than 260.
II II 56in
-< 260 implies that .,., •
1., > - = (I --In
1., .,.,,
260 _,nl
In stiffened girder (a / 11 s
1.5):
II :woo :!000
- < r;: = .r:;-; = 333
r ., \F; v36
In '>llffened g1rtler> (a/ 11 >

1.5):
" 1-t•()()() 1-t,()(MJ

- <-;======== ;::===:';"';;:- = p,
I. \F,(F;+I6.5) \ 36(36 + 16.5) - --
The n11111mum web thld.ne>"

lr 56 Ill
1. >-= = 0.17in
333 333
if the \llffcner are clo>el) >paced ( a/ h s 1.5). The thcon:w:al mmimum web th1cl-.ne .,e for th1s plate
g1rder arc 0.22 111 1f not tiffcnctl and 0.17 in if stiffened However . hecau,e of the need to weld (the
flange plate and \tiffener ) to the web. H web thickncs' of lcs<> than Ill 1\ mad\bable .
6.7. Repea t Prob. 6. I (Fig. 6-3) with the following changes: b1 = 30 in. L 1, = 40 ft. and C,, = 1.75.
Checking compactni!S> with Tabl e 6- 1 (for a doubly >ymmetri c l·\hape bend ing ubou 1 it\ maJor
axis):
Flange b b, 30 in = I SO
.1. =-=-= ., I . ..
I -11 -X Ill
65 65
Flange ;," -.. =- IO.X
= = \IF;. V'!.6
Flange }., = 106 ... 106 = 2-Ul

vF;- 16.5 \36 - 16.5
For the flange. (I.,. = 10.8) < (). = 1.".0) < 0.. = 24.0).
f-rom Prob. 6.1. for the web (\ hich ha' not changed)
(.I.,= 106.7) < (I. = 12RU) < {t., = I til 7)
Ihe flange' and v.eb are noncom pact :.\/, < Mn < M,for the limn \tate ot n.H and \'v LB. In both o:a>e .
Mn, 1\ dctermtncd ll\tng the hnear interpolation Eq . (A -F/-
3)
Regardtng lateral bracing and the lim1t tate of Ll B· "- 1. / r,. ''here r, =\I)A The
cro ·\cCtiOnal area A = (30 111 x l1n)::! +(56 in x 0.-W Ill)= X-1 .5tn The contribution of the
tv.o flanges
78 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS [CH A P. 6
and the web to the moment of inertia I

are
BT '
-+AD '
Elements 12
Iin x (30in)' J
2 Flanges [
---'---..:....+II 2 = 450Chn'
12
56 in X (0.44 in)'
Web
, ._ , + () = 0.4 m•
I, 4500 in•
4500in'
r, = .,, S . = 7.30 in
o-..• 10
For
LTB. ?.. = L1, = 40ft x 12 in/ft = 65.1!
r, 7.3m
For LTB 300 300

?.. =-=-=SOO
Vi\ v'36 ..
p
For LTB. ?.., can be determined (as indicated in Table 6-1) !rum Eq . (F/-6). (FI-H). and (FI-9) in
Chap. 5. as follows.
)., = L. = X I vI + vI + >. J,. - f; )'

r, F.-F.
where
_ .T , EGJA
X ,- S, V1 2 .
F. -F.= (36- 16.5) ks1 = 19.5 A= H4.5111 '

k\1.
E = 29.000 ksi. G = 11.200 ksi.
J='fb1'
3
=-I::; {[
_,
3011.1 X (1 1.11)']"- + [."161.1l X (O,.,,.,,.m)']) = 2 l.,lll. 1•
For (-shaped members, C = l./4(d -td. Then

x, = 4[1./4(d -t, ) ] ( )2
- I, GJ
=I S,(d - t, )] (iJ
2
S =!.c= = I, _ I,
' C d/2 58 111/2 2lJ I ll
The contributions of the rwo flanges and the web to the moment of inertia I, arc
BT"'
Elements -+AD '
12
3() in x {lin)' ·] 1
2 Flanges + (30 111 x l1n )(2!!.5 an)' 2 4!!,740 111
[
12
0.44 m x,.(.:5..6-_i.n.:.)_ + ()
·. .
1
Web "' 6.403 Ill
12
-)-,)- .. 111 •
I, 55, 143 tn'
)
S = = (90( Ill
' 29 111
CHAP. 6j NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 79
lT 29,000 kips/in x 11.200 kip/in 2 x 21.6 in' x 84.5 in 2

X ,= = 900
1901m' . .,
x, = [
1901in'x(58-l)in] - 2
= 0.20
• 11.200 ksi x 21.6
in•
For LTB.
900 1
)., = V l +VI+ 0.20(19.5) = 144.3
19.5
For the hmit state of LTB
(}.p = 50.0) < (A= 65.8) < ()., = 14-U)
In summary, for all three limit tates (LTB. FLB. and WLB). A,, < A < A,; that is, the member is a
noncompact beam. and the "noncompact beam " provisions of this chapter apply.
The equations for , and M, are given in Table 6-1 (for a doubly symmetric Ishape bending about
M1
it:. major axis)
(r, F, )S, for LTB and

M, = { FLB for WLB
F.S.
To determine z.. we obtain !
AD.
In calcu lating Z,, the upper and lower halves of the web are taken separa t ely.
Elements AD
2 Flanges ((30 in x lm) x 28.5 in]2 = 1710

2 half-Webs in' 1(2!! in x 0.44 in) x l.t in]2 =
3.t3 m'
Z, 2053in'
Z, = 2053 in'
Determming flexural Mrength:.. we obtain
= F. Z= 36 kips /In: x 2053 in'= • k ' .f

1,A 1
.,,.. ' ' 12 in / ft 6 'P
()9
For LTB and FLB

1
M _(F. _F. _ 19.5 kips /in x 1901 in'_ .
, - , ,)5x - in/ft -30H9 k1p-ft
12
For WLB
3
= F.S = 36 kips/in: x 1901 in .f
= 570 ktp t
M,. ,. ' 12 in/ft
The various results for). and Mare plotted in Fig. 6-8. From the figure . or by solving Eqs. (A-FI-2) and
F -3), it is evident that FLB governs for minimum M,.,; M.,= 5182 kip-ft.
The de ign ftexural strength <J>,.M•• = 0.90 x 5182 kip-ft = 4664 kip-ft .
The design shear strength i 184 kips as in Prob . 6.1.
6.8. Repeat Prob . 6.7 with an additional change. The thickness of the web is lw = 1in.
The design shear strength i a' in Probs. 6.3 (for an unstiffened web) .6.4. and 6.5 (for a stiffened
web).
80 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PI.ATE GIRDERS [CHAP. 6
---...:.:.:.:.:.:_::::-':f: -i--- ..._-------t--====r=' ""-"'"---

• M _, = 5703 kip-ft (V
M., - 5 1 8 !up-It 1 -......_ 1 M., - 5406 kip-ft
I I ........._ 1 (LTB. C, •
I I --..._ --..._ I 1.75)
I
I 1 I
I ----I
I .11 = '089 1p-ft I -. M., 089 kip
I !I·LBI I ; fl t LTB. C. = I
I I LTB
I 1=658 I
II A = 50.0 I ------rI 1 ------
I
I
L---+ --+l ---------r----*-------------- A .- 1-1-' 3 ---- -- A
A,= 10.8 t A , - 140 A,- 106.7 t A ,= 161.7
A = 15 A = 128
FLB WLB
Fig. 6-8
Regardang flexural trength. the plate girder proviston mu t be applied because
( = 5 i =224) > (1)70 = 97 =161.7)

r. 0._5 10 VF. y36
The appropriate equation are (A-G2-J) to (A-G2·1 ).
For the limit tate of LTB,).. = L./r"
). = 300 = 300 = so ()
p VF. $36 ..
. 756 756
)..., -
vF
-- '·
y3n
- j"!L).()
Determ10ing r 1 , we obtain r1 =$I,/ A of a \cgment consisting of the compres.,aon flange plu

one-sixth of the web . (See Fig. 6-9.)
BT·'
Element -+AD1
12
linx(30in) '
Flange ---..:..-,....:... + 0 = 2250 in4
1-
9.3 in x (0.25 in) '
;, Web 12 +0 =0
I 2250 in
A = (30 in x I in) + (9.3tn x 0.25 111) = 32.3 in1

2250 in• _ .
10·
0
3
. ' - 0.. 10
32.3
). = L. =40ft X 1_2 in / ft = _
r1 8.3 111 57 5
For LTB, (.l.,, = 50.0) < (). = 57.5) < ().,= 126.0). The value of c.is normally
determined from E4.
[5.10]; however, Co = 1.75 is stated in Prob. 6.7 .
CHAP. 6] NONCOMPAC'T BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS 81
I in
h 56
6 = in
= 9.3 in
6
-1 0.25tn
Fig. 6-9
Regarding the lim i t state of

FLB
).=!?.£.= 30in =IS.O
2t1 2 x l i n
65 65
;.,,, = \(F, = v'J6 = I 0.8
)., = 15 0 = 1 5 0=? 0
V F. V-5.3 6
For FLB, Up= 10.8) <(A= 15.0) < (A, = 25.0); C, = 1.0 for FLB. The critical compression flange
stress F;, is the lower value obtained on the basis of LTB and FLB. Because ;.,, < ;., < ;.,, for both LTB
and FLB, Eq. (A-G2-5) applies in both cases.
(A). ,-_}.{, )] s F.,
r
1
F;.,= C"F., 1-
2 • I'
For LTB, we obtain

1(57.5 -50.0)]
.0 _ 0.0 s36 ksi
Dr.= I.75 X 36 ksi [ I -
126 2 5
;:;,= 36 ksi
For FLB
• ·[
f ,., = I.0 x 36 ks• I--
l ( 1 5.0 -
_ IO .S,)] s36 kst.
2 2:> .0- 10.8
F,.,= 30.7 ksi
h, 970)
R,,c; = 1-0.0005a,( {k v
--.IF < 1.0
56 in x 0. 5 in f .,.
a = = 0.47
'30 i nX!in
56 970 )
RPa = I - 0.0005 X 0.47 X -. < l.O
( in
? .
0._5 In v30 .
7
RPG= 0.99
For th e limit state of tension flange yielding
(A-G2-I)
For th e limit state of compression flange
buckling.
M,, = S"R,c;F,, (A-G2-2)

Because the plate girder is doubly symmetric . S" = S,. = S,. Also, (F,., = 30.7 ksi) <(F., = 36 ksi). Eq.
G -2) governs.
H2 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIROERS [CIIAP. 6
DctermiOIO!! S,:
BT -'
Element +AD'
-
u
30inx(l10) ]
::! Flange [ l:! + (30 in X I 10)(:!8.5 10) 2
0.2510 x_c(_5: h tn..).:._ + 0.
Web = 3,659 10"
12
I, 52.399 in"
S = I,= 52.399 in"_ ,

' c 58in/2 1807 10
The nominal flexu ral strength

1807 in' x 0.99 x .30.7 k si
l\II,,. =S,R I'C,f;,= ,. /f
1- Ill I
= -+576 kip-ft
The dc,tgn flexural \trength cp,M., = 0.90 x 4576 kip-ft = 41 1Y ktp-ft .
For Proh, . 6.9 to 6 12. refer to Fig. 6- 10 and determine

(a) \\ hcthcr the flexural member is a compact heam. noncompact beam. ur plate girder
(b) The c.Jc,tgn llcxural 'trength.
(c) rhc de"!!." ...hear strength.
A"umc A'" .,teel. /.,, = 0, C,, = 1.0.
.. 11
h.
I·
1..--------,1
I.
·... ...c-
0 0
'I,
I I
Fig. 6- 10
.. ,. 11 , .
69• • = 1.> _tn, t. =,,
111
tn = tn.
Am. (a) 'loncompact beam. (b) tp,M., = 7R29 kip-ft . (c) cp. v. WI ktP'·
CHAP. 6) :-10'-ICOMPACT BEA:-.tS A"'D PLATE GIRDERS 83
. ') .
6• b1 1. m.r = - t. =I,m. .
10• = 1 m,
Ans. (a) Plate girder. (b) cp,M,.. = 5763 kip-fl. (<') cp,. V,, = 25 kip>.
6•11 b1 6'm.r 'm.r. .m.

1
• -- - _-,
Ans. (a) Noncompact beam . (b) cp,M., = 7406 k1p-ft (f) cp, v.= 381 ki .
6.12. b1 =26in. r1 = lm. t.=\ in .

Ans . (a) Plate g1rder. (b) lp,M., = 5955 kip-ft. {c ) cp,. V,, = 24 ktps.
6.13. Design stiffeners to mcreasc the design shear strength of the plate girder in Prob. 6.12 to 280 kips.
Neglect tension field action.
Ans. Single 5 in X ', 1 11 tiffe ner plates or pair of 4 in X ', qiffener plates. spaced at 2 ft U in m either
case .
6.14. For the plate girder wnh ,llffener> in Prob. 6.13. determme the de ign shear strength 1f tcns1on field
action b included . An. l/1. V.= 371 kip> .
Chapter 7
Members in Flexure and Tension
NOTATION
e = eccentricity, in or ft
M =bending moment, kip-in or kip-ft
M ,., = nominal flexural strength for x-axis bending, kip-in or kip-ft
M,,.. = nominal flexural strength for y-axi'i bending. kip-in or kip-ft
M,., = required tlexural strength for x-axis bending. kip -in or kip-
fl M,,. = required flexural strength for y-axis bending . kip-in or
kip -ft
P = axial tensile force. kips
P,, = nominal ten sile strength .
kips P,, = required tensile strength.
kips x = major principal centroidal
axis y = minor principal centroidal
axis
tJ> >M,., = design flexural strength for x-axis bending. kip-in or kip-ft
tl>t>M"' =design flexural strength for y -axis bending. kip-in or kap-ft
tJ>, = resistance factor for ftexure = 0.90
tJ>,P,, =design tensile strengt h.
kips
tJ>, = resistance factor for tension = 0.90 or 0.75 (See Chap. 3 )
INTROD UCTION
This chapter applies to singly and doubly symmetric member subjected to combined axial
tension and bending about on e or both principal axes. The combination of ten sion with flexure
can result from any of the following:
(1) A ten sile force that is eccentric with respect to the centroidal axis of the member. as in
Fig. 7-l(a)
/////
_.. ._-
p
p
(ti l II> I
Fig. 7-1 Combined ten\lon and flexure
84
CHAP . 7] MEMBERS IN FLEXURE AND TENS ION 85
(2) A tension member ubjected ro lateral force or moment. as 1n Fig. 7- l (b)

(3) A beam transmitting wind or other axial forces, as in Fig. 7-J(c)
INTE RACTION FORM ULAS

The cross sections of members with combined flexure and tension must comply with Formula
( H 1-1a) or ( H 1-1b), whichever is applicable:
For (P,Jq>,P,,)?:: 0.2

(H 1-1a)
For (P,Jq>,P,,) <

0.2 P,, + ( M ,..., + M ,,.. ) =:;; (H 1-
l.O lb)
2¢,P,, qJ0 M,, qJ 0 M,,.
I n these int eraction formulas, the terms in the numera tors (P,,. M.,, and M.,v) are the
required tensile and flexural strength s calculated from the combinations of fa ctored loads in
Chap. 2. The terms in the denominators arc as follows: q>,P,, is th e design tensile strength as d
etermined in Chap. 3, and ¢ >M, is the design flexural strength as determined in Chap. 5 or 6. The
subscript x refers to bending about the major principal cen troidal (or x) axis; y refers to the min
or principal centroidal (or y) axis.
I nt eraction formu l as ( H 1-1a) and ( H l-lb) cover the general case of axial force combined
with biaxial bending. They arc also valid for uniaxial be nding (i.e., if M.,, = 0 or M,., = 0), in
which case they can be plotted a in Fig. 7-2.
+r. ----------------------.--.
P.
P. g M.
- +- =I
tP. 9 .P.M.
O.'>T"'P' -----------------
M.
Fig. 7-2 Interaction formula (H 1-Ja) and (HJ-Jb) modified for axial load combined with bending about one
axis only
Solved Problems
7.1. Find the lightest W8 in A36 steel to suppon a factored load of 100 kips in tension with an
eccentricity of 6 in. The member is 6ft long and is laterally braced onl y at the suppons ;
C, = 1.0. Try orien tations (a) to (c) in Fig. 7-3.
86 MEMBERS IN FLEXURE AND TENSION [CHAP. 7
T • 100 kips T
t• • bm l e = 6in r-6m
---- t
Fig . 7-3
100 kip x 6 in _ S(J .

P,, = 100 kips; M,. = P,,e 12 in/ft - klp-fl
=
For orientation (a) in Fig. 7.3

P,, = 100 kips. M," =50 kip-ft. M,.. = 0
Try a W8x28: the design tensile strength (for a cross section with no holes)
<J>,Pft = <J>,F.A, [Chap. 3. Eq. (01-I)l
= 0.90 X 36 k i X 8.25m'= 267 kip
For (L = 6.0 ft) < (LP = 6.8 ft). the design flexural strength for x-axi
bendmg
(Chap. 5, Eq . [5. 7))
cp .w.... = cp,MP = <J>,Z,F
0.90 x 27.2 in ' x 36 ksi f
- 12 in/ ft = 73.4 kip- t
which IS also the tabulated value for l/>.M" for a W8x 28 in the Beam Selection Table in Part 3 of the
AISC LRFD Manual.
Since _!l_ = 100 k p = 0.37 > 0.2

lJ>,P,, 267 kipS
the fh t of the two interaction formu l as applies.
8 ( 50 kip-ft )
0.37+ _ kip-ft +0 =0.37+0.o l O.lJ!\ <' 1,() o.k.
9 73 4
Fur oricntauon (b) in Fig . 7-3
P,, = 100 kips. M ..., = 0, .W,., =50 k1p-ft
Again. try a W8x28 . For all L•. the design flexural strength for v-axi
bend1ng
(Chap. 5. Eq. (5.6))
lJ>bMn, = lJ>••wp = cp z. F.
0.90x IO.lin'x36ksl .,, f
- = 27.- "ip- t
12 in/ft
Because M., =50 kip-ft > <J>.M., = 27.2 kip-ft . a W8x 28 i madequate. Try aW8x 8 : A,=
1-t I in .
CHAP. 7) MEMBERS I;-1 FLEXURI.: A;-ID TENSION 87
Z\-- '..2...
:ti.n 1
,· f
_ 0.90 x 22.9If in ' x 36 - 61.8 k t p- t
rp,,M.,. - .
ksi _
12 Ill t
1/J,P•-- cp,F,. A,- 0.( () X.36 -k:-i-p;-\ X 1-1.1.Ln -:!'57 kt.p!>

Ln'
Because (P,/tp,P.) = ( HXJ ktps/-157 kips)= 0.22 ..-. 0.2. tnleracuon formula (H1-la) again applies .
- P. 8 (
- ,w., .\-1.,, ) <I.O
+
cp,P. 9 cp,M., tp,W.,
8(
0.22 +- 0 + 50 kip-ft = 0.22 + 0.72 = 0.94 < o.k.
) 1.0
9 61.8 kip-ft
For orientation (c) in Fig. 7-3, assume that the load i eccentric with respect to both principal
axes.
Referring to Fig. 7-3(c)
e, = e cos 45• = 6 in x 0.707 = 4.2 in
e, = e sin 45• = 6m x 0.707 = -1.2 in
_ k' f
'1 - P e - f = .....-
12tnft
k' f
J1,1.,, = P.e. = HXl l..tp\ X 4.2 tp- t
in_ ,
_12m/
,s..t ft -
Again, try a W8X48. As above

P, 100 kip3
::_• = . - 0.22 >0.2
rp,P,, 457 ktps
<j!,M,.. = 6Ul kip-ft
Although the W8X48 '' not listed in the Beam Selection Table in the AISC LRFD Manual. L,, and
rp,MAO can be calculated . From Eq. (FI-4) (Chap. 5):
L = 300 ·= "()() ·= '>Or

(' \F. y36
= 50 x 2.08m HI-I in= 8.7 ft
Since (L, = 6.0 ft) < (L,, = K
7ft)
cp,.M., = cp,M, = cp,,Z, 1-; (Chap. 5, Eq. 15. 7))
0.90 x -IY.Oin' x 36k • . f
= 12 in/ft 2
= I.3 ktp-
t
In Interaction Formula (I-/

/-Ia)
')') 8 (35.4 kip-ft 35.-t 1-.tp-fl) < 0
0·--+ +
9 132 kip-ft 6l .R ktp- - 1.
ft
0.22 + (0.27 + 0.57)

0.12 + 0.75 = 0.97 < J.() O.k.
The most efficient configuration IS orientation (a). trong axis bending. which require\ a WXx28 as
opposed to a W8x-18 for the other two cases.
7.2. Determ ine the maximum axial tension that can be sustained by a continuous ly braced
WlOx 19 beam with a required flexural strength M,., =54 kip-ft: A36 !.tccl. Given are
M,U' =54 kip-ft and M"' = 0.
MEMBERS 1'1 FLEXURE AND TENSION [CHAP. 7
for a \\lOx 19
kipl> -
q>,P. = cp,F A.= 0.90 36-. -, X :>.62m = IX21.tp\
X m·
S111c /., 0. < L•. cp,.w. = cp, 1p = 58.3 kip-ft (A36 Mccl) a' li\h:d 111 the Beam Selecuon Table in the
,\IS( IRfD Manual
M .,_, 5-* f..t p- =0.\13
- = = ft .
cp,.w.. 5lU ktp-ft
ln\pcction of Formula\ (HI-la) and (HI-/h) indicate that (f./l/J,1 ,) < 0.2 i' required. Consequently.
the latter tntcracuon formula governs.
P... 26 kip
Ihe max1111Um required (or factored} axial tensile force b 26 h.tp\ .
7.3. Check the adequacy of a WlOX30 as a simply \upported beam carrying the concentrated
tactorcd load <;hown in Fig. 7-4. The beam is of A36 steel and has lateral bracing on ly at the
\upport .
N•. = 8 66 lops
N. = 10 ktp'
\
30•
·"·· .. 5 loJl"
6ft 6ft
Fig. 7-4
Tht\ ''a ca\t.: of biaxtal bending with no axial load (P,, = 0}. lnteractton formula (H 1-lh) is
applicable
\incc P..l P., = 0 < 0.2.
For P,, 0, Formula (HI-/b) reduces to
A' \hown fig. 7--1. the factored force N, i sf..ewed with re,pect w the principal axe . It must firl>t be
tn
rc,ohcd inw componcnh parallel to each principal axis. a' follow\ .
.V,,. = N,cos )0° = 10 ktp'- x O.X<il'l X f16 ktp\
N,,, = N,, l>in 30o = 10 kip\ X 0.500 = 5 0 l-ip\
The re,pecuvc bendtng moment<; are
R66ktp\X 12ft
.\4,0 = = 26.0 ktp·lt
4
5.0 kipl> X 12ft _
J1,, = = I:).() ktp-ft
4
where ,\f., ami t. are the required flexural 'trength' for 1- and 1•-ax.- hendtng. rc,pecti.,cl .
CI IAP. 7] MEMBERS JN f"LE>.URE AND TE:-ISION 89
The de 1gn flexural \trcngth' arc determmt!d a\ m Chap. 5. For a •mph.! beam. C, = 1.0. h1r \-axis
bendmg. cp,..Mn. (L, = 12.0 It C.= 1.0) can be deternuned either dm:cth from the beam graph' m
Part 3 of the AISC LRFD Manual or b} interpolauon of the data m the B.:am Sclccuon Table
prC\Cntcd ther.:m The latter procedure i-. 'hown m F1g. 7-5
+,M - 83.-1 klp-ft

•..If., = 63 2 k•p-fl
\\'10 " 30
C.= I 0
L,.- 5.7 f1 L = 20 .1 II
L = Itl II
f'ig. 7-5
U•mg either method one ohtnins cp,M,. = X3.4 k1p-lt tor the W IOxJO.
For y-axis bending ( r.:gard lcs' of L,,)
0.1)0 X X .H4 in ' X 36 k i
ip1.M,. = q>,Z, F. = , /f = 23.1J k1p-tt
l_m t
Suh,tlluttng m the mteractllln formula for hlil,t<tl hendmg (P = U) ' c ohtam
.2.6_._o_k_!i P:....·.....:ft 15 o k s 1.0

- +
• r·tt
IUA kip-ft :!J Y ktp·lt
0.31 + 0.6:1 -0.94 < 1.0 n.l..
7.4. A 4-m-diameter standard ptpc hanger (A = 3 17 in . Z = 4.31 m ') upports a factored load of
1
40 ktps. For A36 teet. dctcrmme the maxtmum acceptable ccccntnci t) e: sec Fig. 7-6.
L _j 0·
Fig. 7-6
P,, = 40 kip .
Here
k tp'
cp, [>., = cp,I -..A< = 0.90 36-:-7"< 3. l7tn = 103 k1p'
Ill'
X
90 MEMBERS 1>1 FLEXURE AND TENS ION [CH AP. 7
Because
P. 0 kips
-I 0
- k = 0.39 >0.2
</J, P•.
become
u c Formula (1-f /-Ia). wh1ch for uniaxial
bending
- P,, 8 M.
---''-+- < 1.0
<fJ,P. 9 <fJ,M.
M.. = / ,1:. Bccau e it has no " trong" and ·'weak" axes. a p1pc ccuon cannot fail in lateral-torsional
bud,hng. For all L,,
Substit uti ng i n the modified Form ula (/-1 1-/a). we have

< 8 40 ki ps x e
0.39 + X O k' . 1.0
14 lp-10 $
9
e<2.4in
7.5. Repeat Prob 7 A for P,, = 20 k1p. AtiS. e < 6.3 10.
7.6. Select the lca,t-wc1ght W 12 1n A36 steel to re 1M an ;r01ial ten'lon P,, = 200 kip comb10cd with
,. = 100 k1p-ft and M.., =50 k1p-ft . AriS. Wl2 x72.
Chapter 8
Beam-Columns : CombinedFlexure and

Compression
NOTAT
ION
fJ 1 = momem magnification factor for beam-columns defined in Eq. (H 1-3)
81 =moment magnification factor for beam-columns defined in Eq . (H 1-5) and
(1-11-6)
Cm =coefficient for beam-columns defined in Eq. (II 1-·1)
£=modulus of elasticity of steel= 29.000 ksi
H =horizontal force, kips
I= moment ot inertia. in•
K = the effective length factor
L = tOr} height. in
I= unbraced length. in
M =bending momem. kip-in or k1p-ft
M 1,- fir<.t-order fac10red momem due to lateral frame tran,lauon. kip-m or kip-ft
\4,11 = fir-..t-on.ler factored momcnt a\ uming no lateral frame
translation, kip-in or l,ip-ft
.W,,. = nommal flexural ...trength for x-axi.., bendmg. k•p-in or k1p-ft
,\4,,. = nommal flexural strength for y-aXI'> bendmg. k1p-m or kip-ft
M,. - required flexural strength mclud1ng <.econd-order cf1cch, k1p-in or kip-ft
M,, = M,. for .1 -axi bending. kip-in or kip-It
.W,, = M,. for y -axi!. bending. kip-m or kip-ft
M 1 =smaller end moment in an unbraced length of beam. l,ip-in or kip-ft
M, =larger end moment in an unbraccd ll:ngth of beam, kip-in or kip-ft
111 = a factor given in Table 8-1 for use in Eq. [ 8.2 1
P- axial compressive force. kips

P,. - a function of Kl defined by Eq. [ H.J j. kip
P, = nominal compressive strength. kip
P,, = required compressive strength. kip
P, _..=effective axial load for a bcam-column. w be checked ag<Hnst the Column Load
Table in AISC LRFD Manual
U- a factor given in Table 8-l for usc m Eq. [<'1.21
x = major principal ccntroidal axis
\ = mmor principal ccntroidal axis
6.,.1, =translational deflection of the \tOr under con\Jdenlllon. in
1: H =-.urn of all horizontal forces producmg 6.,.1,. klpl>
1: P,, / ,= urn for all columns in a story of P, and P,,. re pectivcl}
q,,M,,. = design flexural strength for x-axi bending. k1p-1n or k•p-ft
91
BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION [CHAP . 8
tp,.A1,, = design flexural strength for y-axis bending, kip-tn or kip-ft

(/)1 = rcw,tancc factor for flexure = 0.90
(/), /,= design compressive strength. kips

tp, - reststance factor for compression = 0.85
INTROD UCTION
This chapter cmers singly and doubly symmetric beam-columns: members subjected to
combtned axial compression and bending about one or both principal axes. The combination of
compression with flexure may result from (either)
(a) A compressive force that is eccentric with respect to the centroida l axis of the column, as in
Fig. R-l(u)
(h) A column subjected to lateral force or moment, as in Fig. 8-l(b),
(c) A beam trano.;mitting wind or other axial forces, as in Fig. 8-l(c).
'/ ///
Ia) (bl (C)
Fig . 8-1 Combined compre •on and flexure
INTERA CTION FORMULAS

The crm sections of beam-columns must comply with formula (H1-Ja) or (HJ-Ib), which ever is
arpl i<.:ablc.
For (IU tp, / ,) ?! 0.2
P;,;,;_ + 8-
( M,,. + M,,.) < .()
I
(HI-la)
¢, P, y rp,.M,, cp,.MIII
For(!,/ ¢, f ,) <
0.2
P, + ( M,, + M,, ) $
(Hl-lb)
I.O
2¢, P, tp,.M,._. cp,.M,,
Although the tntcraction formulas for beam-column appear identical with their counterparts in
Chap 7. there arc 'ome -,igmficant differences in the definitions of the terms. For beam-columns:
\1,.,, \1,, - required flexural strengths (based on the factored loads) including
second
order effects. kip-in or kip-ft
P,, =required compressive strength (based on the factored loads), kips
CHAP. R] BEAM-COLUMNS : COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION 93
¢, P, = design compre!>sive strength a determined 10 Chap. 4. k1ps

Q>,M,., <fJ"M"' =design flexural c;treng.th '"determined m Chap. S or 6. kip-in or kip-ft
cp, = resbtance factor for comprcl>!>ion = O.XS
cp1, =resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
The subscript x rclcr'> to bendmg about the maJOr principal ccntroidal (or x) ax1s; y refers to the
m10or principal ccntroidal (or I' ) ax1\ .
SIMPLIFIED SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS

Second-order moments m heam-columns arc the add1t10nal moment'> caused by the ax1al
comprcss1ve forces acung on a displaced structure.:. Normally. structural analysi'> i'> fibt-order; that 1s.
the everyday methods used in practice (whether done manually or by one of the popular computer
programs) assume the forces as acting on 1he original undeflected Mructure. S '::ond-order effects are
neglectt•d. T ,ati fy the AISC LRFD Specificatio , second-order m<''llents in beam-columns must
be cons1dered in their design
lns<ead of ngnrou' s.:c,mll •l1 .tcr analysis. the AISC LRHJ Specificauon pre-;ents a simplified
alternative method. the component\ of the total factored momcnt determined from a first-
order elastic analysis (neglecting secondary effects) arc dtvided into two groups. M, and M1,.
I. M,-the required tlexural strength in a member assummg there is no lateral translation of
the structure . It include!> the first-order moments resulting from the gravity loads (i.e .. dead
and live loads) . calculatcJ manually or h computer .
')
,w,,-the reqUired flexural trength 10 a mcmhcr due to latcral frame tran'>lntion . In a
- braced frame. M, =0. In an unhraccd frame. M1, inclu des tht.: moment5 from the lateral
loads. If both the frame and its vertical load arc yrnmetric . M1, from the vertical load is
· i'cro. However. it either the vertical load\ (i.e . dead and ltve loads) or the frame
geometry is asymmetnc and the frame 1\ nm t-raced. lateral tran latmn occurs and .'111, 0. *
To detcrmtne
.\41, (a) appl) ficutiou hortLontal reaction· at each floor lcvcl to prevent lateral tr an\la t
ion
and (b) u c the rcver e ot the'e rcact101:' a "sway force!\.. to obta111 A11,. This prot·cdure
is
illu strated in Fig. X-2. A b indicated there. M,, for an dnbraced frame i the sum of
the
moment due to the lateral loads and the ..,way force\
."
p l p
I R I • R
r
I
I p I
I. R I'. f R . i
I I
p
I
I
R I + R.
,
-- -...
- - ...
- - ... I --
nt'"'".t l "'a l ramc
rJm\! lor .If
fnr It"
Fig . 8-l f ram;.: models for M.,, and A·/ 1,
Once M111 and /1./ 1, have been obtained. the) are multiplied b) their rc pectivc magn1ticauon
factor\. 8 1 and 8 '· and <tdded to approx1ma11 the actual second-order factored moment .'>1,..
(1/1-2)
94 BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBfNED FLEXURE AND COMPRESS ION IC'J lAP X
As \hown m Fig. H-3. 81 accounts for the secondary P- i'l effect 1n all frame (includin!!
sway-m h1bited). and 8 cO\ers the P-!:!. in unbraced frame . The analytical expression' for
effect 81 and 8_ folio"'.
8 = C,., 2: 1.0 ( H 1-
1
(I - P.J P,)
where P,, IS the factored axial compressive force m the member. ki p
,,.,-'£1
p = --= [H. I]
' ( Kl)
4
where K = 1.0, I is the m om ent of inertia (in ). and I is the unbraccd length (in) . ( Both I and I
arc
taken in the plane of bendin g on I;.)
6.
r H
4 1''
\
A
/w
6
.-.1 = .r.+ Po
-.. 8 M.
L I = HI
- M • Pt:.
- 8 \I
'
I<II Ihi
•·ig. 8-3 l llu\trallons of secondary effects. (a) column 111 braced frame. (h) column 111 unbraced frame
The cocffic1cnt C.., • determined as follows.

(I) For rc,m11ned beam-columns not subjected to tranwcr\c load<; between the1r support-, in
the plane of bending
( H /--1)
where M1/ M z is th e ratio of the small er to larger m oment at th e e nd s of the portion of

the member unbraccd in th e plan e of bending under considcra t ion. If the rotations due to
end mom ents M 1 and M! are in opposite din.:ction . then M 1/ M i negativ e; otherwise M 1 /
M2 is
po itive
.
(2) For beam -column s subjected to transverse l oads if th e ends are
supports,C, = O.RS: if th e end\ arc unrestrained against rotation.
between aga inst rotation.
re.1truined
c.,.= 1.0.
Two equations are given for 8 1 in the AlSC LRFD Specifica
ti on:
I ( H J-5)
8,= -----
-1 _ ,, f'. ( 0.,.,, )
--II HL
I
8,= -...:._- ( H 1-6)
or - P,,
[ -=-.::.
P,.
CHAP. 8) BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION
95
wh ere / ,=required axial strength of all column in a story (i.e .. the total factnred gravity
load
above that level). kip-.
t:J...1, = translational deflecuon of the tory under con-.ideration. m
).':II- sum of all horizonta l forces producing t:J.,1,. k1p
L =\lory height. in
f. -= ummation of P, for all column m a tor).
Values of P, are obtained from l::.q. [X. lJ, con,1dering the actual K and I of each column in its plane
of bendin g. Eq u ation ( // /-5) is generally t he more conven i ent of the two formu las for eva l uat i ng
13 . The quantity 6..,11/ L b the story drift mdex. Often. especial!) for tall buildings. the maximum
drift index is a design critenon. Using 11 m cq. ( H 1-5) facilitate'> the determmatlon of /l :·
For columns with b1axial bending in frames unbraced m both directions. two value of B 1 (
8" and B".) arc needed for each col umn and two values of IJ for each story. one for each
major direction. Once t he appropriate 8 1 and B: have been evalua ted. Eq. (Hl-2) can be
used to determine M,, and .\.f.,, for the applicable interaction formula
PRELIMIN A RY
DESIGN
The selection of a trial W shape for beam-column de'>ign can be facilitated by means of an
approximate interaction equation gl\en in the AlSC LRFD Manual Bendmg momenh are
converted to equivalent axial load'> as follow<,.
r...c1T = 1 . -1 M..,m + M,,m u [ H. 2]
where P,.< 11 i'> the effective axial load to be ched.cd again t the Column Load Table in Part 2 ol the
A ISC LRFD Manual: P,,. .'.tux• and \4,, are a\ defined 111 mtcraction formulas (H 1-la} and (H l - Ib)
(P,, kips; M,,., M,.,. kip-ft); and manu U are factors from Table H-1. adapted from the AISC LRFD
Manual.
Table 8- 1 Values of m and U for Eq . 18.Z J ; F.= 36 1..si
Ill
KL. rt ]() 12 14 Jo IX 20 ?22 u

W4 4.3 3. I 2.3 1.9 - - - 1.4
W5 -1.7 3. 2.9 2.3 1. l.7 - 1 ..
W6 3.8 3.2 2.X 2.4 2.3 1.9 I .R 1.9
2.4
W8
WIO
3.6
3. I
3.5
3.0
3.4
3.0
3. I
2.9
2.X
-
-· '
2.4 1.5
1.5
\\'12
,
2.5 ,-·:'-1 2.4 2.4
2.X
2.4 2.4 2.4 1.5
Wl4 -· - 2.0 2 () 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
Once a atisfactory trial section ha-. been selected (i.e .. P,.c1 :sthe tabulated <P.I .), it should
be verified with formula (111-la) or (H l-Ib).
Solved Problems
8.L. ln AJo Mecl. select a W l 4 SI.!Ction for a beam-col umn (in a braced frame) with the
following combination ot factored load:.: P,. =ROO k1ps: fir-.t-ordcr
moment'> .\4, = 200 l,.1p-ft . .\1, - O,
96 BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBIN ED FLEXURE A:"JD COMPRESS ION IC'IIAP. 8
single curvature bending (i.e.. equal and opposite end moments): and no transverse loads
along the member. The ftoor-to-l oor height is 15ft.
For a braced frame. 1\ =I 0 for design (see Chap -1): K,L, = K, L,- 1.0 x 15ft= 15ft. Select a
trial WI-I \hapc using Eq. (8.2[
P...<ff = P,. + M..,m + M,.,mU
For a WI-I with KL = 15ft m = 1.0 and U = 1.5, 111 Table H-1. Substituting in Eq. [8.2]. we Qbtain
P...<" =ROO+ :200 X 2.0 + 0 = 1200 kip!>
In the AISC Column Load Tables (p. 2-19 of the LRFD Manual) 1f 1-; = 36 ksi and KL = 15ft.
t/J. P. = 12XO ktps (>P.<n - 1200 kip ) for a WI-IX 159.
Tr a WI4X 159. To dctermme Jf..,(the second-order moment). u\c Eq (H 1-2).
J\f,. = 8 1 f\,f"' +8 /\If,,
Bccau c the frame is braced. M,, = 0.
M,. = 81 M., or M,., = 8 1 x 200 kip-ft
According to Eq. (H 1-
3)
8, = c" I ;;::: 1.0
1 - P..P,
where C,. = 0.6- 0.4(M,/M-) fur beam-column not \llbJected to lateral l oad between support .
!'or M 1 = M 2 = 200 kip-ft in ingle curvature bending (i.e .. end moment in opposite direction ).
M1 :wo
-= -- -1.0
M: 200
For a WI4X 159. /, = 191Kl in' C..= 0.6- 0.-1( -1.0) = l.O
,_ :r '£1, _ :r = x 29,000 kip/ in 2 x 1900 in"= k'
r1 - ,- , I 6 ,784 1p
·
(Kt) ( 1.0 X 15ft X I 2 in/ft)·
In Eq . (H 1-
3)
8, I0 l-
=1.(
=
1-800kip\/ l6.7il4 kips
Here. M,.. = 1.05 x 200 kip-ft- 210 kip-ft. the ccond-order required nexural strength . (Sub tituting
M,., = 210 kip-ft in preliminary dc ign. Eq. [ 8.1] till l eads to a WI4 X 159 as the trial section.)
Selecting the appropriate beam-column interaction formula. (H /-Ia) tH (H 1-lb). we have
P,, il::-0:0-:-:k-:-
i_p,__ - 0.63 >(),_')
-
12XO
k1p\
U\c formulil (HJ-Ja). ''hich. fur M... =0. reduce' tn
To determine tfJ,.:Wn, (the dc\lgn flexural ;trength). refer Chap. 5 of thi' text or the Load Factor
to
De;ign Selection Table for Beam\ in the AISC LRF-D Manual. Smce the Wl4 x 159 i not
tabulated therem. the basic equation' arc u\ed mstead . From Lq. [5. 10] in Chap. 5
C - 7- Cl (MI)'"" "'
h - I. ) + I. - + 0. -' --··'
M,
M
CHAP. R] BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION 97
Agatn. M 1/ M.=
-1.11.
C.= I.75 + 1.115( -I.II)+ O.J( I 0)' = I 0
If( ,- I CJ, .\1 = Jfr = Z,f for bending about the.\ axt' tf L, L, (\cc Eq 15.7]); t,, = (3011r, / \'f:) for
W hapc' bcnl about the t ax• [Eq. (Fl-1)]. For a Wl4x 159 r = 4 0 m .tnd
_ (300 x 4.11 tn) /( 1:! m/ f
ft)_ I 6.7 t
L,. - -
\36
Becau-.c ( L1.- 15.0 ft) <( L,. = 16.7
ft). 287m' X 36 kop-./m
,\1,, = Z,F, = /f - H61 kip-
It l.!oll t
and 1/J,M,, = 0.90 x 861 ktp-fl = 775 kip-ft

Suhstittuing the imc:ractinn formu la, we obtain
R
0.6. + X-
:!I0 k_o!l.._l·f.:.t.:
Y 775 !..1p-ft
= 0.63 + 0.:!4 = 0.!\7 < 1.0 O.k.
By a irmlar soluuon of inleraction formula (111-la), it can be >hown that a W l4x 145 rs also adequate.
8.2. A ume the beam-column in Prob. R.l i!> turned 90 : that i..,, M, = 0. M, = 200 kip-ft
(first-order moment\) . Select the appropriate \\ 14 ::.cetton .
Again. for a braced frame. " = I 0.
K,L, =K L, = L.Ox 15ft l ft
In ..clectmg a trial \Vl4 'hape \\llh Eq.l<'1.2]. m = 1.0 and L - I 5 (Tahlc X-I) Suh,tituung in Eq.
[8.2]. we obtarn
P..,11 = P.+ .\f,., m + Jt ,., m L
= !{()() + 0 + :!00 X 2.tl X l 5 = 14110 ktp\
In the Column Load Table > ot the AISC LRFD Manual (p. :!-1\1) If 1.; = 36 k i and KL = 15
fl.
1/J, P.. = 1430 krps ( >P..'" = 14011 krp') for a W 14x
176.
Try a WI4X 176 To determine M,., (the econd-order momenl). u-.e Eq. (H 1-2), which. for a
braced frame (M,, = 0). hccomcs M,. = 8 1M,,. or AI... = 81 x 200 kip-ft. "' 111 Proh. !U. C,., = 1.0
for equa l end moment' in ingl c cunaturc: bendtng (i.l!.. t!l1d rotatinn' rn oppo itc direction ) .
4
Determining P, for y-axi bend ing of a WI4 X 176. (1, = 838 in )
;rz £1 ,,.z X :!9.00() k i/in" X X3X 111 1

p = '- ' - 7403 kip>
' (Kl) (1.0 X 15ft X 1:! tn/fl) ·
In Gq. (II 1-
3)
B1 -
c..
-
1.0
=1.1:!
- l - P)P I - XtJO !..rp/7403 ktp'
The \t:cond-order requrred flexural strength J/,., = I 12 x 200 l..rp-11 = 22-1 l..tp-tt.
Sub,tlluttng M., = :!24 k1p-ft 111 preliminar) de,tgn Eq ( .11
P.cr = XOU + II + :!24 X 2 .II X I 5

= 1472 kip'>
> 1430 k1p' = l/1. Pn for WI4X 1
< 157Ukip, = l/JP., for Wl4xl9
(Sec p. 2-19 of the AISC LRFD \lanu al.)
9R BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION [CHAP. 8
Tn a Wl4x 193: /, = 931 in'

=,T'£[ .T'X29,{)()()kip /in'x931 in'_.,.,., k .
P •- • -n -4 tps
(KJ)· ( 1.0 X 15ft X !2tn/ft)·
lnEq .(lll-
3)
8 - C,.. - I.O = I II
( J -P..l P,.) l- 800 kip/8224 ktJh .
'Iht• \ccund-nrdcr required fle-..;ural strength M ,., = I II x 200 kip-ft = 222 kip-ft.
Sclccttng the appropnatc beam-column interaction formula, (f/1-lu) or ( II l-Ib)
P,, _8<><1_k•_,_· p_s =

0.•I
> tl ?
1/J,P,, l570ktps
U\t: furmula (II 1-la), which. forM..,= 0. reduce to
P,, 8 M,.,
---''-+- < 1.0
cp, P,, 9 ljJpM.,,
To dctcrmtnc rp,,M... (the dc;.ign flexural strength), refer to Chap. 5 of thi text. From Eq. [5.6),
M... = M,. = /, r,(f(lr nHnor-aXI\ bending) regardless of the unbraccd length L,,.
For a Wl4X JC)3, L, = 180
in '
180in' x 36 kip /in
,..f... = 12 tn/ft 540 ktp-ft
and ljJ •.•\1., =II YO x 540 ktp-ft = 486 kip-ft.

Sub,tttuttn tn the tnteraction formula. "e obtain
')')? k' f
8 --
-
0. :I+- ·tp - I
- ' -
9 486 ktp-ft
= ().5) T 0,4( = () 92 < (.0 0, J..,
8.3. Select a Wl4 cellon (A36 :.teel) for a beam-column 111 a braced frame with the factored
load-.: P,, = 200 kips: fim-order moments M, = 200 kip-ft. M, -200 kip-ft. The 15-ft-long
beam-column is ubjccted to transverse loads: its ends arc ..pinned ...
f-or a braced frame. K = 1.0.
K, L, = K, L, = l.0 X 15 ft - 15 ft
Select a trwl Wl4 hape using Eq. (8.2]:
P...dt = P,, + M,.,m +

M,.,m U
Fnr a Wl4 with f.../.= 15ft: 111 = 2.0 and U = 1.5. in Table 8-1. Sub\tituting in Eq. [8.2). we obtain
P.. do = 200+ 200 X 1.0+ 200 X 2.0 X 1.5 = 1200
ktps
In the Column Load Tables of rhe AISC LRFD M anual (p. 2-19). if 1-; = 36 k i and KL =15f t.
cp, P,, = 1280 ktp ( -'"P., "' = 1200 kips) for a Wl4X 15Y.
Trv a Wl4 x 15C) To delermme the required .:cond-order moments, M.,, and M,.,, use Eq . (H1-2).
whtch for .1 braced frame (.'v!,, = 0). reduce to
Accordmg to Eq ( H 1-3)
C,".
/P 2: 1.0
8,. =
1- P , ,.
-
8 .. -
c. "> 1.0
I-P./P.,
CHAP. 8] BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION 99
For a beam-column subjected to transver e l oad <tnd with end> unrestrained against rotation, C,., = 1.0.
Therefore. C,.,. = C,.., = I.0.
For a Wl4x 159, I, = 1900 in"
Jr:x29.000 kips/ in:x I<JflO in• .

-------'--'--------,.,- = 16,784 k1ps
( 1.0 X 15ft X 12 in
/ft)•
In Eq. (H1-3)
B ,= I.O . = 1.01
I -200 kips/16.78-1 k1ps
M,., = 1.01 X 200 kip-ft = 202 kip-ft
1,. = 74!\ in•
2
p = n:£1, _ ;r:x 29.000 kip>/in X 748 !\ ki s
in"= 660
p
,., (KJY ( 1.0 x 15ft x 12 in /ftf
In Eq. (H 1-3)
1.0
B,. = . = l .03
I- 200 kips/660!\ kips
M,., = 1.03 X 200 kip-ft = 206 kip-ft
The second-order required flexural strengths arc M,., = 202 kip-ft and M,.,. = 206 kip-ft. (Substituting
these values in preliminary de ign Eq. [8.2] reconfirms a WJ4Xl59 as the trial section.)
Selecting the appropriate beam-column interaction formula. ( H 1-Ja) or (H l-Ib), we obtain
P,, 200 kips )

---' = . = 0.16 < (.2
</J,P., 12XOk1p
Use formula
(HI-/b):
For a simply supponed member (i.e., end moments M, = M: = 0). C,, = 1.0. In the solution to Prob. 8.1
it was determined that for a W 14 X 159 ( Lh = 15ft. C o = 1.0). <J>"M"' = 775 kip-ft.
The value of M,, can he determined from Eq. (5.6]: M,., = M,, = Z,F. (for minor-axis
bending) regardless of the unbraced length L,.
For a WJ4x 159. Z, = 146 in '.
1-16 in ; x 36 kips/ in: k' f

1\1,, = = -138 1p- l
12 in/ft
<j>,,M,., = 0.90 X 43X kip-ft = 39-1
kip-ft Substituting in Interaction fomwla (H1-1b). we obtain
u_._l6 + (202 k1p-ft +.:..2t_l6_k ·ir.:..)·_ft)

2 775 kip-ft 39-1 kip-ft
= 0.08 + 0.26 + 0.52 = 0.86 < 1 .0 O.k.
By a similar soluti on of interaction famlllla (Hl-Ib). it can be shown that a WI-I x 1-15 is also adequate.
8.4. In A36 steel , select a Wl2 section for a beam-co lumn (in a symmetric unbraced frame;
K = 1.2) with the following factored loads: P,, = 400 kips; first-order M,,. = 100 kip-ft due
to wind, all other moments equal zero. Member length is 12ft. The allowable story drift
index
100 BEA M -COLUMNS: COMB IN ED FLEXURE AND COMPR ESSI ON [CHAP . 8
(6.,h/ L) ill .J.,. or 0.0025. as a result of a total horizontal (unfactorcd) wind force of 80 kips.
The total factored gravity load above this story is 4800 kips .
Given P. - 400 ktp . .\J,, = 0, .\-1•., = 0. .\1,., = 100 ktp-ft. !: P,, = 4!«10 l..ip,, jj.,,./L = 0.11025. L H =
RO ktp,, 1\I. = 1.2 X 12 rt = 14.4 ft.
from l:q . CHI-2)..\1,., = B .M <·· where [accordmg to Eq (HI-5)1
. - I . IX
4800 ktps
I- ( . (0.0025)
X J ktps
The cc<md-ordcr n:quired flexural strength M.,_, = !.IX X 100 kip-ft = IIX k ip-ft.
Select ing a trial Wl 2 shape with Eq . [8.2], we obtain
.dT = P., + M,,Ill + l\IIIH 111 u

where for a W12 (KL = 14.4 fl) ,m = 2.4 and U =
1.5.
P,, elf= 400 + IIR x 2.4 + 0 = 6R3

kip
By interpolation in the Column Load Tables of the AISC' LRFD Manual (p. 2-24), if 1-:= 36 ksi and
KL = 14.Ht. rp,P. =732kip (>P.... =683 kips} for a Wl2 x 6.
Selectmg the appropriate beam-column interaction formula. (Hl-In} or (H 1-/h). we obtain
P,, = 400 ktpS = 0.55 > 0.2

rp P. 732 ktps
Uo;c formula ( 111-/a). which. for J-1., = U, reduces to
_,P.:.... 8 .w., Cl
- +- s I
cp, P,, 9 rp,M.,
The design flexural strength rp,.M , for a WI2X96 can be determined from the Beam Selection
Table on page 3-15 of the AISC LRFD Manual : because (L, =12ft) < (1.1,- 12.9 ft). rp,M,.. =
rp"M,. = 397 kip-fl. as tabulated . Substituting in the interaction formula :
s 118 kip-ft
0.55 +-X < 1.0
9 31.}7 kip-ft
0.55 + 0.26 = 0.81 < 1 .0 O.k .
By a simihtr &o luti on of interaction formula (H l-Ja). it can be sh own that a WI 2X87 a nd a Wl 2x79
are
abo adequate.
8.5. Assume th e beam-co lumn in Prob. 8.4 is turned 90°: t.C .• M, = 0. M1,.. = 100 kip-ft. M,,.. =
0.
Select the appropriate W 12 section.
Gtven : P,, = 400 ktp . M.., = 0. M,,, = 0. M,, = 100 kip-ft. E P,, = 4li00 ktP'· 6,.,,/ L = 0.0025.
H=
80 kip,, 1\L = 1.2 X 12ft =
14.Ht.
rrom Eq ( H 1-2). .\1"' = B M <, . where 8,= !.Ill '" m Prob &A 1he \Ccond-ordcr required
flexural treng,th .\1,., =I l&x IOOktp-ft= llhkip-ft . Selecung a trtal Wl 2 hapc \\lth Eq . [8.2]. we
obtam
P.."'' = P+ ,\1,.,m + ,\t.,,mU

where for a Wl2 ( KL = 14.4 ft). 111 = 2.4, and U = 1.5.
Pu.ctt = 400 + 0 + 118 X 2.4 X I .5 = X25 ktp
CHAP. 8[ BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE A:--10 COMPRESSION 101
Bv mtcrpolation m the Column Load Tahlc• ((').2-23m the AISC LRFD Manual). ifF, 36 k-.i anti
KL = 14.4 ft. 1/1, P" = 920 ktp-. ( P,. "' = 825 kips) fllf < WJ:!x 120
Sclecung the appropnatc hcam-column mtcr;te.:uon formula. we <lhtain
P,, 4(X) kip-.
0.43 >0.2
1/1. P,, IJ::!O ktp'
U;c formula (/:/1-/a). which. lor M,,, = 0, reduce.. to
P,, + M ,., 1.0

1/1 P,, I) 1/1,, \f
To detcrmmc rp,..w... (thc t.Jc.,ignflexural -.trcnj!th). rder to Chap. 5 nt tht text. From f:q (5.6[.
•W.,, \lr = Z F (for mmur-<t \1\ hcndmg) rcgan.lk" ol the unbracetl h:ngth 1.,
ror a WI::! X 120. L, -t>5.4 m and
_ X5.-l in ' x 3(1 kip.,/ in _ , k .
.,
M,. - - -5<) Ip-1I
12 tn / 11
cp ..w.., =0.90 x 25fl ktp-ft = 231
ktp-tt Sub'>tttutton m the inter<Ktinn formula yield
0.4J +X x IIX ktp-ft

9 231 ktp-ft
= 0.-13 + 0 -IS = O.RH < 1.0 o.k.
8.6. Select a Wl2 section (A36 steel) for a beam-column in a Sjmmctric unbraced frame wtth
the factored loads: P., = 150 ktps: first-order momcnh M1,. = 100 kip-ft. ,\41,. = 100 kip-
ft. \!,,. = Mnn - 0. The story hctght i-. 12ft: K , = 1\, = 1.2. For all column' m the
stOr). P..=
3000 ktps . Pr = 611.000 kip for bending about easl-\\eSt axe!
>. and P,::: 30.()(Xl ktps for
bending about north-south axes: see Fig. !-l--1.
t,_' ..
r
l
N
..ig. 84
Since M.,,. = ,\4,.., = 0, Eq . (/://-2)

become
M,., = 13,,At,.,
:\f,., /J ,, M,,.
"'here [ac :ordmg to Eq . (H /-6)[

I
B,=l ''PI' 'P
- "' ._. r
8 ' = ---:--:-::--
-· I w' f > P,.,.
I'....
102 BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION [CHAP. 8
From the statement of the problem, E 1. = 3000 kips. E P,, - 60.000 kips. and l: P, =- 30.0!Xl kip .
SubMituting. we obtain
I
8= = 1 .05
I -J(KlO klp'>/60.000 kips
I
B., = = \.II
- l -3000 kip/30.000 kips
The second-order required flexural strengths arc
,\fu, = 1.05 X I()() kip-ft = 105 kip-ft
J1.., = I.II X 100 kip-ft = lJ Ikip-
ft Sdecung a trial \.\I:! '>hape \\llh Eq. (8.2J. we obtam
P....rr = P,, + .\1.,,111 + ttl/.,,mU.

where for a Wl2 (KL = 1.::! x 12ft= 14.4 ft), 111 = 2.4 and U = 1.5.
P.. ,"= 150+ 105X2.4+ Ill X2.-1-X U=RO::!kips
B:v
mterpolation in the Column Load Table'> (on p. ::!-2-1- in the AISC LRFD Manual). if F.. = 36 ks1
and KL=I4.4ft. it follow' that cp,P"=hll kip ( ..> P.,." = 802k•ps) fora Wl2X 106.
Tr} a W 12 x 106. Select the appropriate beam-column interaction formula.
P,, 150 kips

---''- = -;- = 0.18 < 0.2
tp, P., 811 kip:,
U\c mtcraction formula (H l
-Ib):
The design flexural \trcngtho., for a Wl2 x 106 can be determined a follow . Becau c ( L o 12ft) <
(L,, = 13.0 ft), q>,M., = rp,,M,, = 443 kip-ft. a tabulated in the Load Factor Design Selection Table for
Beam' (on p. 3-15 of the A I SC LRFD Manu<tl).
For all value of L,, rp,,M., = rp,MP = cp,Z, 1-;: Z, = 75.1 in' for a W 12x 106.
_ 0.90 x 75.1 m ' x 36 kips/ in _ .
1/J,M ., - /f - 20•3 k1p-ft
1.: In t
Sub,tlluting in interacuM formula (H1-lb), we obtain
0. 18 ( 105 kip-ft Ill kip- ()

- + + < I.
ft)
2 443 kip-ft 203 kip-ft
0.09 + 0.24 + 0.55 = 0.87 < 1.0o.k .
By <I \lmilar solution of mteracuon formula CH 1-lh). 11 can be sho,,n that a Wl2 x 96 1S also adequate .
8.7. Select a Wl4 section (J\36 steel) for a beam-column in an unbraced frame with the factored load!
>: P,, = 300 kips. M,,. = M,11, =50 kip-ft. M1,. = 120 kip-ft, M111 = RO kip-ft (reverse curva
ture bending with equal end moments in the same direction in all cases: no tran vcrsc loads
along the span). The story height is 14ft: K, = K, = 1.2. The allowable story drift index is <li!.
or 0.0020, due to total horizontal (unfactored) wind forces of 100 kips in the north-south
direction and 70 kips in the cast-west direction (!>ce Fig. R-4 ). The total factored gravity load
above this level P,, = 6000 kips.
G1vcn: K, = K, = 1.2. L, = L, = 1-1-ft.
K,L. =K,L, = 1.2x 14ft= t6.8ft
CHAP. 8) BEA t-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLF.XURE A D COMPRESSION 103
The second-order rcquarcu ncxural \trcngth [from l ·.q. (/// 211 are
M.., = B,,M..,. + fi :.. M1,.
A1,,. = /J " M,, l- IJ '• M,,.
where
B = ( IIH
• 1.0
. 1-P..IP..
C,
8 =- e 1.0
I- I' I',..
Before the sckction ot a trial 'oecllon. P, , and I' , (and hence. B .. and 8,.) ;trc unknm,n. Let
B,,=8 ,. =10.
I
8 = =1.1-t
- I-(tl(KXl kap, fiCKl kip\}(0 CKl:!O)
I -Ll
H.=
-• I-(6<Kl0 kap,/70 kap,)(tl.Cl020)
.H,., - I II X 50 kap-fl + 1.1-1 x 1::!0 kap-lt = 1117 kip-!'!

M,., = l .ll X 50 kip-It+ 1.2 1 X XIJ kip-ft = 147 kip-ft
Selecting a mal W 14 'hapc with Eq. [8.21 yield'
P,.o.;l1 = r,. + A1,._,, + Jw,H ,,u
\\here for a WI-I ( 1\ L = 16.X It). m = 2.0. and U =I 5
p II= 300 + IR7 X 2.0 + 1-17 X ::!.0 X 1.5 = 1115 kip-.
By anterpolation in the< olumn Load Table (on p 2-19 of the AISC LRFD M anual). at 1-, "36 kM
and
KL = 16.8 fl. q> P. = II +I kap' ( >P,< , = 1115 kt p') for il V. I-IX 1-15
Tr) a WI-IX 145 firM. determtnc B,, and 8,, For re\er\c curvature bendtng \\llh equ; l end
moment . ,\.1,/ M, +10. From Eq. (H/--4). C.. 0.6-ll.-I(M,/M )=0.6-0.-1(+1.0) 0.2. C.... =
em, = 0.2. In the equallon tor 8, (HJ -3). r.. i ha...ed 011 Kl in the plane of benc.hng With K 1.0.
(By
contra !. P. in Eq. (///-(!} for B . i based on the actua l Kl ol each column in it\ plane of
hending).
Referring toP, in Eq. (111-3). for a WI4X 1-15
I,= 1 7111 in'

f' = .T'f l, .T' x 29,000 ka p,fin' x 1710 in' .
(I.Ox 1-Ift x = 17.3-11 k 'P'
" <Kit
. I •
12t n ft) '
I = 6T' tn'
.T '£/, _ :r 0 x :!'),CKKl ktp'o/111 X o77 in'
P = -- .-= 6865 kip
' (K,I.)' (J.OxJHtxl::!tn/ft)·
0.2
8,. = 1.0
I-300 kip /17.3-11
kap'
= 1.0
0.2
B .. = ?: 1 .0
I - JO() ktp/6H65 ktp'
= 1.0
104 BEA M -COLUMN S: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPR ESSION (CHAP. 8
Smce 8,. = 8, = I 0 a orig1nall) estimated. the re uhing second-order requ1red flexural strengths
are
correct: 1 e . M,.. = 187 klp-fl and M.,, = 147 kip-ft . Also. the \elecllon of a Wl4x 145 as the trial
section
., "ahd
Sclccllng the appropnate beam-column Interaction formula. (H1-/a) or (H1-/b). we obtain
P. = 300 ki S = 0.26 > () 2

l/1. P. 1144 k1p\
U\e formula (If 1-/a).
--'P.'-. + 8 ( , '\.f.,, + M.., ) s I.0

lf'cP.• 9 cp,)•f,,. l/1.M,,. ·
To determine the design nexural strengths <J>.M,,. and cp.M... for a WI4 X 145 (L1,= 14 fl )
C" = 1.75+LOS + 0.3 (''\.1' 2.3

( M') )!
M, M,
according tn l ·q. I'1./0j. For reverse curvature bending with eq ual end moments , M ,/ M 1 = + 1.0.
C o= 1.75+ 1.05(+1.0)+0.3(+1.0) :< 2.3
=
2.3
L =300=''= 300X3.98in = 16_ 6 ft

r y F. y36 X 12 in/ft
for a Wl4x 145. accordmg to Eq. (FI--n 1n Chap. 5.

Smcc (1•• =14ft)< IL,, = 16.6 ft) < L..,.
rp,M., = rp,,M, = q,,Z,I-;

_ 0.90 x 133in'x 36 kips/in kip-ft
1 359
=
12 m / ft
Suh\tltuting in interact ion formula ( H l -h1):
0.26 + 8 (187 kip -ft + 147 kip-ft) < 1.0

9 702 kip-ft 359 kip-ft
8
0.26 + (0.27 + 0.41) = 0.86 < l.O o.k.
9
Supplementary Problem s
8.8. Repeat Pmh 8.1 with a W 14x 145

An\ It ., ati factory
8.9. For Prob . 1\.2. find the mo\t economical Wl2.

Alii Wl2><210
CHAP. 8] BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESS ION 105
8. 10. R !peal Prob l\ J w11h

(a) A WI4X 145
(b) A Wl4x 13::!
An\. (a) SamfaciOf) (b) Un ati faclory.
8.11. For Proh H 4. tlnd tht: mo 1 cconom•cal WJ4 .

A11.1 . Wl4XH::!.
8.12. For Prob . H.5. find the moM cconom1cal Wl4 .

Ails. WI4XY9.
8.13. ror Pro b. K.6 , find the m1N economical W 14.

/111.1. WI4X90 .
8.14. Repeal Prob. K.7 with

(a) A w
14X 1.3::!.
(b) A Wl4X 1::!0
. -
Am . (a) Satl\lactorv . (b) Un a1i tac10n .
Chapter 9
Torsion
NOTATI ON
A = cross- ectional area of member. in
A .. =area of the web. in "
I!= eccentricity with respect to the shear cen ter. in
F; , =critical. or buckling, stress. ksi
f; =specified minimum yield stress. ksi
f,, 1 = normal tress due to (wa rping ) torsion. ksi
f,.., = total norma l stress under factored loads, ksi
j;,. = total shear stress under factored l oads. k i
f,." =shear tress due to St. Venant torsion. ksi
[,.1,1 =shear <>tress due to warping torsion. ksi
G =-.hear modulus of elasticity of steel= I I .200 k t
J = tor ional con tant. in•
I= distance from the support. in
M,., = required tlexural <;trength for .r-axi bending. ktp-in
M,,. =req uired Acxural strength for y-axis bendtng. kip-in
P,, = required axial strength. tension or compression. kip
S, = ela tic section modulus for x-axis bending. in '
S, =clastic section modulus for y-axis bending. m '
T =concentrated torstOnal moment. kip-in
1= di tributed tor ional moment. kip-in/ linear in
V,, - required shear strength. kips
fJ = angl e of rotation. radians
4> = appropriate resistance factor
I NTR ODUCTION
This chapter covers torsion. acti:1g alone or in combin ation with tension. compression. and /or
bending. 1or ion. or twisting of cross sections. will result from the bending of unsymmetric
members . I n symmetric members (such as 1-shaped beam'>). torsion will occur when th e line of
action of a lateral load does not pass through the shear cemer. The emph asis in thi!> chapter is on
torsion of <;ymmetric shapes. those most commonly used in construction.
SHEA R CENTER
The shear center of a cross section. whtch i' also the center of rot ation. can be located by
equilibrium of the internal torsional shear <;tresses with the external tor 10nal forces. Such a
calculatton ts unnecessar) in most cases because the foiiO\\ing rule-; (illustrated in Fi g. 9-1) are
applicable.
For Wand other doubl) ymmetric shapes. the shear center t'> located at the centroid.
106
CHAP. 91 TORSION 107
Smgly 'l}mme tnc cross secuons, such as C shape:-. have thctr -.hear center-. on the axi of
S)mmetr). but not at the centroid. (The shear center locattom. fur C -.ccuon'> arc gwen in the
Properue-. Tables in Pan I of the A ISC LRFD Manual.)
•
•
Fig. 9-1 Shear cent er locaunn'
As shown in Fig. Y-2, the torsion al moment , Tor 1. eq ual s th e m agnitude of the force
multiplied
by its distance from the sh ear cent er e.
A VOIDI NG OR MINIMIZI NG TORSION *

As i s demonstrated lat er in this chapter, open sections. uch a!. W and C shapes, arc very
in efficient in rcsi ting torsion; thus, torsional rotati on can be large and torsion a l stre!. es relatively
high . It i!> best to avoid torsion by detailin g the l oads and reactions t o act through the shear cen ter of
th e 1 tember. In the ea e ol spa ndrel members supporting bu ilding facade cll.!ments. this may not be
possibl e. J I eavy exterior masonrv walls and stone panels can unposc !'Ievere t or,iona l !oads on
spa ndrel bl.!am!.. The following are suggestion!> for diminatmg or reducing tht-. 1-.ind of torston.
I. Wall element" may '>pan between floors. The moment due to the eccentricity of the wall with
respect to the edge beams can be resisted b> lateral Ioree-. acting through the floor
diaphragms. No torsion would be imposed on the spandrel beams
2. If facade panels ext end only a partial stor hetght bclo" the floor ltnc. the usc of diagonal
teel "kickers" rna} be possible. These light member'> ''ould prondc lateral -.upport to the
wall panel'>. TorsiOn from the panels would be re t ted by force' ortgtnatmg from 'itrurtural
clement'> other than the pandrel beams .
• Thl) 'C(IJOn " rcpnmctl \\-Jth p.:rml\>tlln rrum Ihe aulhu(, carhcr wnrl. (iwdt• to / .oud '""' Rc\1\lti//CI' ft1CI<If • Jt'\l!''l
uj Stmourul Stl'rl Bwldm > . Amencan lnsmute ol Steel Conlrucuon (AI ( 1. ( htCa!!o. 1%11.
108 TORSION [CHAP. 9
3. Even if torsion must be resisted hy the edge mcmhers, providing intermedia t e torsional
supports can be helpful. Reducing the span over which the torsion acts will reduce torsional
tre<;ses. If there arc 'econdary beams framing into a spandrel girder, the beams can act as
tntcrmediate tors•onal ::.upports for the g•rder . By adding top and bottom moment plate<; to
the connections of the beams with the gmler. the bending re'>l'>tances of the beams can be
mobilized to provide the required torsional reactions along the girder.
4. Closed sections provide considerably better resistance to torsion than do open sections;
tor'iional rotations and stresses arc much lower for box beams than for wide-flange
members. Fur mcmhcr<, .,ubjccted to tor ion . it may he advisable to usc box <;ection<. or to
'imulate a box shape by welding one or two '>ide plates to a W .,hape.
DESIGN CRITERIA
When torsion is present. the proviSIOns in Sec. 112 of the AISC LRFD Specification must be
applied. The expressions given thcrt:in [Formulas (H2-/) to (112-3)] limit the total normal and shear
stresses occurring at any point. These stresses may result from torsion alone or from torsion
combinetl with other effects.
AISC formulas (H1-I) to (H1-3) may be rewritten as follows.
(1) f-or the limit state of y•elding under normal <.tress (i.e .. axtal ten<,ion or compression)
(9. I]
where cp = 0.90
and _ 1, 1\1,,. M,". f,
J.m - 1\ ± S, ± S, ± [9. 2]
n1
(2) For the limit state of yielding under shear \tress,

f,... < 0.6cpF. [9.J]
where cp = 0.90 and
[9.4]
(J) For the limit stale of huckling

[S1.5J
or
J,,.. < cp.F , I9. 6]
a<. applicable; where cp, = 0.85. F,, is obtained from the appropriate buckling formula [e.g..
Eq . (£2-2) or (E2-3) in Chap. 4J and /,111 and/,,.. are the compres ive normal and shear
l>trcsses resulting from Eqs. [9. .?] and [Y..J]. respectively.
The terms in Expressions. W lJ to [9. 6] arc defined as follows.
f,,. =total axial (or normal) stress under factored loads. ksi
J,, =total <,hear <.,trcs under factoretl loads. ksi
J,,r = normal <.,trc s due to torsion. k-.1
f,. r =shear stre!>c:, due to St. Venant torsion. ksi
f..wr =shear strcs due to warping torston. hi
.=required axial load strength. tension or compression. kips
M,.,, M,,, = required llexural strength<; for x- and y-axis bending. kip-in
V,, =required shear strength. kip
A = cross-secuona I area. •n-
A =web area. 111
1
S,. S, =elastic section moduli for r- andy-axis bending. 111
The ter'ms St. Venallt torsion and warping torsion are explained
below.
CHAP. 9) TORSION 109
ST. VENANT TORSION
When a torsional moment is applied to a circular bar or tube. each cross section rotates in its
own plane without warpmg. Resistance to torston is provided by shear stre!>ses in the cross-sectional
plane. This kind of "pure" torsion i called St. Venant torsion. Noncircular cross sections, when
subjected to the same tor ional moment. tend to warp: that i . plane sections do not remain planar.
Theoretically, if warping were totall} unrestrained. all cross sections would experience St. Venant
torsion only. However, end condtttons and geometry re tram warpmg. I n addition t o the hear
stresses of St. Venant torsion. noncarcular cross sections are also subjected to the normal and shear
stresses of warping torsion.
In Table 9-1. f,.5 r. the shear stres\ due to St. Venant tor ion, is given for various cross-sectional
shapes.
Table 9-1 St . Venant Torsion
Shear Str.:\ TorsiOnal Comtant

f,o\r(k\1) J (in')
Closed .!e<'IUJII\
Tr
R r J
. -,
\.-_./
Round bar
R
rj{ Tr ; " f
- ; -CR .. - R, )
-"
,\R , J
---
Round tube
fr
--l
h f--t T 2t,t !b'lr .
.
• r.
2blll l bt! +ht,
1
L..
!r , t
2hht
I• •I
Rectangular tuhc
J T
.1. tb'
11
..1
I ..
Square tuhc
1I ll ' ·tj I < Tt ht '

3 (approx .)
b J
I• h
Rectangular har
'}';.ht ' (approx ; for exact value .

Tt,
J
J see AISC LRFD Manual,
pp. 1-133 1 - 161)
WARP I NG TORSI ON
Warping torsion ·most significant for open seerions. specifically. shapes rolled or fabricated as a
enes of plane'>. Thi' is in contrast to closed secrion . where St. Venant t orsion predominates . The
subJect of torston for such commonly used open sections a<; W and C shapes i covered in detail in
the A ISC puhhcauon Torsional Analysis of Sreel M embers ( 191'!3). Fin al design of beam s subjected to
tor;ion should he venfied with the tables and ch arts cont ained th erein . However. the simplified
procedure presented here may be used for preliminary design.
A'> <>hown in Fig. 9-1, the effects of warping torsion on I beams ca n be approximated by
converting the tor'iiOnal moment T into an equiva l ent force coupl e act ing on th e flanges. The normal
and shear stres es due to warping torsion are assumed equal to the corresponding stresses resulting
from the bending of each flange acting as a separa te beam and subjected to the l atera l force T/ d '.
h.
P' = 1'fd' I
...
Beam nange M ' = P 'l.. = TUd'

I
P - Td '
Fig. 9-3 Warping 10rsion: approximauon for W hapes
DEFORMATION
The angle of rotatton. in rarli-: ns. for all t pes of cross sect.ons ''
fJ = Tl
(9. 7]
GJ
where r- applted torsional moment.
kip-in
I= distunce from the support. in
G =hear modulus of elastici tY of steel = 11.200 ksi
•
J = torsional consta nt . m•
( Values of J for com mon structural shapes are give n in a specia l section. Torsion Properties, in
Part I of the AISC LRFD Manual. For cross sections not tabulat ed , the formu las for 1 in Table 9-1
may be used.)
Solved Problems
For Probs. 9.1 l<l 9.4. refer to Fig. 9-4. A twisting moment of 10 kip-ft b applied to the end of a 5-ft
haf t 111 Fig 9-4(a ). Determine
The maxtmum !>hear strcs!>

The max1mum normal stres:.
The max1mum angle of rotation
CHAP. 9] TORSI ON III
--+-,6
10 kip-
fi
5 h 0 in
1 ..
Soho ro
10 wamelcr Inner d1ame1er 8 in
Ill) lhl (C)
' r
10 10 10 10
f.. 1010 ...1 J .. 10m ..1
ldI
.-\II pla1e' I an 1h1cl.
Fig. 9-4
9.1. For the cross sect1on in Fig . 9-4(b ).

The only active Ioree in Fig. IJ--I(a) I> the tor,u)nal momem. lhere arc no aJ(Ial fnrce or bcmlmg
monH:nh. Becau c the round ba r 111 Fig. 9-4(1>) does noI wa • p. thi> i '·' caM:: of "pun:" St.
Ycnant torsion, Normal Mre ,e are zcro throughout.
Torsional shear \lressc> can he determ111ed from Table IJ-1 For a round bar
Tr .TR
J
J ,,= -
\\here J
,
The max1mum hear 'trc> e> arc a t the ou ter edge. whcrc 1 = R = lO m /2 = 5 in. -
1
= ><
= .TR
, T , in)= IJlL,111,
(5
J
The n1ax1mum ;hear 'Ire
. TR ()()kip fl X I:! in / ft) X 'i in
J''r = J = ......,. =O.hlk'>l
'
""- Hi
According to E4. W 7], the max1mum angle ot wtat1on occur' at the free end (where I 5 fl). In radian
1'1
tl = GJ
(I 0 l.ip> /111 X I.:! m/ft I X (5 II X 1.:! m/111

- 1 1.::!00 k1ps/in 2 X l)l{!
111
= 0.00065 rath.m
To con\ert angle' from rad1an' Ill deg.rceo,. recall that a lull circle 160 = 2.T rad•an,, or 180' =
n rad1ans:
180"
H= x 0.00065 radwn = O.o:IH
:rr rad1an>
9.2. For the cross sect ion in Fig. 1:1-4(c).

The tor 1onal bchav1m of a hollow circular ;haft ",imilar to tha t of a round bar: St. Yenant torsion
w11h
no warpmg: no normal <otre>se\.
From Table 9-1. the tor-tonal shear •me,-.e,
where
•
1= [(5 m)'- (4 in)') = 580 in'

-
The maximum hear stre 'c' arc at the out.:r cdg.:, where r = R.. = 5 in.
. Tf(, ( 10 kip-ft X 12 in/ft) X 5 in

1··\1 = J-= s_ ono I·ll '
= I IJ..l ksi
The angle ot rotation. in rathan
T/ ( 10 kip-ft X 12 in / ft)(5 ft X 12 in/ft)

II= GJ = 11.:!00 kip/in ' x SHO in'
= 0.0011 radian
!n degree
180'
fl = . x 0.(l011 radian\= 0.064°
,T rad1an'
9.3. For the cross section in rig. 9-4(d).

When a \quare tube i twi\tcd. warping i' m111or: the normal and hear stre sc<. due to warping are
'mall
and are generally neglected
Referring to Table 9- 1 for a 'quare tube the St Venant ll!Nonal shear 'tre es are
. T
·f ''"= 2b r
where b i' the di tance between the centerline\ of the oppo\lle \Ides. b = 10 1n - I in = 9 in ; r = I in .
j ' "_ 10 k1p-ft x !2 m/ ft _0. .·

- - - 74hl
2X(9m) "x I in
According to Eq . [9. 71. the maximum angle of rotation is at the free end .
H= Tl
GJ
From Table 9-1
J = rh' - I in x (9 in)' - 7'29 in
In rad1ans
' (10 k1p-lt x 12m/ft)(5 ft x 1:! m
/ft)
8
[n degrees = 11.200 !..ips/in ' x 729 m '
= O.Otl088 rud1an
180 .
(I= x O.!Xl088 rad1an 0.051o
;r rad1an'
CHAP. 91 TORSION 113
9.4. For the cross section in Fig. 9-4(e).

In open secuons. such as the I shape in Fig. 9-4(e). the torstonal stre se arc
Shear tres e due to St. Venant torsion
Shear strc ses due to warping torsion
Normal stresses due to warptng torsion
The St Venant shear stresses can be determined from Table 9-I
Tt,
f,.,r=;
where 1, tS the thtckncss of the clement under consideration and

I.bt'
1=-3-
In this case. 1, = I in for the web and both flanges .

J = \[2 X lOin X (I in)'+ 8 in X (I in) 'l = 9.33 in '
The St. Venant shear stresses
_ ( lO kip-ft X 12 tn/ft) X ] in _ ., k
f,.<r-
.
Ill 4 - 1-.9 Sl
9.33
To determmc the Mres es due to warping torsion. the approxm1atton 111 Ftg. 9-3 can be u ed.
M - 1J J lops X 5.0 ft
= 66 7 I.Jp-ft
13.3kips
!
b, = 10 in
Beam flange
9tn
v- 13.3 kips
10 ktp·fl - 120 lp-tn = 13 ;\ ktpS X 9 m 5.0 ft
Fig . 9-
5
As shown in Fig. 9-5, the torsional moment of 10 kip-ft can be resolved into a force couple of 13.3 k ips
(equa l and opposite forces) on each flange. Each flange is a sumed to act as an independent
(I in x 10 in) rectangular beam resist ing its 13.3-kip load. The shear V = 13.3 k i ps and
maximum
moment (at the support) M = 13.3 kips x 5.0 ft = 66.7
kip-ft.
For a rectangular member. the maximum shear stress
1.5 v 1.5 x 13.3 kips .
f, b = . . = 2.0 kM
.wr= fr 1
1 Ill X Ill
The maximum normal stress
M
/.r =s
S = c,b7 (the sectton modulus of the flangr)
6
linx(IOinf ,
= = 16.7 in
6
_ 66.7 kip-f t X 12 tn / ft _ () .
/.r . , -48. kst
I 6.7111
Combimng stresses, we obtain the values shown m Fig. 9-6.
114 TORSION (CHAP. 9
1--1\ I -9 2.0 I.Jplm' --::::..- 48 0 ktps an'

liin'
I
' f. f,r
In
Shear stre>>e> Shear \tresses 'liormal \lreS\C\
St. Venant warping torstnn "arpmgIOf\ton
tor"on (flanges !Oange\ onI> l (flanges onl>)
and web)
Fig. 9-6
As is hown in Fig. 9-6, the maximum shear stre " m the llangev j,.. -f,.,r + f,... 7 = ( 12.9 + 2.0) ksi
=
14.9 ksi. The maxtmum normal stress is also in the flang : :j,.,. =f.,, = 4!Ul ht.
The maximum angl e of rotation. from Eq. W 7] . is
n
8=
G.l
where J is as determined above: J = 9.33 in'.
In radians
( lO kip-ft x 12 in/ft)(''ft x 12 in/h)
8
= 11.200 kip/ in! x 9 33 111•
= 0.069 radtan
In degrees
180"
x 0.1169 radian'= 3 9•
8=
radtan' .T
A comparhon of the 'elutions to Probs. 9.1 to 9.4 indtcate' that apr•n H'CIIons are poor 111 torsional
resistance . The stresses and rotations of the I haJJ<! are at le<"t .10 order''' magnnudc greater than
those of the closed uc1ions under the arne torsional loading.
For the beams in Probs. 9.5 to 9.R. plot the variationalong the 'pan of
Flexural shear V
Bcndmg moment M
Torsiona l moment T
9.5. The cantilever beam in Fig. 9-7(a ).
11
c±J
- * * * !* * ** *!t
1\'
r
p
I
5}- I
..I
(CI) !h)
r p
I
);I !!!!
II
•
!
!:! ! •4 d"
• I! ... I•
t'
lt 2 I2
... I ....
/c) rtf l
Fig. 9-7
CHAP . 9] TORSION 115
The procedure for draWing the shear V. moment M, and torsion T d1agrams • e sentially the same:
(a) Determme the support reactions by statics.
(b) Plot the appropnate left-handed reaction on the diagram .
(c) Obtain additional poinrs on the diagram by cutting section along the beam and solving for the
required forces by statics.
(d) Ascertain closure at the right side of the diagram.
See Fig. 9-8.
v _, [ ._
Pe
T I. _ ,_
Fig. 9-8
9.6. The cantilever beam in Fig. 9-7(b ).

See Fig. 9-9.
1<'1
wl' /2
Fig. 9-9
9.7. The imply supported beam in Fig . 9-7(c).

See Fig. 9-10
I'
---------r---------.
L _,p2
P/ 4
r._ -+----------,
'-------' Pr '2
/ 12
Fig.9·10
9.8. The c;imply supported beam in Fig . 9-7(d).

Sec Fig. 9-11.
I'
II'/ , 8
we/ 12
I2 I 2
Fig. 9-11
9.9. In A36 steel. select a W shape with side plates to support the wall panel shO\.\n in Fig. 9-12.
The beam is simply supported and has a span of 20ft. The wall panel weighs 150
lb/ft·'.
CHAP. 9) TORSION 117
6 in 6 in
WI0 X 22 -._ ..'.... ..:,
..< •,I .,.. '
' in
0.36
Y I
( .. "·,··:,:
' ·,-': l
d_ .. , " J-- t i :
l r1'' .... .,-......,
•,
.. .,.,...'..... ..... .
.
.....
.
0 J_< t'n • • :,.•_

.J .. ..• ..-- <:
0
"'
I• 9 in ..
1
Fig. 9-U
The vertical load on the beam consists of the weights of the wall panel and the beam:
lb 6 in
w {wall panel) = 150\ >< . If X 12ft
= 900 lb/ft ft· 12m t
w (beam assumed) = 100 lb/ft
w (total) = !000 lb/ft

w = 1000 lb/ft = 1.0 kips/ft
As a result of an eccentricity of 9 in for the wall panel, the torsional moment
lb 9 in lb-ft
= I we
= 900- X = 675 -
ft 12 in/ft fl
= 0.675 kip-ft/ft
For the case of dead load only [i.e.. Formula (A4-/) in Chap. 2). the factored loads are
w,. = L4w = 1.4 x 1.0 kips/ft = 1.4 kips/ ft

1., = 1.41 = 1.4 X 0.675 kip-ft /ft = 0 945 kip-ft / ft
A W shape with side plates is a box section with negligible warping torsion . The problem of designing
this beam for flexure combined with tor ion can be divided into the following components. Flexure is
resisted by the W shape: the flexural normal stresses by the flanges: and the flexural shear . by the web .
The torsion (which in this case involves mainly St. Yenant shear stresses) is resisted by a ..box "
consisting of the flanges and side plates.
The shear. moment, and torsion diagrams for this case !corresponding to Fig. 9-7(d)] appear in Fig.
9- ll. The location of the maximum moment (and, hence. the maximum flexural normal tresses) is at
midspan. Flexural and torsional shear are maximum at the end supports.
Design for flexure.
wf l.4 kips/ ft X (20 ft)z . f
M = -= = 70 ktp- t
"8 8
Because a box shape will not experience lateral torsional buckling. rp,M,. = </IbM". From p. 3-16 of the
AlSC LRFD Manua l . for a W10X22. rp,MP = 70.2 kip-ft > 70 kip-ft required. Try a WIOx22.
Check tle\Ur:ll \hear. r rom the shear dJagram in Fig. Y-11. the maximum tlexural \hear 1\
V= .,- = .,
- = 14 kips.
w,.l 1 A 1-ips/ft X 20ft
From p. 3-33 tlf th.: AISC LRFD Manual. for a WIOX22 . !/>,. V. = -17.-1 kips > 14 kips requ1red.
The WJOX2:! "okav
Regardmg toNonal 'heM. tr !-in side plate'> The ma,imum torsional moment (as ...hown 10 Fie.
.
9-11) ...
I<' e/ i-1p-tt
I./ 20 tt
7;, = - -=-:;- = 0.945 - X ....,= 945 kip-ft
- - It -
The tors1onal \hear \tres'c' for a rect<mgular tube (from Table 9-1) are
. T
j •·\! = :;--,,
- ) II
f-or the 'ide plate' (\\here 1= 0.::!5 in)
9.-15 '-•p-It x 12 m /
ft
[,.,= . ., , - ·.,-;-.-=4.2ksi
_x:>.:> 0 mx-.Xlmxo._ _ m
For the tlange' (where 1 = 0.30)

_
[., ,r ., 9.45 k1p-ft x 12 in/ft _., .·
- 9
-X 5.50 X Y.!ll X IJ.:l() - ks1
111
-.
In both ca es, the tor\Ulll"l 'hear stres;e, arc within the limits 'et hy Fonnula f9.J]:
/.•. < 0.61/JF, = 0.6 X 0.90 X 16 "" = 19.4 ks1
U c a WJOx22 beam \qth ,-m \Ide plates.
9.10. . For the beam tn Proh 9. select a Whapc \\ tthout s1de plates.
The maJor difference... between a box section and a W ...hapc acting as beams arc in the n;,btance to
tors1on. Unlik.: the box hcam in Prob. 9.9. a W 'cctton w1ll experience sign ificant warping ton-•on. As a
result
(I) Normal \tre\\e o due to warping torsion are 'upenmpmcd on the f1exural normal \trc>...cs. (Both
tyJX of normal \trc.,.,c, are maximum in the tlangc., at mu.hpan of the member )
(2) Shear ...tre-....e... due to ' arpmg torsion are \upcnmpo,ed on the shear strc<>sc' from St. Venant
torsion (Both are ma\tmum at the upporl\: the fnrmer occur only in the f1angcs. ''h1le the latter
occur m the web a' "ell.)
(3) Also. the web 'hear \tre\St:\ from St. Venant tnr\lon :u.ld to the flexural shear strCS\t:\ (Both are
max1mum at the \Upport>: the later are primarily m the web.)
Warping Torsion
Figure 9-U, which corrc ponds to Fig. 9-3, approximate\ th : effects of warping torsion on the W l4x99
beam. The umfmm ly d1 tributed factored torqut: 1., - 0.945 k1p-ft/ft (obtained in the solution t o
Prob. 9.9) is resolved 11110 equal-and-opposite uniform load<, on the llanges. Each ftangc i' a umcd to
be a laterally loaded beam \panmng between the end surport o.
CHAP. 9] TORSION 119
c
-
i
r-:
0
d ' - ttl
b, 14.565m
II 20 fi
.I
I
c
- =::::;-;::::::J•...,.._ ·'
=
d''
..:>
.,
I
f
'
.
- ....-
kip 20ft
. . ....
1 1
- 0.945 kip = 0 84 1-.Jp w•'L/2 "'
fl X
2
0 . 84
fi
c.
: = ::::::: -... l... . . '
1.12ft
"" = ( i ·o"."
= 0 .
lt ip'•t
= 8.4 kip
WI-I X 99
lp fi
'·.. 0.945 h ...;u !tips 20 fi
8 - 0.84 T X -8-
= 42 kip-ft
M.. 'L
Fig . 9-L3
From Fig. Y-13, the eqmvalt::nt uniform lateral flange load 0.84 ktp/ft and the resu lting maximum
hear and moment are V = 8.4 kips and M = 42 kip-ft. re pectively .
The max1mum warping normal stress is
. M
/.r = S'
where s·= ,, (section modulu of flange)

'
b1
6
= 0.78in x (14.565m)·
6 = ._7 ., .6m
,
_ 42 kip-ft x 12 m/ ft_ ., k
f,,,-
tn. , - IlL•
27.6
The max1mum warping shear stress 1s
1.s v
[.,w 1 = b ,,, (for shear on a rectangular
1.5X8.4 kip .
hapc)
0 8 . = I.Ihi
- 65 X .7 tn
14.5
.
St. Vcnant Torsion
A given in Table 9-1 for open ections, the shear stresses due to St. Venant torsion aref,,,r= Tt./1.
For a Wl4X99, J = 5.37 inJ. as tabulated under Torsiona l Properue!> 111 Part I of the ALSC LRFD
Manual. For a Wl4x9Y. t1 =0.78tn and t,. =OA8S1n. Max1mum 1;, -Y.45k1p-ft. a> determined in
Prob. \1.9.
In the flange'
1).45 k1p-ft x 0.78 in x 12 in/
ft
[,o•.\T = 5.37 in' = 16 5 k l
In the ''eb Flexu

re
I n=
9.45 kip-ft x m/ ft ., k
0.485 in x 12 , =10.- \1
5.37 in
From Prob . 9.9, a a re ult of flexure: maximum M., = 70 k1p·ft and ma•omum V,, = 14 kips. The
corrc!>pondmg flexural normal and shear !>tresses are M..J S, and V..l A •.
From Part 1 of the AISC LRFD \ilanual. the requ1red properties of a W14X99 are
S, = 157 in'
A.= dt. = 14 16 Jn x 0.4S5 Jn- 6.1'7 in 1
Then
.\11,., 70 k1p-ft X 12 Jn/ft .
-= ' = :>.4 k ·
S, 157in
V,, 14 kips
-- . '= 2.0 k'l
A. ti.87 m·
Combining Slresses
( I) Normal tresses (maximum in the flange at mid pan) . From Eq. 1\).2]
M,. t\1m
f,"'=-±-s ±-s if.,,
A ' '
=o + 5.4 ksi + 0 + llU k i 23.7 k i
<pF,. = 0.90 x 36 k si = 32.4
k•
([..• = 23.7 ksi) < (f , = 32.4 k 1) o.k .
(2) Flange hear stresses (maximum at the supports). Becau l' flexural hear i negligible in the
flanges
of a W shape. Eq. [9.-1] reduces to
/,•. =f, \ T +J, I< 1
= 16.5 ksi + 1.1 k-.i = 17 6 k\J

0.61/>F, = 0.6 X 3:!.4 k!-1 = 19.4 k J
([.•. = 17.6 ksi) < (0.6<pF, = 19 4l"i) o.k
(3) Web shear stresses (maximum at the 'upports): Warp.ng. 'hear \tre, e' arc zero .n the web of a W
'ection . Equation (9.-1] becomes
V.,
[.... = -:- ± [...,
"·
= 2.0 ksi + 10 2 hi = 1:!.2
k'i
0. 61/>F, = 19.4 ks1 (a!> above)
(/,,. = 12.2 ksi) < (0.61/>F. = 19.4 k\i) o.k.
Regarding the hmit tate of buck ling. because a W 14xlJ\) i compact in A36 \tee I. local buckling need
not be considered. However . if the 20-ft member i' not laterally braced. lateral-torsional buck ling
should be checked using Formula l9.5]: J,,., < 1/>, F... where 1/>. = 0.85. To tlctcrtmnc F... usc th e ratios
r cp,.M,
-=
F, rj>,,M,.
For a !>i mply supported member (C, = 1.0). the beam graph' (in Part 3 of the A ISC LRFD Manual)
indict tc for a W14 X99
<p,M,. = 450 kip-ft (L,, = 20
tJ>,M,. = 467 kip-ft h) 15. ft)
(L1• • 1.,1
From thi' ratio. 11 follow that

F.. 450 k•p-ft
36 k!.i 467 kip-ft
F , = 34 7 b•
Formula [9.5] becomes f.,. <0.85 x 34.7 ksi = 29.5 ks1 Bccau'c /.• = 23. 7 k\J < 29.5 ks1. the
Wl4 x99 bet m i )ttisfactory
CHAP. 9] TORSION 121
1
9.11. Design a box beam (A36 steel. 20ft long) to carry the 150 lb/fr wall panel shown in Fig. 9-12.
Determine the magnitudes and locations of the maximum normal and shear stresses.
Ans. 10 in x 10in x in .
88k.
f'
J ,., =M..,
S= 1 'SI
•
v
};.,. = -" +fusr = 14.0 ksi
A •.
9.12. If f'y =SO ksi . select a W shape to carry the wall panel in Fig. 9-12.
Ans W14 X 90.
In Probs. 9.13 to 9.15, a uniform torque of 1.0 kip-ft/ ft is applied to the shaft shown in Fig. 9-14. Determine the
maximum shear and normal stresses.
1.0 kip-ft/ft
6 fl 0 in
Fig. 9-14
9.13. Round bar, 3-in diameter.

A ns. [..sr = J3.6 ksi , } = 0.
9.14. Standard pipe. 3-in diameter.

Ans. f,.5r = 20.9 ksi, [. = 0.
9.15. Square tube, 3 in X 3 in x 1in thick.

Ans. f,.sr = 19.0 ksi.[.= 0.
Chapter 10
Composite Members
NOTATI ON
2
A 8 = hearing area of concrete, in
A, =cross-sectional area of concrete, in
A,= cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcing bars, in 2
A,= cross-sectional area of structura l steel, in 2
A" =cross-sectional area of a shear stud, in 2
h = width of a rectangular steel tube. in
C11 = bending coeffici en t . defined in Eq. (5. /0]
c 1 = 1.0 for concrete-filled pipe and tubing: 0.7 for concrete-encased sections [Eq. (/2-1)]
c, = 0.85 for concrete-filled pipes and tubing ; 0.6 for concrete-encased sections (Eq. (/2-1)]
CJ = 0.4 for concrete-filled pipe and tubing; 0.2 for concrete-encased sections (Eq. (/2-2)]
D =ou ter diameter of pipe sections, in
£=modulus of elasticity of steel= 29,000 ksi
£, =modulus of elasticit} of concrete [Eq. [10. 1]). ksi
£, =modified modulus of elasticity for rhe design of composne compression members. ksi
r;' =cri tical compressive stress. ksi
F,,, = modified yield stress for the design of composite compression members, ksi
Fu =minimum specified tensile strength of a stud shear connector, ksi
F.. =specified minimum yield stress of the structural steel shape, ksi
f..., =specified minimum yield stress of the longitudinal reinforcing bars, ksi
r; =specified compressive strength of the concrete, ksi
H, =st ud length (Fig. 10-2), but not to exceed (h, + 3). in
hr =steel beam web dimension defined in Fig. 5-2, in
h, = nominal steel deck rib height (Fig. 10-2), in
K =effect i ve length factor for columns
L, - unbraccdlength of beam, ft
L, = length of channel shear connector. in
L, = limiting unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity (Cn > 1.0), ft
L1, = limiting unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity ( C,, = l.<l). ft
I= unbraced length of the member , in
M,= nominal flexural strength of member. kip-in or kip -h
N, = number of studs in one rib at a beam intersection, but not to exceed 3
11 =nu mber of shear connectors required between a section of maximum moment and the
nearest -,cction of zero moment
P, =elastic buckling load. defined in Eq . [10.9]. kips
P, = nominal axial strength of member. kip:>
P,, = the part of Pn resisted by the concrete. kips
122
CHAP. 101 COMPOSITE MEMBERS 123
P,, = required axial strength. kips

Q" =shear capacity of one connector, kips
E Q, =summation of Q, between the point of maximum moment and the nearest point of
zero moment, kips
t;, =modified radius of gyation for composite columns, in
L= thickness of steel, in
r1 =flange thickness, in
lw =web thickness, in
V,, = total horizontal shear transferred between sections of maximum and zero moments,
kips
3
w = unit weight of concrete. lb/ ft
w, =as defined in Fig. 10-2. in
A,. = column slenderness parameter
¢11 =resistance factor for bearing on concrete= 0.60
rf>hM, =design flexural strength. kip-in or kip-ft
¢11 = resistance factor for bending
¢0 P,, =design strength of compression member, kips
¢..P,.. =the portion of the design compressive strength of a composite column resisted by the
concrete, kips
cf>c =resistance factor for axial compression= 0.85
INTRODUCTION
Composite members consist of rolled or bui lt-up structural steel shapes and concrete.
Examples of composite members shown in Fig. 10-1 (p. 125) include (a) concrete-encased steel
columns ,
(b) concrete-filled steel columns. (c) concrete-encased steel beams. and (d) steel beams interactive
with and supporting concrete slabs. ln con trast with classical structural steel design. which considers
only the strength of the steel, composite design assumes that the steel and concrete work together in
resisting loads. The inclusion of the contribution of the concrete results in more economical designs.
as the required quantity of steel can be reduced.
The provisions for the design of composite columns. beams. and beam-columns discussed in this
chapter are from Chap. I of the AlSC LRFD Specification. Design aids are provided in Part 4 of the
AISC LRFD Manual.
COLUMNS ANO OTHER COMPR ESSION M

EMBERS
The design of composite compression members is similar to that of noncomposite columns . The
equations for composite design (Eqs. [IO.2] to [10.6], below) are the same as Eq. (£2-L) to (£2-4)
in Chap. 4 , with the following exceptions: in the design of the structural steel ection in a composite
member, a modified yield stress F,"Y and a modified modulus of elasticity Em are used to account for
the contributions of the concrete and the longitudinal reinforcing bars.
(12-1)
(12-2)
where [10. Ij
124 COMPOSITE MF"v1BERS ICHAP. 10
and F;." = moth fled ) 1eltl tre

for the des1gn of compo'>lte columns. ksi
F. = specilkd mm1mum ) ield stress of thc tructural teel shape, ksi
t;,=specified minimum yi :ld stress of the l ongitutlinal reinforcing bars. ksi
r; = speci flcd comprc-.sivc trcngth llf the concrete. k i
£, = modifktl modulus of elasticity for thc de ign of composite columns, k i
1:. = modulu\ of eht,licity of steel= :!Y.OOO 1-.\1
£. = motlulu\ of cla\ticitv. of concrcte. k 1
11 =unit WCII!ht of concrete. lblftJ
1
A, = cross--;ect10nal area of concrete. in
1
A,= cro"·sectional arca of longitudmal remforcmg bar.... in
A,= cross-sectional area of structura l steel , in 1
For concrete-filled pipe and tubing: c 1 = 1.0, c 1 = o.gs, and c3 = 0.4. For concrete-encased
shapes c 1 = 0.7, c1 = 0.6, and c,- 0.2. Utilizi ng F,,, and £,a'> defined above . the design strength
of axially loaded composite columns is ¢, P,,. where ¢, = O.R5 and
P,, = •\ f., [/0.2)
lf i.. s 1.5 (mdast1c column

buckling)
F,, = (0.65W)f;," (10.3]

or r;., = (exp( -0.4 1 (10.-1]
9.A.;)]f,,,
where exp(x) = e'.

1f },, > 1.5 (clastic colum n buckling)
0.'8.77)
F;.,. = ( [ 10.5]
F,mA
•
,..--
. Kt r;,,
where I., \ , [10. 6]
rm:r £
-
and A,= cros'>·sectional area of structural steel. in
K =effective length factor, discus\t:d in Chap. 4
I= unbracecl l ength of the member,
in
r,., =rad ius of gyration of the steel shape. but not lcs" than 0.3 times th e ovent ll thi ckn t: s of
the compo\ ite cr<JS\ section in the plane of buckling, in
In Sec. 12, the AISC LR F D Specification places thc follo,,ing restrictions on compo<,itc columns.
(a) The cross-sectional area of \tructural steel l ·4 percent of the total area of the composite
cross section Othcrwt\e, design as a reinf1)rced concrete column.
(b) Concrete encasement of teel '>hall he re1nforccd \\lth longitudinal bars and lateral ties.
Maximum '>pHclng of lateral ties <;hall be t\\o-tlmd' of the least dimension of the composi te
cro s section. The mmimum crOS'>- CCII(1na l arc;1 of all reinforcement (latera l and
longitudinnl) shal l he 0.007 in 2 per inch of bar racing. A clear concrete cover of at l east
1.5 in must be provided outside all reinfon:cment at the perimeter.
(c) Minimum design;: is 3 ksi for normnl-weight concrete. and 4 ksi for lightweight concrete .
Maximum design f' is H ksi.
(d) For hoth \tructural Jnd reinforcing 'tee!. des1gn f, .-55 ksi.
CHAP. 10] COMPOSITE MEMBERS 125
(e) The wall thicknesses of structural steel members fill ed with concrete
rF for each face of width b in rectangular tubes,

\ :
t b
/3£
f3 for pipes of outside diameter D
t D
\ _
/8£
(f) If a compo ite cro s ection includes two or more steel shapes, the shapes shall be
connected with batten plates. tie plate . or lacmg to prevent buckling of each shape before
hardening of the concrete.
(g) The part of the de!)ign compressive strength re isted by the concrete </>, P," must be
developed by direct bearing at connections.
[10. 7J
where <Pn = 0.60 = th e resi:.tance factor in bearin g on concrete and A 11 = the bearing area,
in 2 •
The design of composite column can be accomplished th rough the Composite Column Tables in
Part 4 of the AISC LRFO Manual for the cro s !>ections tabulated therein, or the above equations
for all cross sections.
BEAMS AND OTHER HEX URAL ME IBERS

The most common case of a composite flexural member is a steel beam interacting with a
concrete slab, as shown in Fig. 10-l(d). The slab can be either a solid reinforced concrete slab or a
concrete slab on a corrugated metal deck. In either case, stud or channel shear connec tors are
essential to ensure composit e action. (When designed in accordance with this secti on. a beam is
composi t e regardless of the type of deck. A steel deck b de ignated as a composite deck when it
contains embossments on its upper surfaces to bond it to the concrete slab; the beams supporting it
may or may not be compo.,ite in this case.)
. ·. '
-
)"
....... ....
(II) (b)
,. .
,... ...,
I
: " ,
-
.
. ....
• .
r It in minimum
• ,-.z . , .
I
-- . '
.-
•
•
-
'
- •r' .
'..... 2 m nummum
.. .
. • '.
.
. -.' ..L 2
-· -
lD mammum
(lyp•ca()
co\er
(() (d)
Fig. 10-1 Examples of compo itc member

Three criteria determine the effective width of a concrete slab acting compositely with a steel
beam. On either side of the beam centerline, the effective width of concrete slab cannot exceed
(a) one-eighth of the beam pin, (b) one-half of the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam,
or (c) the distance to th e edge of the slab.
126 COMPOSITE MEMBERS (CHAP. 10
The horizontal shear forces between the steel beam and concrete \lab. to be transferred by the
shear connectors. are as follows.
In regi on!. of positiue momem. between the p01nh of zero and ma:omum po itive moments (e.g..
between a support point and midspan on a untforml) loaded. '>impl) supported beam). the
smallest of (l) 0.85[;A, (the maximum possible compres t\e force tn the concrete). (2) Aj F.. (the
maximum possible tensile force in the steel). and (3) Q., (the capacity of the shear
connectors).
In region s of negative moment, between the points of zero and maximum negative moments
(e.g., between th e free end and the support on a cantileve r beam). the smaller of (4) A,F.., (the
maximum possible tensile force in the reinforcement) and (5) L: Q, (th e capacity of the shear
connectors).
When sufficient shear connectors are provided (in accordance with the section on shear
connectors below) to allow condition 1. 2. or 4 above to govern. th ere i s full composite action.
However, if the number of shear connectors i s red u ced a nd conditi on J or 5 governs, the result
is partial composite action.
DESIGN FLEX UR A L STR ENG TH

For positive moment. th e design flexural strength rp,.M, i' determined as follow .
If h,/t"..::;, 640/'vF, (i.e .. th e web of the steel beam t-. compact, which •.., true for all rolled w
shape in A36 steel), cp,. = 0.85, and M, is calculated from the plaltic stre.H distribwion on the
compo ite section. The as!.umptions are (a) a uniform compn:..."vc stress of 0.85[; and zero
tensile strength in the concrete. (b) a uniform steel '>tres' of f ; tn the tension area
and
compres ion area (if an)) of the steel section. and (c) that the net tensile force in the steel
section equals the comprel>sive force in the concrete '>lab
If hJ t., > 640/ Vf. (i.e.. the web of the steel beam i not compact). cp,. = 0.90, and M,. is
calculat ed from the elastic stress distribution, con,tdering the effects of shoring. The assumptions
are (a) the strain'> in the steel and concrete are proportional to the distance from the neutral
axis; (b) steel stress. tension or compression. equals \train lime\ £, but cannot exceed
F...;
(c) concrete compressive stress equals strain times£,, but cannot exceed 0.85[:: and (d) tensile
strength is zero in the concrete.
For negative moments the design flexural treng.th rp,M,. b determined by m ost engineers
according to the provisions in Chap. 5. neglecting composite acti on. lloweve r . if the steel beam is
compact and adequately braced (i.e .. L,, L" for C" = 1.0, or L 1, L,., for C,, > l.O) and the slab
reinforcement i s properly developed, the negative nexur<d de.,ign strength ma y be determined as
follows: ¢ > = O.H5, and M,. is calcu l ated from th e plasric srress disrrihwion on the composite
section.
The assumption are
(a) a ten sile stress of F.., in all adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing bars within
the
effective width of the concrete slab
(b) n o tensile strength in the
concrete
(c) a uniform stress of F. in the tension and compression area:- of the steel section and
(d) that the net compressive force in the steel section equals the total ten sile force in the
reinforcement
The i!.sue of shonng is tmportant in composite destgn If temporary shores are used during
construction to help the steel beams support the newt) poured "wet " concrete. design is as outlined
above, with the composite section resisting the total factored load. dead plu\ live. I f shoring is not
anticipated. the bare steel beam must also be checked for adequaC) to support the wet concrete and
other construction loads (properly factored) in accordanc..: with the requiremen ts of Chap. 5.
CHAP. 10) COMPOSITE MEMBERS
127
Because of beam strel.s redistribution under full plastification. the total factored load for
unshored construction can still be assumed to act on the composite section, whenever design
with a plastic stress distribution is allowed by the AISC LRFD Specification. However, if an
elastic stress distribution is required, (I) the unshored loads applied prior to curing of the
concrete (defined as attaining 75 percent of[;) must be taken by the steel beam alone. and (2) only
the subsequent loads can be resisted by composite action. In the latter case. the total flexural
stress at any point in the steel beam is a superposition of the two effects.
SHEAR
CONNECTORS
Acceptable as shear connectors are headed steel studs of minimum four stud diameters in length
and rolled steel channels. The nominal strength of a single stud shear connector in a solid concrete
slab is
(15-l)
where A " is the cross-sectional area of the stud, in2 , and F,, is the minimum specified tensile strength
of the stud, ksi.
The nominal strength of a smgle channel shear connector in a solid concrete slab is
Q, = 0. 3(t1 + 0. St., )L, ...;r:£: (15-2)
where t1 = flange thickness of the channel. in
tw =web thickness of the channel, in
Lc =length of the channel, in
The number of shear connectors required between a section of maximum moment and the
nearest section of zero moment is
l-j,
-
n= [ /0. 8]
Q,
where Q" =the shear capacity of one connector [as determined from Eq. (15-1) or (/5-2)], kips and
vh =the total horizontal shear force to be transferred. kips.
As discussed above, in regions of positive moment, l-j, = the minimum of (0.85/;.Ac, A,F,, and
E Qn), while in regions of negative moment. l-j, =the minimum of (A,f;.,and E Q,).
Shear connectors may be uniformly distributed between the points of maximum and zero
moment. However. when a concentrated load is present, enough connectOrs must be placed between
the point of concentrated load and the point of zero moment to adequately develop the moment
capacity required at the concentrated load.
The following restrictions on the placement and spacing of shear connectors are imposed by the
A ISC LRFD Specification:
(a) Minimum l-in lateral concrete cover. except when in talled in a steel deck
(b) Diameter of Muds s2.5 limes the thickness of the flange to which they are welded, unless
they are located over the web
(c) Minimum center-to-center spacing of studs, longitudinally along the supporting beam, six
diameters in solid slabs and four diameters in decks; laterally. four diameters in all cases
(d) Maximum center-to-center spacing of shear connectors of eight times the total slab thickness
SPECIAL PROVISION S FOR STEEL DECKS

When a metal deck il> used. the diameter of the shear tuds must not exceed in. The studs may
be welded to the steel beam either through the deck (which is the usual practice) or through holes
128 COMPOSITE MEMBERS [CHAP. 10
punched in the deck . Additional restrictions affecting the studs and deck (from Sec. 13.5 of the
AISC LRFD Specification) are shown in Fig. 10-2, which is reproduced (with permission) from the
Commentary on the AlSC LRFD Specification.
.. .. . ..·.
'. 2 in minimum
-;==;;;=?: b.
A
.
.. H 4 . h, < 3 10
w, ..
H 10 rrummum
I'll
..
.
·. .: .. .
2 in minimum. .. . .. .4 ·_·,
·' . .. ..
.. .
' b
2 in mimmum
. . , J 4 .. . .. .,..
·-- . .p. . . . . . . • . ..
'rZ!7. J. . H,
I
.. b .
0
' 0•
·.\\ t . .. h, < 3 in
\\ ..!.
. .. . :: 1\
It in minimum
"'•
2 m' rrummum
• . ¢ 'A
.. . . . 4
•. .. ... .. .,
.. .
. . L
J c . ll . . 2 m m1mmum
. .. :
. . A '-
.. .
I>
to H
_,_ 4
.. A
. . + • 4 ..
h.<3m
ll1n m1mmum
t• . w .' ..I
2m m1mmum
.. .
'. .
. . ...'• ... .. . .. . ... . ..
. •
'
•• . •
.. 6
•
··· c. ···.··.:.•-4
F
•..
•
<I .
' . .. . . . m mm1mum
:l:
.
2
. . .
.. H
It in m1 l
" ·.
. . •. .
.. b . . . .
• Q
•'
. . •
.
mu m - -
'. .... . , < 3 in
.. q ••
-.:r· · h
f"
'
'/'
E 2 in mimmum
"·
·· -· .....
.
•.
.
.. .. ... ..".
..•.
• 0 ..
p •.
w. 2 an minimum
Fig. 10-2 Special provision for steel decks
When the deck ribs are perpendicular to the steel beam

(a) The concrete below the top of the steel deck is ignored in calculating A r and other section
properties.
(b) The longitudinal spacing of shear studs <32 in.
(c) The nominal strength of each shear stud [i.e., the middle term in Expression (15-1), above]
is multiplied by the reduction factor
0.85 (w') (H- ,- 1.o) (13-1)
<1.0
vrv, h, h,
CJ lAP. 10] COMPOSITE M EMBERS 129
where N, =the number of studs in one rib at a beam intersection (<3 in this formula. even if
more th an three studs arc present) and w., h,. and H, are as defined in Fig. 10-2. in
inches. In calculations. H, < (h, + 3) must be used.
(d) The steel deck must be anchored to all support ing members at a spacing <16 in. Welded
studs or arc spot (pudd le) welds are satisfactory for this purpose.
When the deck ribs are parallel to the steel beam
(a) The concrete below the top of the steel deck is included in calculatin g A, and other section
properties.
(b) The deck may be cut longitudinally at a rib and separated to form a concrete haunch over
the supporting steel beam. as shown at the bottom of Fig. J0-2.
(c) When h, > 1.5 in. w, > 2 in for the first stud in the transverse direction plus four stud
diameters for each additiona l stud.
(d) When w,/h, < 1.5, the nominal strength of each shear stud (i.e the middle term in
..
Expression (15-1), above] mLL t be multiplied by the reduction factor
w , ( H , ) {!3-2)
0.6 - - - 1.0 < l.O
h, . h,
CONCRETE-ENCASED BEAMS
The special case of a concrete-encased beam (shown in Fig. 10-l(c)]. where shear connectors are
not required for composite action. is as follows. A beam totally encased in concrete cast with the
sl ab may be assumed bonded ro the concrete if
(a) Concrete cover of the sides and soffit of the beam is at least 2 in
.
(b) The top of th e beam i s at least liin be l ow and 2 in above the bottom of the
slab.
(c) The concrete encasement has sufficient welded wire mesh or bar reinforcing steel to prevent
spaUing of the concrete.
The design flexura l strength of concrete-encased beams is 1/JbM,, where ¢h = 0.90 and M,
is calculated from either (a) the elastic stress distribution 011 the composite section, considering the
effects of shoring. or (b) the plastic srress distribution on the bare steel section (i.e .. M, = M" = ZF..).
Either way, there is no need to consider local buckling or latera l-torsiona l buckling of the steel
beam because such buckling is inhibited by the encasement.
BEAM-COLUMNS: COMBINED FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION

Doubly and singly symmetric composite beam-columns are designed by the method presented in
Chap. 8 for ordinary beam-columns [including Interaction Formulas (H 1-1a) and (H 1-lb ), and
simplified Second-Order Analysis Equations (Hl-2) to (H1-6)], but wi th the following exceptions.
In Eqs. (H 1-1a) and (H 1-lb ), ¢<P,, is as defined in this chapter for composite columns; similarly
1/JbM,, where ¢h = 0.85 and M" is the nominal flexural strength calculated from th e plastic stress
distribution on the composite cross section. However, if (P,.!¢cP,,) <0.3, M, is determined by
lin ear interpolation between M, (ca lculated from the plastic stress distribution on the composite
cross section) at (P,,/ 1/JcP.,) = 0.3 and M, for the appropriate composite beam (e.g., a concrete-
encased beam) at P,, = 0.
In Eqs. (Hl-3) and (HJ-
6)
p =A F,m,
, ,.; 12 [10. 9]
A,.
where A" Fmv• and )..care as defined in this chapter. See Eqs. (12-1) and [10.6J.
130 COMPOSITE MEMBERS [CHAP. 10
Beam-column must conform with the mmtmum requirements for composite columns. li tcd as
items (a) to (g) earlier in tht'> chapter. under the heading Columns and Other Compression
Members. If '>hear connectors arc required for a beam (i.e.. when r.. = 0), they must be provided
for
th at member whenever (P,./ ¢, P,,) < 0.3.
DESIGN SHEAR STRENGTH

The design o;hcar strength for composite beam ts taken a' the \hear !.trength of the steel web. a
for noncomposite beam . The equations for shear <;trength in Chnp . 5 and 6 are. therefore, va liJ for
composite flexural member....
Solved Problems
10.1 . Select a 6-tn concrete-filled ptpe column for a reqUired a\tal compres"i'e trength of 200 kip!..
where 1\L = 1().(1 ft. F; - 36 k"i. J; = 3.5 k\1. normal wetght ( 145 lb/ ft ')
concrete. Sec Prob .
-1.11.
In Prob. 4.11 . a noncomp< '>itc 6-in cxtra trong ptpc was requtrcd for the same condition .
Tn a fl·tn <; andard-wctl!ht concrete-filled ptpe (See Fig 10-3. l
. '
--
.. 6.625 '" ouNdc dtamcter D
t 0.280 in
Fig. 10..3
Check mtmmum wall thtcknc" of ptpe·
r • f) - -
= 6.6:!5 in 'V 36 k\1 = 0.083 in
HE Hx29,000 ,i
1- O.:!XO in > 0 OX Ill o.k .
Check minimum cro ·,t:(tional area of tcel ptpc:
.. ,j"f .. •
R· ) - (D·- D')
'
• -1
= :c [(fl.fl:!5m) • -(6.065111) I- :->han·

.t
., ,T , J f . . 28 9 •
A, = ;cR = D, = - X (6.065 an) ·. in
4 .t
:'iftm
_ -:: = u.16 > '
( o.t,.
;; ;.;.; -
.6 in + _x. <J tn
''·+ ''·
CHAP. 10] COM POSITE MEMBERS 131
In the absence of re10forc10g bar,. Eq . (/!-/)and(/:!-:!) become

,A ,
Fm, = F +cd,A
A
Em= E + c,E
A
where E. = w' 'VJ'..
c.= 0.85, c,=
OA.
The modulu ot elastiCity of the concrete
E. = 145' '\13.5 = 3:!67 kM
The modified yaeld re -. for composi t e design b
. . ?_ 8.9 °1 n·
F.... = 36 ksa + 0.85 X 3.5 k5a _ .6.an ·
x 5
=51.4 ksi
Th e modified modulus of elasticity for compo ite design
''
,., (1 0 •
E.,. - 19 •000 kS'l + ().4 ·

l -_o.7• IO-,'
).0111 '
, .. ,
X. > - 67 k
· X
= 35.744 hi
rhe radau of gyration of a hollov. circul<ar hape
\10°+ o;
r= (See AISC LRFD Manual. p. 7-21.)
1
\ (6.625 in)"+ (6.065 in)1
= = 2.25 10
.t
for the bare steel pipe.
The modified radaus of gyrauon for composite design
r,. = r 20.3D (the O\'erall damcn aon)
----"-I.ll- 3 x 6.6-..::.>m - 1.\IYIO)
(0.
The !.lenderncs pa - __ _
, - 0 Ill
ramcter
Ji
'
= Kl
r,t;r
li"" Em
_ 10.0 ft x 12 in / ft 51 .4 k'' _
- 2 ?5. . -0.64
·- I ll X 1r 35,744 ks1
Becau c J., < 1.5
F;, = (0.658'0r....
n \'
= 0.658' ' · x 51.4 ksa = 43.2 ko,a
The dcsagn compre,sive trength
rp,Pn = rp,A ,F,,
= 0.85 x 5.6 in'x 43.2 kips/a n ·
= 205 kips > 200 k1ps required
(rp, P. 205 k1p for tha case IS abo tabulated on p 4-100 of the AISC LRFD M an ual )
The 6-1n standard-\\Cight concrete-filled pipe-column ,., o,ati'>factor}
10.2. Determine the design compressive strength of a W8x 40 (A36 steel) encased in a 16 in x 16 in
U: = 3.5 ksi) normal-weight concrete column in Fig . 10-4.
Reinforcement is fou r No. 7
(Grade 60) bars longitudinally. and No. 3 ties at 10 in horizontally; K,L, = K ,L, = 15.0 ft.
Io
an
T . . ..
·..c
......•
J
·.
.
ll.!m
II> an • • .
.'
' -- - - ...
Fig. 10-4
Checking minimum requirements

(a) For a W8 x40. A ,= II.7 in• wtal area= 16 in x 1 6 i., = 256 in 1
1
ll.7in "
in = 4.6C:'r > 4"( O.k.
256 2
m1mmum
(b) Lateral tie 'pacing= 10111
<; x 16 in outer dimen 1on = 10.7 in o.k.
Mmimum clear cover= 1.5 in o.k .
Horizontal No . 3 bars· A, = (l. II m 1per bar
>0.l)()7 in· x 10111 \pacmg = 0.07 in· o.k .
Vertical No. 7 bars· A , = 0.60 in per bar
>0.007 in: X II A in -.pacmg = ll.OH 111· o.k .
(c)3.0 h1 < (f;- 3.5 hi) < 8.0 ksi for normal weight concrete O.k.
(d U e F,, =55 ksi for reinforcement in calculation . even though actual F..= 60 ksi for Grade 60 bars .
) Determme F,,., and £,..:
A, , A,
F,m =F..+ c,F.,,- + c
f,-
;\, ;\,
where A, = the cross-sectional a rea of four No. 7 longit udinal bar -4 x 0.6 in'= 2.4 in
A ,= cross-\ecti ona l area of WRx4o = 11.7 in:
A, = 16 in x 16 in - (II.7 in= + 2.4 in:) = 242 in 1
For concrete -encased shapes. c, = 0. 7 and cc = O.o.
2.4 in= " •k . 242 in=
f,", = 36 ksi + 0.7 X 55 k'>i X---+ (1.u X >.:> \1 X ,
" 11.7 m 11.7 in·
= 87.3 ksi
A,
Em=E+c,£,
A,
where c, = 0.::! for concrete-encased shapes
£, = h ' 'Vf = 145' '\':ts = 3167 ksi for J 5-k'>i nnrmal-wc1ght ( 1451b/ ft ') concrete
!:.,.. = 29,000 k i + '1.2 x 3267 ksi x 242 in /J1.7m: = 42.513 I..\I
CHAP. 10) COMPOSITE M EMBERS 133
The mod1fied radiu s of gyration

r,.. = r,(W8x40) > 0.3 X 16 in (overall dimen\lon)
= 2.04 in > 4.80 10
= .80 in
The 'lendcrne>> paramet.:r
15.0 ft x 12 in/ 87.3 k i

ft 1----.=0.54
= 2.513 k s1
4.80 in X n
The critical stress
F" = (0.658"i)F,.,,
1
= 0.6581" <- ' x 87.3 k i = 77.2 k si
The de ign compressive strength
cp, P., = C/JA. ,
= 0.85 x 11.7 in 2 x 77.2 k1ps/in
= 768 kips
(cp,P. = 768 kips for this case is also tabulated on p . 4-73 of the A ISC LRFD Manual.)
The 761!-klp design strength is considerably more than the 238-klp design strength of a
noncomposite W8x40 column under the same condition . See Prob. 4.12.
10.3. Determtn e the design compressive strength of the compo i t e column in Prob. 10.2 if
1: = 5.0 ksi .
As in Prob . 10.2. the mm1mum requirements for a compo ite column are ,atistied; A,= 2A in .
A , = II.7 m ·.A, = 242 10 . c 1 = 0.7. c = 0.6. c, = 0.2.
A, , A,
F..,= F..+ c1F,.,- +cdr -
A, A.•
2.4 in 242 in:
=36 ksi+0.7x55 ksix .+0.6x5.0 ksi x .•
11.7in· II.7 111·
= 105.9 bi
Er = w' 5YJ:= 145' V5.Q = 3904 ksi
5
A,
E..,=E+c ,£,-
A,
24'> in:
= 29.000 ksi + 0.2 x 3904 ksi x - . ,
11.710"
= 45.150 ksi
r.., = 4.80 in as in Prob. 10.2.
)., = E_ j F...,
.
r,.tc '£'"
= 15.0 ft X 12 in / ft 105.9 ks1
=
0 58
..
4.80 in x ;r 45.150 ksi
F;, = {0.0658'·:)Fm,
= 0.658111 "" X 105.9 k i = 9::!.1 K\i
rp, P.= rp,A F; .
= 0.85 X 11.7 in X 92.1 b1
=916kips
(a also tabulated on p. -85 of the AfSC LRFD Manual) .
10.4. Assume all the column load in Prob. l0.3 enters the composite column at one leveL
Determine A 8 , the required bearing area of concrete .
In other word . the part of the design compres ive trength re isted by the concrete equals the total
design compresive strength of the composite column minus tho: port i on rc i!.tcd by the steel.
In this case. 4>, P,, = 916 kips and 1/>, P,. = 238 kips .
</>, P... = 916 kips - 238 kips = 678 kips
According to formu l a [ JIJ.
71 cp, P•. < 1.7rf>8[ ;A,
A > cp,P," = 678 kip = Ir . 0
or B-
1.74 1.7 X 0.00 X 5
..>In
K'>l
f '
>o ,
The required concrete-bearing area of 133 inz can be satisfied by applymg the load to a 12 in x 12
in bearing plate placed on the column .
For Prob!>. I 0.5 to 10.9, determine
(a) The effective width of concrete slab for composite action

(b) Vh (the total horizontal shear force to be transferred) for full composite act ion
(c) The number of -in-diameter shear studs required tf F,, = 60 ksi
10.5. A Wl8x40 interior beam is shown in Fig. 10-5. Steel is A36. beam span is 30ft 0 in. and
beam spaci ng is 10ft 0 in. The beams are to act composi tely with a 5-in normal-weight
concrete slab; r:
= 5. 0 ksi.
= ==:;:::========:::::;;;;;;;::::::========:::;;;;;;;;:::::===* 1rs
I
1 -
.n
}mx40
s=IOftOin s =IOfiOm
...
Fig. 10-5
(a) For an intenor beam. the effective slab\\ idth on c1thcr •de of the be am centerlme i the
minimum
of
L 30.0 ft
- = ft = 4S- In
8 8 =
3.7S
-
s 10.0 ft
= =S.OOft
2 2
The effective slab width is 2 x 5 in= 90 in .
(b) In positive moment regiOns, Vh for full compo ile action i the smaller of
0.85[:,.4, = 0.85 X 5 k i X (90 in X 5 in)
= 1913 kip'
A, F, = ll.llm 'x 36 k 1 = -1::!5 kips
vh = 4::!5 iP'
(c) The nominal 'trength of a ingle hear stud [from Fq (15-I)J i>
Q.= 0.5.A \ j' £, .A F,,
For a -m-diameter tud .
A , = ;r ( 0.75 in)'= 0.-1-l in

.
£, = w
1
''1/j;. = 1451 'V.'\ .0 = 3YIJ-
I ksi
r,. = 60 hi
Q.= U.S X U.-1-1 m 'Y5 () k'>i X J\)0-1 ksi S 0.44 in , X 60 '>i
= 30.t) k1ps < 26-1 k1ps
= 26.-1 kip per 'tud
The number of hear connectors bet,,een the: pomt of Lcro and maximum momc:nh 1'
V,, -125 k1p'
II=-=
Q. 26.-1 p/stud
= 16.1 or 17 stud
For the beam shown in hg. 10-6. the requ1rcd numh.:r of shear tuds is 2n = 2 x 17 = 34.
I
-
11 sruds n <rud'
J
o4
7
,w ._,
Fig. 10-6
Assuming a ingle hne of hear stud (over the beam web), stud spacing= 30.0 ft/34 - 0.88 ft =
1 0.6 in. Th is is greater than the six-stud diameto.:r (or 6 x in= 4.5 in) minimum padng, and less
than the eight slab thicknc'' (or 8 X 5 in= 40 in) maximum pacmg, which i satisfactory.
10.6. A W24 x68 edge beam i!> shown in Fig. 10-7. Steel j, A36, and the beam span i 32ft 0 in.
The
beam is to act composite!> with a 4-in Lightweight concrete (II0 lb/ ft3) slab: J: = 3.5 ksi.
- - - - - -- :. ... :. . : .. . .:: ..,

I h 0 in s = 5
.
f t 0 o n
Fig. 10-7
(a) For the o.:dge beam m rig. 10-7. the effecti'e lab w1dth on the exterior (or left) '>Ide of the beam
centerline is the m1mmum of LI S= 32.0 ft/H = 4.0 ft. or distance to edge of lab= 1 .0 ft = 12
in.
136 COMPOSITE M EMBERS (CHAP. 10
The effective .,lab wtdth on the interior (or right) .,td<! of the beam centerline is the minimum of
32.0 It
-/_ - = -!.Oft
!\
I 5.0 ft - I 30in
=
-·='
- - J I
The df<:Ctl\<! 'lab \\tdth "(12m+ 30m) = -12m

(/>) In the pm.llt\C momcm regions. I' for full compm.tte action ., the 'mnllcr of
0.85/;A,= 0.85 X 3.5 k i X (..12m X -1 in) = 500 kip\
A F, = 20.1 in 'X 36 ksi = 72-lkip
v, = 500 kip
(c) Th..: nominal trcngth of a ingle hear stud Ifrom Eq . (15-/)l•
Q, = 0.5A. VJ'Jf. ·-11.. 1·;,
F..= 60 kst A,. = 0.44 m for -in-diameter >tud
t:. = 11·1 '\!f:= 110' 'VU = 2ISX ksi
Q,= 0.5 X 0.-1-1 in \ 13.5 bi X 215X k,j ,_ ()..j..j in X oO k\i
= 19.1 kips s26.-lkip'

= 19 I kip' per 'tud
The number of hear connector bet"-CCn tho! point' of 1em and maximum moment i
II v.t Q.- 500 kips/ 19.1 kips per 'tud = 26.1 or 27 'tud' ror the heam ..hown In Fig. 10-6.
the
requm:d numher of hear 'tuds is 2n = 2 x 27 = 5-I.
A-. umll1g a 111gle line of shear studs (over the b<!am "-CO). 'tud 'pac111g = 32.0 ft /5-1 = 0.59 ft =
7. 1 10 Thts ts greater than the •x stud dtameter (or 6 x :111 --1 'i m) mmimum .,pacing. and
less than the ctght slab thickne s (or 8 x -1m = 32tn) maxtmum 'pac111g. whtch tS 'au,factor}.
10.7. A., ume th e beams in Fig. 10-5 are cantilever beams: A36 steel, with a cantilever span of 8ft
0 in. Slah reinforcement is No. 4 bars (A,= 0.:!0 in 2 per bar) at I ft 0 in center-to-center .
Bars arc Grade 60 steel.
(11) For an mtcrior beam, the effective slab width on etther stde of the beam centerl ine is the minimum
of
L 8.0 ft
S= R = 1.0 ft
s I 0.0 ft 'i l .
=- .
The effective slab width i 2 x 1.0 ft = 2.0 ft.
.., =
-
. ., It
(b) In negative-moment regions (such a cantilevers) : . = A,f., for full compo-.ite action. where A,
and F.. arc the cross-sectional area and minimum yield Mres of the reinforcement. respectively.
Becau-.e the ..tab • in tension, the concrete cannot participate 111 compo ite acuon.
For an effective lab width of 2.0 ft
0.20 in: I bar
A ,= X f X 2.0 ft \'ldth 0.-10 111
bar t
\- = 0.-10 111' x 60 kst = 24 kip\

(c) The nom111al \trength of a single shear stud t\ Q. = 26.4 kips. Although 11 = v.t Q.
=
2-1 ktp,/ 26.-1 kips per stud= 0.9 would indicate that one stud IS satisfactory. the actual number of
CIIAP. 10) COMPOSITE MEMBERS 137
\hear '\tuds i governed by the maximum spacing of eight ume the \lab th1ckncss:
pan
1l = .
max1mum spacmg
8.0 ft x 12in/ft
= = 2.4 or 3 hear tuds
8 X 5 in
10.8. Repeat Prob. 10.5 with the following modification: The 5-in normal-weight concrete slab
(shown in Fig. 10-5) consists of 2 in of concrete on a 3-111 steel deck, with ribs span n ing
perpendicular to the W1Xx40 steel beam. See Fig. 10-8.
I fi 0 on (I) pica !)
1.. ..j .. ..I
71. 10
'
L 2m
/
"' "' '""'
/
....
"' /
" l
3tn
7-m
- -
r- r-
\\'18 x40
Fig. 10-8
Verifymg compliance w1th the pecial provisions for steel dech (Fig. 10-2):
Nommal deck rib height h, = 3 in maximum
Slab thickness above steel deck= 2m minimum
Average width of concrete rib w, = (4.75 + 7.25) in/2 = 6.0 tn -> 2 in minimum
Shear stud d1ameter = 0.75 in maxi mum
!Ieigh t of hear tud H, 2: (h, + l.5 in)= (3.0 + 1.5) in= 4.5
in Use 4\-in-long -in-diameter shear studs.
(a) The effective slab width b 90in. as in Prob. 10.5.

(b) Because the deck ribs arc perpendicular to the steel beam. the concrete below the top of the steel
deck i ignored in calculating A< and other section propertie . In regiOn of posuive moment. Vh for
full compo 11e action is the smaller of
0.85/;A = 0.85 x 5 ksi x (90 in x 2 in) = 765 k1ps
A F.. = 11.8 in x 36 ks1 = 425 k1p
v.= 425 kip
(c) For a sohd slab, the norrunal strength of a single shear stud (as determmed m Prob. 10.5) is
Q. = 0.5A .. Vf:E.< A ,. F,.
= 30.7 kips s 26.4 k1p (15-1)
When the deck ribs are perpendicular to the steel beam. the m1ddle term of Expre s1on (/5-J) is
138 COMPOSI TE \.1EMBCRS !CHAP. 10
multiplied h} the reduction factor
O.H5(1'')("'- 1 .0) :-" 1.0 (13-1)

VN, II, h,
From the '-Oiution lO th1s problem. w, = 6 in. II, =."\in. H, = 4.5 in. Assume the number of stud
connector' in one nh at a beam inteN:ction N, 2. Tht: reduction factor in expre sion (IJ-/) is
0.X5 6 in ( 4 .5 m )
X:;- ,. - 1.0 = 0.60
\ - .> Ill ·' Ill
Then
Q. = 307 ktp X 0.60 26.-1 kips
= 18.5 kip\ -<; 26.4 I.Ips
= IS.S kip\ per tud
The maximum number of shear connectors hctwcen the points of zero and maximum m oments i s
11 = ,/Q, = 425 kip'>/ l ll-5 kips per stud= 23 \tud . A indicated by Fig . 10-6. the req uired
minimum number of shcar studs is 211 = 2 x 2.1 = 46.
Bccau<.e the dt:ck ribs are spaced at J ft 0 in centcr-to-center. a shown in Fig. llHt there are
30 rib for the ."\0-fl b am span. It is advi\able to place two shea r studs per rib. for a total of 60
StUd\.
The reader C<lll venf) that the minimum center-to-center spacing of \hear studs 1n decl. nb<. of four
diameters (t.c . 4 x II. 75m = 3 111) in an d1recuon allow' the two studs in each rib to be placed
longitudinaii) or tran.,,er el 111 the ca>c at hand (a 1Xx40 beam and a deck with a 4 75·111 nb '"dth
at the bottom).
10.9. Repeat Proh . I 0.6 with the following modification: The 4-in lightweight con cret e slab (shown
in Fig. I().7) con sist\ of 2 in of concrete on a 2-i n steel deck, with ribs spanning perpendicular
to the W24X6H tccl beam. See Fig. 10-9.
, .. 7m
...J '
I h 0 tn pocah
- ..!..
'
' :!m
\ I ' T
:!m
-4 -.t•
5tn '
7
z
w x 1>8
Fig. 10-9
Verifytng compliance wuh the pecial prO\i'>IOn\ for \tcel deck\ (Fig. 10-2)·
Nominal declo. rio he1ght II,= 2 in < 3 in ma\imum
Slab thtckncs\ aoovc steel deck= 2 111 man unum
Average width of concrete rib II',= (5 + 7) in/2 6 i n ,2 in minimum
Sh ear > tud diameto:r = 0.75 in maximum
H eight of shear ·1d II (!J, + 1.5 in) = (2.0 + 1.5) 111 = 1.5 in
Use 3!-in long :-itH.hameter 'hear studs
(a) The effective slab ''llllh "-12m. as in Prob 10.6.

(b) Becau e the deck nb arc perpendicular 10 the \tecl beam . the concrete below the top of the
tccl deck i ignored m calculaung \ .
In regions of po lll\'l! moment. Vh for full composite action • the mallcr of
o.xs[;A, = 0.85 x 3.S ksi x (-12 in x 2 in)= 250 kip

A,F. = 20. I IOZ X 36 k i = 72-1 kip
\ .= 250 kip\
(c) Fur a \Oiid slab. the nommal 'trength of a -.ingle 'hear Mud (as dctermmcd 10 Prob. 10.6) ''
Q,- 0.'iA., ...rr;£; <A .,F,,

= I \1, l k1ps < 26.4 kip (15-1)
H the deck nb are p.:rpendicular to the '>tccl beam. the middle term of expres ion (15-1) b
muluplied by the reducti on factor
-U.l-.-5 ( "•) ( H - 1.0) < (/l-1)

VN. h, h, 1.0
From the solution to thi'> problem. w, = 6 in, h, 2 in. H, = 3.:'i in .

The n.:duction factor in cxpres ion (13-1) i'>
-U.!l5' {6in ){ l'iJn

, -
)
1.0 s 1.0
\ \, -'" - 10
Regardlc<,s of the number of \hear tud' in one rib at a beam inter ectmn (I.e.. X ,= 1. 2 , or 3), the
reduct1on factor equab 1 .0
Q,= 19. Ikip-. x I.0 I<J.I kips per stud
The minimum number of \hear connector > bet\l.een th.: pomts ot zero and maximum moment'> 1s
n = V.IQ.= 250 k1ps/ IIJ .I k1p' per 'tud = 13.1 or 1-1 "ud-..
As md1cated b) Fig. 10-6. the required mimmum number ot \hear \tuds 15 2n = 2 x I-I = 2h.
Becau e the deck ribs are paced at I ft 0 m center-to-center, as ho,,n 10 F1g . 10-\1. there are 32 ribs for
the 32-ft beam pan. It IS ad' isable to place one \hear stud per rib, for a total of 32 studs.
10.10. Determine the design Hcxural trength of th .; Wl8x40 beam in Prob. 10.5 with full composite
action . Assume the beam is hored during con truction.
Becau'c the beam i5 hored , the entire load act\ on a compo ite member From the Properue Tablc:s
for W Shapes in Part 1 of the t\ISC LRFD tanu,tl. for a WJ8X-IO
( th:,: = 51.0 ) < (16/4F0M(

. = '-./36 = 106.7
)
The dc ign flexural strength 1\ cf! o M . where rfi o = O.ll5 and Mn IS calculated from the plaMic 'tre
di-.tribuuon on the compos1tc 'ccuon
From the solution to Prob . 10.5: the ma\lmum po,sible comprc"l\1! force in the concrete slab
(' = cu sr:A = 1913 kip\ , the maximum passable t en,ilc force in the steel beam T = A.F. = 425 kip
. To
sau fy cqu1hbrium. It 1 ncce,sar that C = 7 = 425 k•P'· The pla tlc str.: ' distribution b a' \hown
in Fig. 10-10. with the pla tlc nl!utral axi (PNA) an the lab. In Fig . J0-10. C = 0.1\S[;ba. where a
b the
depth of the comprcs ion block (in) and b is the cfl'cctivt: slab width (in).
140 COMPOSITE MEMBERS [CHAP . 10
a
I 0.85f
I
z ---- - -, '- c = 0.85f ba
' .., E Q.
+ r---
1
1 ---l
.
I 1
J
l - -'
T-AF ' ('
I
.J_
... Q.
Fig. 10 10
From Prob . 10.5.1: = 5.0 ksi. b =YO in.
Then,
c 425 .
{I=().a;:I"-, = _ kipkI' p . = 1.1110
O.lb X 5.0- X YO
f'b 10. 10
The nominal flexural trc:ngth
= Te = T d
lt4 -+ /I)
1-
n \
- 1
- 17.Y0in 1
= 415 kips x ( + 5 1n -
2
= .QS k1ps X 13.39 1n
= 56Y3 k1p-in = 474 k1p-ft
Th.: de\1gn flexural trcngth for full composite action is tJ>hM .. = O.tl5 x 474 kip-ft = 403 kip-
ft.
Thi b nearly double the ( rp.M" = ) 212-kip-ft dc ign compresSive strength of a noncomposite
Wli!X40 beam ot the same A36 steel (assuming adequate lateral bracing; i.e.. L. s L,). (The
composite bc<tm IS braced by the shear studs. spaced at 10.6 10, t:mbedded in the concrete.)
10.11. Determ ine the design flexural strength of the W 18X40 beam in Prob. 10.8. The 5-in·thick
solid concrete slab (in Fig. 10-5) is rep laced with 2 in of solid con crete on a 3-in steel deck
with rihs perpendicular to the beam as shown in Fig . 10·8. Assume the beam is shored during
construction.
When the deck rib are perpendicular to the beam. the concrete below the top of the deck is neglected.
In the ca c at hand. only the upper 2 in of concrete can be cons1dered effective.
In Proh. 10. Ill. the PNA was located at 1.11 in below the top of the slab. (See Fig. 10·10.) All the
concrete hclo"' the PNA 1s as 1gned zero strength becau e it IS 10 tcns1on. The solution to this problem is
identical with that of Prob. 10.10: thus. a lab on a steel deck b equivalent to a solid slab if the deck is
entirely \\lthin the ten ion L.One of the concrete.
10.12. Repeat Prob. 10.10. Assume the beam is not shored during construction.
TI1e \Oluuon to Probs. 10.10 and IO.ll (where the plasiiC stre'\ d1 tnbution is used to determine M.)
is al o \'3hd for un horcd con truction. Howe,er. the bare steel beam must be checked for adequacy
to support all loads apphed pnor to the concrete attainmg 75 percent of 1\S pecified strength f ;.
The con tructton loads on the noncompo itc Wlb x -ltl beam 10 Prob . 10.10 (M!c Fig. 10-5) arc
[)ead Load
Beam =-«Jib 111
_ lb S 10 th1ck 615 lb/ ft
Slab I::>0-= x x [(1.0 ft "1de -
It 12 10/lt 665 lb/h
Con\lrucuon L1vc Load (as umcd)
lb
•20 ((X 10.0 It wu.lc:: = 200 lb/ft
The facwred uniform load i 1.20 + L.6L:
T.c rcqu11(;d strength M., = t•.,L /JI..

l.J2 1-,,p;,/ft X (30.0 fl) •
A•I· = X -= l -11\k1p-ft
·• tp,.M,. for the WlXX40 alone. 1f Lh -s 16ft. (Sec AISC LRFD Manual, p. 3-74.) The unshored
noncompo He WlXX40 beam i adequate:: dunilg con tructmn 1f 11 " latt:rall \upportcd at lea t at
one pmnt (m1d pan)
10.13. A!.!.ume the moment diagram in Fig . 10-11 repre,ents the requm:d tlc;..ural strength of the
compo tte W18X40 beam in Prob!.. 10.5 and 10.10. Dctcrmmc the dtqributton of shear tuds
along the !.pan.
! !
J @ Ill tr 0 m .•o It 0 m
350 l..tp h
300 krp-n .lOll l..tp 11
Fig . 10- 11
In the solution to Prob. 10.10 it was determined that the design flcxur l trcngth of thb composite beam
for full compo:.He ac11on b tp,.M. = 403 kip-ft. Since the requtrcd flexural
trength M,. < 350 kip-ft throughout the pan. try partial compo>ite action. Instead of the
(2n ) 34 'hear \lud determined for Prob . 10. S(c) for lull compos1te action. try (2n =) 28 hear \tud\;
t.C . n = 14 \hear 'tud> on each >ide of the m1dspan max1mum-momen1 section.
Check >pacing.
30.0 ft x 12 in/ft .
l= =1.!.910
28 stud<;
<(!lr = h x 5 in = ) 40 10 max1mum pac10g ok
For parual compo itc acuon. the hcnzomal shear tran,fcrrcd b) the tud' bet.,..een the potnts of zero
and maxamum moment!> v. = L Qn = nQn = 14 'iluds x :!o.4 I"P'f,tud = 170
k1p> . [The value Qn =
26.4 k1p per stud was detemuned in the solution to Prob . 10.5(c) I
142 COMPOSITE MEMBERS fCTI AP .
10
Referring to Fig. 10-10
C = 0.85/;ha s l: Q, = 370 kips

c 370 ktp\
II=()• 8::>"f'b- () ..o,). X::->. 0 k'tps /'Ill•' X
90.10 = 0.97 in
d
M,= T. = C,= C (/)
( 2 + 1- :!
= 370 ktp X 17.90in 0.97in)
+ 5 tn-
( :!
2
= 370 kips x 13.47 in
= 983 kip-in= 15 kip-ft
The design flexural strength for partial composite action is IJ> oM, = 0.85 x 415 kip-ft = 353 kip-
ft
>350 kip-ft required. This is okay.
Try a uniform distribution of shear stud and check the design flexural strength at the concentrated
load . where the required Mrength i 300 ktp·ft. (Sec Fig. 10·12.)
Propo cd "uniform
"
shear 1rud dmribuuon'
Full cllmposlte acuon
Pantal composite acuon
I 10 ! ! I! 34
Total
J)
10
3@ lOft Om
8
30ft Din
10
&
·
Fig. 10-12
At the points of concentrated load (partial composite action). 11 = 10 and

V, =
•Q = 10 Stud X
26.4 kip s .
d = 264
Q
- ,=II , ktpS
' stu
Referring to Fig. 10-10
C = 0.115/'ba s!: Q, = :!64 kips

C :!6-1 kips .
0 69 10
a= 0."oS. f,'b = 0.85 x•5.0 kt·ps;·m'·x9(J m = ·
M = Tr = Ce = c(d + 1-
0
)
" 2 2
k. (17.90in . 0.69in)
= 264 tp X + tn-
2 2
= 264 ktp' x 13.60 in
= 3592 kip-in = 299
ktp·ft
•
The design flexural strength for partial composite action is lj>,M, = 0.85 x 299 kip-ft = 254 kip-
fl
< 300 kip-ft requtred. Not adequate.
Try n = 12 shear tuds from the end supports to the pomts of concentrated load
ktps .
V,, = 11Q, = 12 studs x 26.4 -= 317
ktp
stud
Refernng to Fig 10-10

c 317 kip
o:·>.r1•, b = 0.g- X)-.() k.lpS/"1n'· X
a= 0.o t)() 10 = 0.!!3 10
M = c(d + 1-a
n :! 2
.
= 317k
X
(17.9010
+ 5 1n- _0 ..:...83=-•..:...n)
lp 2 - 2
-
=317kipsx 13.4in
= 4291 kip-in= 358 kip-ft
cp,,M., = 0.85 x 358 kip-ft = 304 kip-ft > 300 kip-ft required. Thi is okay. (See Fig. 10-13.)
The t·orrt•ct hear srud distributiOn'> are
Full <"Olllfl<Nte a< lion

Pan.al wmpo> te action
I
12
! 10
4
! 12
Total
34
3@ 10 tt 0 10 - 30 It 0 In
12
1 9 / 28
Fig. 10-13 ..
Venfy10g that the four studs between the concentrated loads samf> the hmttation on maximum spacing
(of e1ght \lab th1cknes e ). we obtain
IO.Oftx 12in/ft
s= = 30
in
-1 studs
<81 = 8 x 5 in = -10 in o.k.
10.14. Determine the design flexural strength of the W24X68 beam in Prob. 10.6 with full
composite acti on. Assume the beam is not shored during constru cti on.
From the Propertie Tables for W shapes in Part l of the A I SC LRFD Manu <li. for a W24 x68
h , )
) ( 640 - 1067
(- = 52.0 < -
640
=,
'· yF., y36
Thus, the web is compact. Accordingly. the design flexural strength io, cp,M,,. where ¢ > = 0.85 and M., is
calculated from the plastic tress di tribuuon on the compos•te sect1011. llowever, the ab ence of shoring
nece itate that the noncompo ite tee! beam be checked for adequacy to upport all loads applied
before the concrete has reached 75 percent of ib specified trcngth f'.
(a) De •gn flexural trength (M.) of the compo itc beam From the o,olutiOn to Prob. 10.6. the
max1mum pos iblc compressive force m the concrete lab C 0.85 [;A = 500 k1p ; the maximum
po •ble tensile force in the steel beam T = A,f; = 7:!-1 k1po,
To ati f} cqu1hbrium. T =C. The steel can be euhcr 1n tens1on only. or 10 part1altension and
compre\\ion. \\hereas the concrete cannot be in tcn ion. The olution i'> T = C = (500 +
724) klps/2 = 61:! kips. The plastic stre s di tnbuuon • a\ hown 10 Fig. 10-1-1. Becau e the net
compres 1ve force 10 the steel is Jess than the beam flange y•cld force (1.e.. [C = (612- 500) k1p
=
112 k•p J .o;; lb,t,F., = 8.96510 x 0.58510 x 36 k1ps/10 = 11{9 k1psj). the pl.htic neutral aXIS (PNA ) is
located in the upper beam flange.
144 COM POSITE MEMBERS [CIIAP. 10
0.'65 f
I I fa - 0.85 j;b1 500 kip>
c C b,uF 112 k1p;
T I - J
,
F
' (I - ll) P:\A - T
r. t. - b,u, - mF 77 kips
r• ..(. - b.t,)F e 3-161ups
J ' T, = b1 11F e 189 I.Jp,
I, t T, ..
F
Fig. J0- 14
The distance from the top of the beam to the PNA

C, 112kips ) .
a= = ,- .3.47
- 1 m
b, F. R.965 m X 36 kip /in
The contribution to ,.,r.
from each element of beam nr 'lab element (tcnsi l c or
compressive) force x the distance of element force from the PNA .
Comribmiom w 1.from
Comprc,-aon in the slab= C, ( +a)

4 in
= SIKJ kipS ( -:; + 0.347'" = 1174 k1p-in
X
)
<..omprc,\lon m upper beam Range = C

-
0 347 in = 19 k1p-in
= II:! lop\ X . ,
-
TcnMOn m upper beam flange=
T,(l -a)
'
2
(0.585- 0.347) in
= 77 kIps X .:.._--.,---'-- =9 k1p-i n
Tcn ion in beam web ='/ ( - 11)
= 14fl kip' ( 23.73'" - 0.347 = 39ll5 k1p-in

x )
in ::!
rension in lower beam flange= T,(d - -a)

. ( 0.585 in
= Illl) kip'>x 2.3 73m- -0.347 = 4364 kip-111
. )
in
2 9551 klp-10
M.- 9551 J(lp-m = 796 k1p-f1.

The dc,ign flexural strength rp,.w. = 0.85 x 79o k1p-ft o77 k1p-ft Th1s compares with
rp.M, 47!\ k1p-ft for a noncompo,ite W:!oxoX beam.
(b) Un\hnred \ICcJ beam upponing CO tructton load\.
CH AP. IOJ COMPOSITE MEMBERS 145
Deud
Load
= 6lllb/ft
Beam lh in th1cl.. ( 5.0)
175 lb/f
Slab 150-
1de
X X L() +- ft \\
t
2 3 lb/f t
-
ft 1:!in/ft 2
ConMruc!lon L1ve Load (as umed)
= 20 lb ( 5-.0) ft
X
1. = 70 lh /ft
0+ .
W ide
ft· :!
The factored umform load i> 1.20 .._ 1.6L.
lb lb
w,. = 1.2 X 243 -+ 1.6 X 70 = 404 lb/ft
ft ft
= 0.40 kipi>/ft
0.40 l..ip>/ft X (32.0

ft)1
M,. = R 52 kip-It
< cp,M,lor th.: W2 x6S t::\'en 1f L,, =the full 32-ft >pan. (Sec A ISC LRFD Manual, p. 3-7L)
The umhored n()ncomposire W24 x OR beam b adcquate during con\!ruction even if it i• not laterally
braced .
10.15. Determine the dcstgn flexural strength of the W24X6R beam in Prob. 10.9. The 4-in solid
concrete lab (in Fig. 10-7) is replaced with 2 in ol soltd concrete on a 2-in steel deck with ribs
perpendicular to the beam. as shown in Fig . 10-9
In the o.,olut10n to Prob 10.1 11 was determmcd that
(11) Bccauo.,c the web of a W:?Ax6ll beam 1• compact. the c.lc>1g.n nc\ural o.,treng.th io., q>.A1•• where
cp. = O.X5 and ,\f.. is calculated from the ph.-!lc >In!>' dl'tnhu!lon on the compO>He
...cellon.
(b) The un...hored noncomposite W24X6S beam can adequate!} >upport the -1n sohd concrete slab in
Fig 10-7. (II can sure! carry the lighter 2-in oolid >lab on :!-1n deck.)
Regarding AI•. from the sulu11on to Prob. 10.9 the maximum po»ible compressive force 1n the concrete
>lab C, = !l.R5f.'.A, =:!50 kip>: the maximum po>sible ten>Jie force in the >!eel beam T =A,F. =72
kip>. To >atisfy equ1libnum. T = C =( 50+ 7:!4) kips/2 = 487 kips. The pla!.!IC >tre'> diwibution is as
shown
in Fig. 10-15. Bccau;o;: the net compressive force in the tee! b greater than the beam flange yield force
(i.e., [C = (4S7- 250) kip!.= 237 kip )> [brtrF. = 8.965 in x 0.5851n x J6 kip;/in 1= 189 kips]), th e
plas t ic neutra l axi (PNA) is located in the web. Ignoring the web lilleb of the beam, the d istance f
rom the
1 I
c 085fbt' = 250kip>
0.85}'
I I C "'t.uF = 48 kip>
T T
I P:->A
.l- F
r.ill t 1t, - u)F = 298 ki
d .rtl· 189 ki
l(• ht,F
(d - 1tl - U)
r.
,
.... b
"' F
fig. 10-15
146 CO:\fPOSITE MEMBERS (CHAP. 10
bottom of the upper heam flange to the PNA approx1mately
=C. = 4X l-Ip\ =3 .
II -
t,..F; 0.41. m x.36 k.1p.,I .m • . . In
The contribution to M. from each element of beam or slab = element (tensile or compressive)
force x the dit ancc of clement force from the P:-JA
ContributiOns w .\1 frum
Compre ion 10 the slah -; C, (a + t, + 1 -)
20
= 250 k ips X ( 3.2 + () 5X5 + 4.0-
- ) 1n = 1696 klfHn
Compression in upper beam flange= c,(a + )

- 189
•
ki pS X
(
3.- + (J. 5!15) .
Ill
2
a
Compress1on m heam weh = C. ::;
32m
= 48 k1ps = 17
-
X 1
-
. . b d- 2t1 -a
T 1
cns10n 10 cam web- T.
., k' (23.73- 2 X 0.5K'i- 3.2) in
= 29o 1ps X = 2XX5 kip-in

-
' J
Tension in lower hcam flange= 'ft(d- 11 - a)

= 189 kip x (23 73- !x 0 585- 3.2) in = 3714 kip-in
9032 klp·ln
M. = 9032 k1p-in = 753 k1p-

ft
The design llexural Wt!ngth cfi >M. = U.R5 x 753 k1p-ft = 640 kip-ft. In comparison with the 677 kip-
ft design flexural trength m Prob. 10.14. the 640 k1p-ft determmed herein represent s a mere 5 percent
reduction. The inability of the 2 in of concrete within the deck to participate in composite action is not
very sign ificant.
10.16. Assume the concrcw-encased W8x40 in Proh. 10.2 and Fig. 10-4 is a beam. Determine the
design flexural strength cp,,M,, and M,. for bending about the major and minor axes.
A indicated m thl'> chapter. m the section ent itled Concrete-Encased Beams, concrete encasement
satisfymg the tated 1111111111um requ1rements prc,cnh hoth local and lateral-torsional buckling of the
beam. Of the two method gi,en in the A ISC LRFD Specification for determimng tfJ >M. for
concrete-enca\ed beam'>. the s1mpler one i based on the plastic stress distribution on the steel
section alone.
For x-axis bending (ro:gardless of L )
cp,M., = cp,MI' = rp,Z,F,.
0.90 x 39.8 in ' x 36
kips/in 1
12 in/ ft
= 107 klp-ft
CHAP. 10] COMPOSITE.:. MEMBERS 147
For .1-ax1., bending (regarc.lh! of L,.)
<f>,.\-1., = <f>,.Jip = •

Z, f
0.90 x ll:l 5 m ' x 36 kips/in:
12 in /ft
= 50 kip-
ft
10.17. Assume the concrete-enc<bed WHx40 tn Proh 10 2 and Fig. 10-4 i' a beam-column (1.c ..
subjected to combined flc\ure and comprc"•on). Determtne the design flexural strengths
<J>,M,., and <J>,.'vl,., for u'c in the tnteraction formula!..
Fur compo ite beam-column . q>,M, i determined a follow : rp,. = O.HS. and M. is calculated from the
plastic trc'' d istribut ion on the composite cro 'ec:t 1on. l l owever. if (P,./1/>, !',,) < 0.3. M,. is detcrmmed
by lin ear i nterpolat ion b twccn M. (calculated a., just described) at ( P,./¢>,. P,,) = 0.3. and M, for a
composite beam at P,, = 0.
A formula is gl\en 111 the Commentary on the AISC LRFD Spec1ticauon (p. 6-175 in the A ISC
LRFD Manual) for the determmauon of M.for c:omp<Nte heam-column., \\here 0.3 s(P,,/ ¢>. P.) <
1.0:
.\1 -L
.. f ., +-IUr:-:!c,)A,F,, ("-:'; ·1.F . t\,.1· ( C-/..J-1)
,
,
-)
+ --
3 - l7f,1r 1
wh en: A,. =web area ot t he enca cd tecl shape , in ': () for concrete-li llcd tubes
L = plastic section modulu' of the M el 'hape. in:
c, =average d1-.tance from the ten 1on and compres5ion faces to the nearest longitudinal
reinforcmg bar... m
h =width of the compthitc eros secuon perpendicular to the plane of bending. in
" = w1dth of the composite cross ecuon parallel to the plane of bending. in
From Prob. 10.2 an d Fig. 10-4: lr, - Jr .• = 16 in ,<', [ 1 '. + + ( /2)]

in= 2.3 in. A,= 4 x 0.60 in (for each
No . 7 bar) = 2.4 in'. Abo. f:
= 3.5 k i. F. = 3o k i, F., = 60 ksi. Z, = 39. H 111'. Z, = 18.5 in'. A. = (1\,
-
2 b1t1 ) = (II .7 in:- 2 X !UJ70 Ill X 0.560 in)= 2.66 111 .
For 0.3 < (Pul</>. P.) '- 1.0:
. , kaps I . .,
M.. =.W.H1n x3fl-:-;-+- x (lhm-2 x -.3111)
Ill 3
( kip., (If! in 2.66 in x 36 hi )
,
X 2.4 111 X 6 ) -:-:;- + - • , .
111· 1 1 .7 X 3.5 k 1p/ an ·x l61n
x _.,,on.m'x 36-k. I-P. '

Ill'
2050 kip-in = :!21 J..1p-lt

rp,.M,. -o xs x n 1 kip-ft - txx kip-tt
'6 kIp• + I X (h).111
M., - IlL 'i X .,
...,
.
111)
. '
1 11 - ?-X
an · 3
X ._,,4 I.ll X
60
kap' + (In 1n - 2.66 in" x 3;6_;"_'i )
in · :! l7 X 3.5 ktp\(111 X I() in
, . ' 36 J..ip
X .6() Ill X --;-
In'
= IHH3 ktp-in = 157 kip-ft
¢>hM,., = 0.1;!5 X 157 kip-ft = 134 ktp-
f't
l48 COMPOSITE MEMBERS [CH AP. 10
For P.. = 0, M.. = ZF, (as in Prob. 10.16 for thearne concrete-enca ed member)
= () F. = 0.85 X 39.!1 an ' X 36 kip\/an '
q>hMn, ·852' ., /f
1 -In t
= 101 kip-ft
= gcz F. = 0.85 x 18.5 an' x 36 kips/in,
rphM., 0. -' , , I" . If
-In I
= -t7 kip-
ft The results are ploued in Fig. 10-16.
188 kip-
ft
134 kip-fi
':£.
•
':£
101 klp-ft ...;
47 k.ip-fi
0 0
03 1.0 0.3 1.0
t P. o.P.l ( PJo, P.l
Fig. 10-16
10.18. The built-up beam in Prob. 6.1 and Fig. 6-3 acts compositely with a solid normal-weight
concrete floor slab (f; = 5.0 ksi . effective width= 100 in. thickness= 4 in). Assuming full
compo itc action and shored construction. determine the design flexural strength 1/Jt>Mn• ·
A review of the solution to Prob. 6.1 indicates that the web of the beam IS noncompact.
( = 12s.o) > ( = 106.1)

According ly. the design flexural strength is determined as follow!>: (/> o = 0.90. and M. is calculated from
the superposition of clastic stresses. considering the effects of sh oring. Correspond ing clast ic stress
diagrams for the shored and unshored cases arc shown in Fig. 10·17, wh ere
S, =section modulus of the bare steel beam. in'

s.,_,. . s,_, =section moduli of the transformed section . in '
11 = modular ratio= £/ Ec
M,. 1 =required flexural strength due to the (factored) loads applied before the concrete
has auained 75 percent off;
M ..! = required flexural strength due to the (factored) loads applied after the concre te has
ach1eved 75 percent off'
M.=total required flexural strength= (M.., + M,. 1)
If con\truction is bored. all loads are resisted by compo lle actton. The two limitations on flexural
trength are the maximum stresses in the steel and concrete From Fig. 10-17. the limiting conditions are
M.. srp,.M. = rp,.S,. ,.F..
M.< rp,.M. = rf! onS,. ,(0.85/;)
CHAP. 10) COMPOSITE MEMBI:.R S 149
1 I
Effective wtdth - h
j4 hln 1
- IJ
-'
lfl
"'·<0.85 f,)
' Y/
E._.A (eiJ'ttC neutral
-
.,.,"' trJn,lorrned >ection)
---
+
.If. _, F M,,
- c.,. '
S S,
' '
Shor u wn>t rucuon Unshorcd conMrucuon
Fig. 10-17
The modular ratto 11 = £!

£,
£, = w 1 "Vi:= 1451 'vs.o = 3904 ksi
19.000 ,
II= kst
=7 '<
·
3904 ksi
Th e transfor med section for this composite beam i s shown in Fig. 10-18.
h- IOOm .,
I = .l 10 - ' == YLL'i:::
. .. . -2• =f
/l II • )()() tn 7 - l = J3.5 10
tn
...
:: lr. L.
,,, • c !
"- 16.-l
""
J
A = 11
m·
m 4m • 5*
"...'. I* 6 on
I 4
JJ 5 tn X (4 tnl
I, =-
= 72 on'
I - f- -
c • ' c
.-....
t1 = 60 5 .",.', oct
tn
I, = 35.647 in' tC =::J _t 1.
Fig.10·18
Locattng the ela uc ncutral axis (ENA ). relauve to the cen trOid of the steel beam
y, A'"
r= (2<.1 + 2) 5-l In.
In X
- :14.6in
A +A, (54+ oo 5J m
By the parallel axb theorem, the moment of inertta of the tran formcd section about the ENA
1,,"" E Uu. +AD·)
= /, + A,D; + /, +A, D;'
= 35.647 in'+ 60.5 in' x ( 14.6 in)
+ 72 in'+ 54 in X ( 16.4 in)'
= 63.139 in'
150 COMPOSIT£ MEMBERS (CHAP. 10
The required 'ecuon moduli are

63, 139 InI , \
S , I• = 4•3•6t = 1441! tn
.,
.n
=63.13t)in' ,
5,, IR. in 3431 i1r
4
The design flexural strength of the composite section <f>,M. = the minimum of
0.90 x 144!1 1n ' x 36 k1p
/in'
</>S.. J= ., r =3910k1p-ft
1_ 1n/ 1
,. '\{' _ 0.90 X 7 .4 X 143I tn ' X_,:-( 0_._85_x_5_k....:ip s.;_/ _an...:.
)
<f>,ll.>. ,(IUt ) - .
l:!rn/ft
= 8093 kip-ft
The design flexural strength tp,M, = 3910 kip-ft.
Shear stud requirements for this noncompact compos1te member are the same as those for compact
members.
l0.19. Select an 8 in x H 111 concrete-filled structural steel tube for a required axial comprc•sive trcngt h
of 500 kips . Assume Kl.- 12.0 ft. F, = 46 ksi. 1:
= 3.5 ksi. normal-weight (145lb/fr') concrete.
Ans . TSR xRx •-
10.20. Determine the des1gn a WI4XI20 (A36 steel) encased in a 24inX24in

compressive strength of Re1nforccment is four No. 10 (Grade 60) bars
(f; = 5.0 k'-1) normal-weight concrete column A"ume K ,L, = K , L, = 13.0 ft.
longirud1nall} and :-.In tic\ at 16 in horiwntall
Ans. tp, P. - 251Xl k1p'
10.21. For the column 1n Prob 10 20. elect a bearing plate to tramfer to the concrete the load it must resist.
Ans. 18inx1Hin .
For Probs. 10.22 and 10.23. determine

(a) The effective slah width for composite action
(b) Vh (the total hori10ntal \hear force to be transferred) for full composite action
(c) The number of :-In-diameter shear stud' reqUJred 1f f .. = 60 ks1
10.22. A W24X55 rnterror beam 1s 'hO\\n 1n F1g 10-19 Steel is A36. beam span is 32ft 0 1n. and beam spacing
is 12ft 0 1n. The beam' ; re to act composite! with a S-in normal-weight concrete ,tab. consbting of 2 in
of solid concrete on a 1-rn tee! deck. with rib-. perpendicular to the beam; f.'= 5 k 1. Q, 1S.5 kips
per
stud. Am. (u) /1 =%i n. (b) Y;, = 583 kips . (<) 2n = 64 hear stud,.
10.23. A W24x55 edge beam i'> \huwn in Fi g. 10- 1 9. Steel j, A36. and the beam span i s 30f t 0 in . The beam is
to act compositely with the concrete and deck de,cribcd 1n Prob. 10.22.
Ans. (a) h =51 1n. (/I1 . = 43-1 k1p . (f) :!n 48 'hcantuds.
I
r----------------------------------- -------- -'2tn
L_---------------- ------------------T- 1 3tn
•=l ftOtn '= l ltOtn

"T"
fig. 10-19
10.24. Dctcrmmc thc 1.le 1gn flexural -.trength tf>,M. fur the W24x55 uncriur comptNte beam in Prob. 10.22.
Assume fu l l compo itc action. Am. tf>,M.. = 7Rl kip-ft.
10.25. De t ermine the dc ign llcxural trength </J,,M., for the W24X55 dg compo itc beam 1n Prob. 10.23.
As umc fu ll compo\itc action. /In,\. rp,M.. = 715 kip-ft.
10.26. I f the concrete-cnca>ed W 14x 120 in Prob. 10.20 is a beam -column with 1 ,/rp, P,, > 0.3. determ i ne
tf>1,M..,
and lj>,,M"'. AnJ. <j>,M.,, = 920 kip-ft. rp.M.. = 623 kip-ft.
10.27. A\ ummg the concrete-cnca!>ed W14X 120 in Prob 10.:!0 b a beam (1.c.. P,, = 0. ). dct crmme rp,M.,, and
tf>,.•w.. An1 . tf>,. w•. = 572 k1p-ft. 1/>h.w.. = 275 kip-ft
Chapter 11
Connections
NOTATION
A 1111 = cross-sectional area of the ba<;e material. in!

A =as defined 10 Eq. (11.10). in-'
11
Aq =gross area subjected to tension, in
2 2
A,= net area subjected to tension, 1n
A, = net area subjected to shear. in 2
2
1\1, , = projected bear i ng area. in
2
A,, = gross area subjected to shear. in
A .. =effective cross-sectiona l area of the weld, in 2
A 1 = area of steel bearing on a concrete support, in 2
A 2 = maximum area of supporting surface that is geomet rica lly sim i l ar to and
2
concentric with the loaded area, in
8 = width of column base plate. in
h1 -width of column flange. in
C = d1stance between the centers of bolt holes. in
C =clear distance between holes. in
C 1 • C . C, = tabulated values for use m Eqs. !11.2) to (11.·.1).
10
c =as defined in Eq. [Jl.JJ]. in
d =nominal bolt diameter, in= depth of column section. in
d1, =diameter of the standard size hole, in
F,J\1 = nominal strength of the base material. k i
Frn = nominal ten!>ile strength of the weld metal. ksi
F,,- specified minimum tensile strength, ks•
F., = nominal strength of the weld electrode, ksi
F,. =specified minimum yield stress, ksi
J: = the specified compressive strength of t he concrete, ksi
L = distance in the line of force from the center of a bolt h ole to an edge. in
m = as defined in Fig. 1 1-6. in
N = length of column base plate. in
n = as defined in Fig. 11-6. in
P = force transmitted b} one fastener to the critical connected part. kips
P,. = as defined 10 Eq. [11.9]
P,, =nominal strength for bearing on concrete. kips
P,, =reqUired column ax1al l>t •ength. kipo,
R,. = nominal strength, k1ps
t = thickncs of the connected part.
in
t1 = thicknes!> of column flange. in
152
CHAP. 11) CONNECTIONS 153
tP =thickness of plate, in
tf1 = resistance factor
4>c = resistance factor for bearing on concrete
¢F8,1 =design strength of the base material, ksi
q,F,. = dcstgn strength of the weld electrode, ksi
¢Pp =design strength for bearing on concrete, kips
¢Rn =design strength, kips
INTROD UCTION
The types of connections used in steel structures are too numerous to cover fully in a single
chapter. H owever, the provisions of Chap. J in the AISC LRFD Specification are the basis for
connection design in LRFD. The present chapter has a twofold purpose: ( I) to outline the basic
LRFD Specification requirements for connections and (2) to provide some common examples of
connection design. For additional information, the reader is referred to Part 5 of the AISC LRFD
Manual , whi ch contains nearly 200 pages of data on connections. Although there are a number of
excellent booh on structural steel connections. nearly all arc ba ed on allowable strcs design (ASD). It is
anticipated that similar books based on LRFD will be published in the next few years.
The most common connectors for steel structures are welds and bolts, which arc discussed in the
following sections.
WELDS
Of the various welding procedures. four are acceptable m structural work : shtelded metal arc.
submerged arc. flux-core arc. and gas metal arc. All four mvolve fusion welding by an elect ric arc
process; that is, the heat of an electric arc simultaneously melts an electrode (or welding rod) and
the adjacent steel in the parts being joined. The joint is formed from the cooling and solidification of
the fused material. The American Welding Society Structural Welding Code-Steel (AWS Dl.l)
specifies th e electrode classes and welding processes that can be used to achieve "matching" weld
,t =:!T: ===4t -
a...
1=--f -·:C:
-
(tl) (h)
I I
7
Ill
4-
I I
·1 ==r==it -... tt::-::!:.J ==:::y, t-

t .!t
IC'I ld)
It'I
fig. 11-1 Structural welds: (a) complete-penetrauon grOO\e weld. (b) parual-penetrauon groove weld ;
(c) longtludmal fillet weld ; (d) transverse fillet weld: (e) plug or ,lot w eld
!54 CONNECflONS (CHAP. II
metal. that is, weld metal that has a nominal tensile strength Fcxx similar to that of the base steel
being connected.
As illustrated in Fig. I 1-1, three types of structural welds are normally used in building
construction: groove (complete and partial penetration), fillet (longitudinal and transverse). and plug
or slot welds. The design strengt h of welds is the l ower value of
and
Table 11- 1 Design Strength of Welds
Nominal Required Weld

Types of Weld Resbtance Strength Strength
and Stress Material Factor 4> F,.., or F. Level
Complete-Penetration Groove Weld
Tension normal to "Matching "

weld effective area Base 0.90 F,. must be u ed
Compression normal tO Weld metal with a

effective area Base 0.90 F, trength level
equal to or less
Tension or compre Mon than "matching"
parallel to axi of weld may be u ed
Shear on effective area Base 0.90 0.60F,

Weld electrode O.!lO 0.60FEXX
Partial-Penetrati on Groove Welds
Compression normal to Weld metal with a

effective area strength level equal
Base 0.90 F, to or less than
Tension or compreSSIOn "matching" weld
parallel to axis of weld metal may be used
Shear parallel to ax!\ Base

of weld Weld electrode 0.75 0.60FE.\'X
Tension normal to Base 0.90 F,.

effective area Weld Electrode 0.80 0.60Fux
Fillet Weld
Stress on effective Base Weld mew! with a

area Weld electrode 0.75 0.60Fcxx strength level equal
to or less than
Tension or compres ion Base 0.90 F,
..
"matchmg weld
parallel to axis of weld metal may be u ed
Plug or Slot Welds
Shear parallel to faying Base Weld metal with a

surfaces (on effective Weld electrode 0.75 0.60FEXX strength l evel equa l
area) to or les than
"matching" weld
metal may be used
CIIA P. l l] CONNECTlONS F8 \l
=
nomi
nal
when applicable. where stren
gth
of the base material, ksi !55
F.. = nom•nal strength of the weld electrode. ksi
A'"' =cross-sectional area of the base material. in
A,. =effective cross-sectional area of the weld. in 2
rp = resistance factor.
\lormal throat ,.,
t (.
I
P..:ncu ..altPn
Thwat 'urm...J t,u.,_.1 'It\!
'umuJ thr, ..n '-I/\'

L>c."\'f'·p:nt:tr-..tum thrtlat ,tze
>'A.
Gn '"' .m k
C<l I
:
Gn"'" c anti ""'ell
angle
Spac r har
Gr<M)\e Bc, el angle
lace
I
-
1----'-\
Bac mg bar
opcnmg
R,'''' .. Rom opcnmg
Preparation
Weld lace Retnturccmcm \\ cld '"c "[i: -Groove > Le

Root face Grome angle
Fcllet \lle
Pcnctraunn
c!
tt\J,tnn / -'-- :>--'r--l
Rnnt t ;:u:t:
UO
F \\dd 1hrua1
Ro<>t Ro.)l 01--
Bacl-cng 'lead \\ eld opemng • m 1:11 1hrua1
"'e
l-ull penetr.ttoun Pancal penelrall<>n Pancal penetraunn
I"hen recnto"cng Ill let ., ,pc.-cfied 1
cl>l
Fig . 11-2 Weld nomenclature: (a) fillet weld : (b) groove weld
156 CONNECTIONS [CHAP .
11
Values for ¢, F8M, and F.., are given in Table 11-1, which is Table J2.3 in th e AISC LRFD
Specification.* A,. the effective cross-sectional areas of weld to be used in conjunction with F.., are
the effective length tim es the effective throat thickness, for groove and fillet welds; and the nominal
cross-sectional area of the hole or slot , for plug welds. The nomenclature for fillet and groove
welds is shown in Fig . 11-2, reprinted from the A ISC publication Engineering for Steel
Construction (1984). • Minimum sizes of groove and fillet welds are given in Tables 11-2 and
11-3, which are Tables J2.4 and J2.5 in the AISC LRFD Specification. • For both groove and
fillet welds, the tabulated minimum weld size is determined by the thicker of the two parts
joined. However, the weld size should not exceed the thickness of the th inner part joi ned.
Additional restrictions on welds are given in Sec. J2 of the A ISC LRFD Specification.
Table 11-2 Minimum Etrective Throat Thickness of Partial

Penetration Groove Welds
M aterial Thickness of Thicker Minimum Effective Throat

Part Joined, 1, in Thickness,• in
I
8
t
.a
-·
'< l t<lz
1<t<
!
I
I
•5
1<tsJ! 10
'8
-
l < 1s2!
2! < 1 s6
!
'
t > 6 •
' Leg dimension.
Table 11-3 Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
Material Thickness of Thicker Part Jomed. t, in Minimum Size of Fillet

Weld.• in
I
I S!
I
•
" < t .S: lh
I
2'<t<.'. •
I> 2 .
10
' Leg d1mens1on of fillet welds.
Most common welded connections used in buildings have been designated by AISC and AWS as
prequalified, that is. exempt from tests and qualification if they have been properly designed and
detailed. Examples of prequalified welded jo ints and standard welding symbols are given in the
AISC LRFD Manual , beginning on page 5-177.
BOLTS
Bolts consist of a cylindrical shank (partially threaded to receive a nut) with an attached head .
High-strength bolts, type A325 or A490, are required in most structural applications; they must be
suffici ently tightened to achieve the minimum bolt tension values listed in Table 11-4 (which is Table
13.1 in the AISC LRFD Specification *). For those cases not included in Sec. 11.9 of the AlSC
' Reproduced with the permio;s1on of AISC.

CHAP. IJI CONNECTIONS 157
LRFD Specification. ordinary A307 machine bolts may be used; the) are tightened to a "snug-tight"
condiuon only. H1gh-strength bolh must compl) ''ith the Re earch Council on Structural Connection!
> Spenficarion for Srrucwral Joims Using ASTM A325 or A-190 Bofrs. which appears in Part 6 of the
AISC LRFD Manual
Table J 1-4 Minimum Boll Tension , kips*
Bolt SiLe. in A325 Bolts A·NO Bolt
.I' 12 15
H 19 24
28 35
'
1
39 41.)
•
1 51 64
t! 56 80
71 102
1'
1 ' 85 121
1 103 I-IX
• Equal to \1.711 of minimum tensile \trength of bolh. roundco.J

off to ncare t J-.p.as spec1fied in AS.! M specificallOn\ for A325
<1nd A-190 bolts wuh Ut-;C threads
Bolts may be loaded in tension (i e.. parallel to the1r axes). shear (i.e.. perpendicular to their
axes). or a combinauon of shear and tension. The strengths of A307. A325. and A490 bolts are given
in the accompan)ing tables as follows.
AISC LRFD
This Chapt Specification Subject
er Re£.•
De'i rn h!n\lh: \trength:
Table 11-5 Table J3.2 de ign ho.:ar '>trcngth
Table 11-6 Table 13.3 Tensile \lrc\s limit for
combined \hear and tension
Table 11-7 Table J3.4 Nominal lip-t.:ntical
h.:ar ;trength of
high-.,trcngth ho lts
' Reproduced wuh the permi\>ion of
AISC.
For bo l ts loaded in tension only. the design tensile strength is equal to ¢ multiplied by the nominal
tcn!>ilc st rength. as given in Table ll-5. For bolts loaded in shear only, the design shear strength is
equal to¢ mult iplied by the nominal shear strength, given in Table 11-5. I f a combination of tension
and shear acts on a bolt. the maximum tensile stress is dcterrmned from Table 11-6 and the
maximum shear tre !>. lrom Table J J-5. In all cases, tre scs (in h1) arc converted to forces by
multiplying by the nominal cross-sectional area of the bolt (ig.nonng the threads).
A special category of sftp-cruica/ JOints is recognized by the A I SC' LRFD Specification. Where
joint slippage b undesirable (e.g.. if there are frequent load reversab. leading to the possibility of
fatigue), the des1gner rna) specify ..slip-critical" high-strength bolts. Because this is a serviceability
criterion. the (unfactored) service loads are used in conjunction w1th Table 11-7. If the load
combination includes either \\ ind or seismic load together with hve load. the total !>ervice load may
be multiplied by 0.75. To determine tlte design shear strength. the nominal values in Table 11-7 are
multiplied by ¢ = 1.0 (except ¢ = O.!S5 for long-slotted hob if the load t!> parallel to the slot). If
a
bolt in a slip-critical connection IS subjected to a service tensile force T. the nominal shear strength
158 CO NECTlONS (CHAP. II
Table ll-5 Design Strength of Fasteners
Shear Strength in
Bearing-Type
Tensile Stren gth Connections
Nominal Nominal
Resi!>tancc Strength. k Resistance Strength k
Descnpuon of Fa tener Factor tp · Factor tp i
A307 bolt> 0.75 45.0 0.60 27.0
A325 bolts. when threads are

nor excluded from hear planes 90.0 0.65 54.0
A325 bolt . when thread are

excluded from 'hear planes 90.0 72.0
A490 bolts. when threads are
1101 excluded from hear plane> 112.5 67.5
A490 bolts. when thread , arc

excluded from the \hear planes 112.5 90.0
Threaded parts meeung the

requirements of Sec. A3. when
thread; are 1101 excluded from the
shear plane 0.75F,, 0.45F,,
Threaded pam meeting thl'

requirements of Sec. A3. when
thread are excluded from the
shear plane, 0.75F. Mor:
A502. Grade I, hot-dnven rivets
45.0 36.0
A502. Grade'> 2 and 3. hot-driven

rivets 60.0 48.0
Table Ll -6 Tension Stress Limit (F,), ksi, for Fasteners in Bearing-Type Connections
Threads Includ ed in the Threads Excluded

Description of Fasten<!rs Shear Plane from the Shear Plane
A307 bolts 39 - l.R[. s30
A325 bolt 85- 1.8/. s 68 85-1Af,s68
A490 bolts 106 - 1.8[.. s lW 106- 1.4[.. s84
Threaded parts A449 holts

0.73f , - U!/.. s 0. 56F,, 0.73F,, - 1.4/., s 0. 56F,,
over 1 -in diameter
A502 Grade I rivet 44 - 1.3/.. <: 34
A502 Grade 2 •wets 59- 1.3J., < 45

CHAP. Iii CONN ECTIONS 159
in Table 11-7 i., multiplied b} the reduction factor (I- TIT >). v.here f, • th e minimumpretension
force for th at bolt in Table 11-4.
Table tl-7 Nomi na l Slip-Critical Shear Strength of H ij!h-Strcn th Botts•
Nommal !>hear Strength. \.. t
Type of Standard-Size Over tzcd and Short- Slotted L.ong-Siollcd

Bolt Ifole\ llolt:\ llolcst
A325 17 15 12
A490 21 IX 15
·Cia" A (\lip cocfilcien L 0.33). Clean mill scal e and biH\t ck;mcd 'urfacc wi1h cln;., A COllll ll!l,\. For <.lcsign \trc ngth'
wiLh other coa tmgs. ec RC'SC l.oad (lilt/ Rnwance racwr Dc1ig11 .\pectjinlltu/1 for Strucwral J ouus Usml( ASTM
A32.i or A./()(1 /Jolt .
t rahulatcd value' arc for the ca e of load applicauon tr;lnswrsc Ill the \lot. When the
load ts para llel to the 'lot. mu i L 1plv tabulated values by 0.!\5
Bolt bearing :>trengt h , mmimum spacing. and minimum edge distance depend on the dimensions
of the bolt h ole!>. Nominal dtmens10ns for standard. mer'>ite. hort- lotted. and long-'>lotted holes
are given tn Table ll-8 (Table J3.5 in the AISC LRFD Specification • ). Unli ke '>tandard holes, use of
the other t) pes of holes requtres approval of the designer and b subJeCt to the restrictions in Sec.
J3.7 of the A I SC LRFO Specification.
Table 11-8 Nominal Hol e Dimension ,, i n
Hole D1mcn,ion' tn
Bolt Standard Q,ersile Short-Slot l .ong-Siot

Diameter. m (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width X Length) (Width X I ength )
--
., X
I
" II
• .. I '
l
.< lh
'1 ...' Jfl
II X 7
ltl If\
II
X
I•
• I<•
•• II> ' It· X '"
J\ " "' lhxl "lh X I '
"
1 1
•'
II>
I '• ' X 1 I' 2'
IIt· IX
I l lh,'h 1l Ih H
1 1, X 1 1 lh X -
HI
.,I
IA tl + ,'.. d+ (d + , )X (a r ) (c/ + .',)X (2.5 X c/)
Two bolt-spacing sch emes are possible.

(I) In the preferred scheme.
C>3d and L 1.5d
where C = dtstance between the centers of bolt holes. m
L =distance in the line of force. from the center of a holt hole to an edge. in
d =nom inal diameter ol the bolt, tn.
The design bearing strength qJR,. for each of f11·o or more bolt.\ 111 the /me of fo rce must be
checked (even tf the connect!On tS slip-cnttcal): ¢ = 0.75. For .,tanda rd or short-slotted
• Reproduced "llh the pcrmi\\oon of AISC'

160 CONNECT IONS [CHAP. 11
holes.
Rn = 2.4 (13-la)
dtF,,
For long-slotted holes perpendicular to the load
Rn = 2.0 dtF;. (J3-Jb)
If deformation of the bolt hole need not be considered, then, in all cases
Rn = 3.0 dtF,, (13-Jd)
I n these equations, 1 is the thickness of the connected part. in. and F" is the specified tensile
strength of the connected part, ksi.
(2) I n the alternate scheme. the distance between the centers of bolt holes
2.67d [11.1]
c;!!; p dh
+? [11.2]
cp F,..1 -
+Ct
[ ll .3]
[I1.4]
The design bearing strength must be checked (regardles of whether the connection is slip-
critical). Where L < l.Sd. the design bearing strength (for each of one or more bolts in the
line of force) is ¢Rn, where if>= 0.75 and
Rn = LIF,, (J3-1c)
In the preceding equations

P =force transmitted by one fastener to the critical connected part. kips
dh = diameter of the standa rd size hole, in
C' = clear distance between boles, in
Ct = 0 for standard holes ; otherwise use the value in Table 11-9 (Table 13.6 in the AlSC
LRFD Specification*)
Table 11-9 Values of Spacin g Increment C., in
Slotted lloles
Parallel to Line
Nominal Perpendicular of Force
Diameter of Oversize to Line
Fastener Holes of Force Short Slots Long Slots•
<-s'
I
8
3
0 '
••
I
I'd - I
1 lfl
I () • 1,'6
••
! • 0 •'• I!d- 1
-<IK!
• When length of slot is less than maximum allowed in Table II·!!. C1 ma) be reduced
by the difference bct"'eeo the maumum and actual slot lengths
• Reproduced with the permi<> ion of AISC.

CH AP. 11] CONNECTIONS 161
C = 0 for standard holes: otherwise use the value in Table 11-10 (Table J3.8 in t he A
lSC LRFD Specification*)
Table 11-10 Values of Edge Distance Increment C1,in
Sloued Holes
Nominal Diameter Perpendicular to Edge

of Fastener,
In Oversized Holes Parallel t o
Short Slots Long Slots• Edge
s' L I
' 10 s
1 I !
K :d 0
I J
-; I K lh
• When length of lot is less than maximum aUowablc ( cc Tabl e I 1-8). c,_
muy be reduced by one-half the difference between the m;aximum and actual
>lot length
C,=the value in Table 11-11 (Table J3.7 in the A I SC LRFD Specification*)
Table JJ-11 C3: Minimum Edge Distance, in (Center of Standard Hole to Edge of
Connected Part)
Nom mal At Rolled Edge of

Rivet or Bolt At Sheared Plate . Shape or Ba
Diameter. in Edges or Ga Cut Edges
,I '
1
8 •7
" 1 K
I
•7 11 1
K 1! lk
J 1! J!
1 2 I'l
1 !I 2{ 1
>I! H X diameter 1! x diameter
Regard less of which bolt spacing scheme is selected, the maximum edge distance is
< { l2t
L- 6.
tn
CONNECTING ELEMENTS AND MAIN MEMBERS AT CONNECTIONS

Connecting elements include stiffeners. gusset plates, angles. brackets, and the panel zones of
beam-to-col u mn connect ions. Considering the possible modes of failure. the following limit
states should be examined for applicabilit} to connecting elements and the adjacent parts of
main
• Reproduced wuh the permiSSIOn of AISC.

162 CONNECfiONS [CHAP. ll
members. The design strength is cJ>R,, wher e

(J) For tensile yielding
(15-1}
(2) For tensile fracture
(15-2)
(3) For shear yie

lding
4> = 0.90
(15-3)
R, = 0.6A,.gFY
(4) For sh ear

fracture
4> = 0.75
(14-1)
R, =
0.6A...,Fu
(5) For bl ock shear ruptu

re
4> = 0.75
R,= the greater value
of (C-14-
0.6A,,8 Fy + A ,F11 1)
{
0.6A...,F., + 8 (C-14-2)
A
F.
In the preceding equations:
Ag =gross area subjected to tension, in1
A, = net area subjected to tension, m 2
2
A,.K =gross area subjected to shear, in
A," = net area subjected to shear, in2
An explanation of block shear rupture follows. At beam end connections where the top flange is
coped (as in Fig. 11-3) and in simil ar situations, one plane is subjected to shear while a perpendicular
plan e is subjected to tension. Failure can occu r in one of two ways: fracture of the (net) section in
tension accompanied by yielding of the (gross) section in shear (E4. (C-14-!)l. or f r act ure of the
(net) section in shear accompanied by yielding of the (gro,s) section in tension lFq. (C-14-2)]. The
design t rength is based on the larger-capacity failure mode. which governs.
Fa1lure by teanng
Shear area out of shaded pon1on
-
I.7
- Tens1le area _.....-
Fig. 11-3 Block shear rupture

CHAP. II] CONNECf lONS 163
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
The discu!>sion in the earlier sections of this chapter concerned the design strengths of the
components of connect ions: the connectors (i.e.. welds and bolts) and the connecting elements
(stiffeners. gusset plates. etc.). The required strength of a connection is determined from an analysis
of the entire structure with th e factored loads acting on it. A detailed analysis of the connection
produ ces required strengths for its components.
Analysis. design. and construction must follow consiste nt assumptions. Connections. for
example, m ay or may not transfer moment. Whichever assumpt ion was made by the enginee r
must be commun icated to the contractor . Use of a type of connection not intended in th e analysis
and design will cause a redistribution of internal forces in th e stru ct ure , leading to overstress and
possible failure.
Examples of shear and moment connections for beams are shown in Figs. 11-4 and 11-5. The groove-
welded splice in Fig. ll-4(a) develops the full strength of th e beam and transfers the full mom ent
and shear. H owever, the shear splice in Fig. ll -4(b) i s not capab le of transf erring any sign
ificant moment. Unless ot herwise specified on the design drawings, splices are groove-welded with
full-pen etrati on welds. Regard ing beam end connections, th e simpl e connection s in Fig . 11-S(a) will
only transmit shear. To transfer moment requires moment connections similar to the ones shown in
Fig. 11-S(b ). When not indicated otherwise, beam-to-beam and beam-to-column connections are assumed
to be simple shear connections. Where moment connection!> are required. they should be spec1fied t
ogether with their required flexural strengths.
I
z
'
r-
• 11 •
• II • i
I
I
Ia)
Fig. 11-4 Be<1m splice : (a) groove-welded moment phce ; (h) bolted hear pi icc
r;- t-;- .
• •
...!... ..!..
•
'r
'
Double
/
Welded Boiled
Sealed I
angle V I
(uI Ch)
t'ig. 11.5 Beam-to-column connections: (a) simple (shear) connection,, (h) moment connections
I n connection!> combining bolts with welds, only high-strength bolts designed as slip-critical can
share the load with the welds. Otherwise, the welds alone must resist all connection forces.
Groups of welds or bolts that transmit axial force into a member should preferably be
proportioned so that the center of gravity of the group coincides with the centroidal axis of the
member. Likewise, when th ree or more axially loaded members meet at a JOi nt . their centroidal axes
should preferably intersect at one point. Wh ere eccent ri cities are un avoidable, the additional
mom ents they cause must be included in the design of the members and the connections.
164 CONNECT10NS [CHAP. 11
BEARING ON STEEL AND CONCRETE

The design bearing strength for steel bearing on steel is <fJR,.. wher e <P = 0.75
R,. = 2.0FyApb (/8-1)
and Apb = the projected bearing area. in 2 •
For steel bearing on concrete (e.g.. column base plates bearing on footings), the design bearing
strength is <P PP, where <P = 0.60
0.85 [;A (for bearing on the full area of concrete) [ 11.5]
1
(for bearing on less than the full area of concrete) [J1.6]

pp = 0.85 [;_A 1
wh ere [; =specified compressive strength of the concrete, ksi

A 1 = area of steel bearing on a concrete support , in 2
A 2 = maximum area of supportin g surface that is geomet ri cally simil ar to and
concentric
with the l oaded area, in 2
and
(; 4,_ s 2.
VA .
The design of a column base plate involves
(a) The determination of its length N and width B. By setting th e design bearing strength
A1 •
(b) The det ermination of its thi ckness tP. The thickness of base plates is not covered in the
A ISC LRFD Specification. However, according to the Column Base Plates Design
Procedure in Part 2 of the AlSC LRFD Manual . base plate thickness tr (in inches) is the
largest value obtained from the following three formulas .
2P,, 2P,, 2P"
1p =m tp = t1, = c [11. 7]
0.9F;BN 0.9F;BN' 0.9f; A
.
n
H
where 8, d, b1, m, and n (all in inches) are as defined in 11-6. and
N,
Fig.
[11.8]
p = b--
o BN "
[11.9]
A= Po > P,,
H 0.6(0.85VA2/bj<f[ ;) -0.6(1.7[;)
c = [(d + b - r ) -7 .,...,) 2.-_-4.,..,(...,.A_" t....,.b....),. J
V"( d +--:b---
1 1 1 1 [11.10]
1
The design of bearing plates for beams is covered in the next chapt er.
b,
.---- t -,-----,1
-.
Ill
t
t,
-- Ill
------ ------
.. n T
.. n .. ... 0.80b .. ....
1 1
8
Fig. 11-6 Column base plate

CHAP . II] CONNECTIO S 165
Solved Problems
11.1. ln Fig . 11-l(a) and (b), the plates are 3 in wide and in thick. The base material is A36 steel ,
for which the matchin g weld is E70 (FEXx = 70 ksi). Octennine the design tensi le
strengths (kips) for
(a) The complete penetration groove weld in Fig. 11-l(a).
(b) The minimum partial penetration groove weld. as in Fig. 11-l(b).
(a) For ten 10n normal to a complete penetration groove weld (according to Table 11-1). the deMgn
trength
cf>Fa,1 = 0.90F, = 0.90 X 36 ksi = 32.4 ksi
In kips
cf> P,= cf>FIHIAIIM ='·' .4 3·1n 0 .75 t·n
-k:i-p;"s X X
Ill"
= 72.9 kips
(Note: A' indicated tn Table 11-1. matching E70 weld must be used with A36 steel in thi' case.)
(b) The minimum effect throat thickness of partial-penetration groove weld (as given tn Table 11-2) is
,:; tn f
or ,-t.n pates.
According to Table Il-l. for tension normal to the effective area of a partial penetration
groove weld. the de,1gn Mrength os the lower 'alue of
t/>Fn 11 A 11 11 = cpF,A 11 11 = 0.90 X 36 kip/In. X :\on X in= 72.9 kips

ct>f:A. = cf>(0.60f.n·lA .. =0.80(0.60 x 70 k1ps/in ) x 3 in x lin
= 25.2 kips
if an E70 el ectrode i' used. For an E70 dectrode, the design tensile strength is 25.2 kips.
As indicated in Table 11-1. an E60 electrode (with strength Frx:o: = 60 ksi, le'>s than the
matching E70 weld metal) may also be used. H the weld IS E60, the design strength of the weld
cpF,.A. agatn controls: cf>F.A. = 0.80(0.60 F, 11 ) x 3 in x in. where F, 11 = 60 l-..\1. 1/>f.A.
=
21.6 kip\ 1f an E60 electrode 1\ used.
11.2. Repeat Prob . 11.1 for plates of unequal thickness: 1 in and n in.
The effective throat thid..ness for a compl et e-penetrat ion groove weld is the thickn es., of the thinner
plate joined , or 1 in . For tension normal w the effective area of a complete penetration groove weld, a
matching E70 elect rode mu t be used. The design ten i lc trength is
cf>fm 1A 1111 = cf>f;A 8 11 = 0.90 X 36 k1p/ in , X 3 in X 1 in

= 18.2 kips
11.3. A ve rtical complete-penetration groove weld is used to JOtn the two halves of a W24xl76
beam (A36 steel ). Determine the design shear strength of the web splice.
According to Table Il-l. for hear on the effect ive area of a complete-penetration groove weld, the
design strength is the Iowa value of
<J>r ,- 1= o.90(0. 60F.) = u. 9 x 0.6 x 36 k si = 19.4 ksi

cf>f;, = 0.80(0.60F,x.d
= {0.8 x 0.6 x 70 ksi = 33.6 k i for E70
0.8 x 0.6 x 60 hi = :!8.8 ks1 for E60
166 CONNECTIONS (CHAP. 11
Regarc.lle of whether an E60 or E70 electrode is U!>ed. the Mrength of the ba c material in the web of
the W::!.Jx 176 beam (cpFn" = 19.4 ksi) go\erns.
<f>V. = 19.4 ksi x dr.
= 19.4 ki s x 25.24 m x 0.750 m = 36llk•P'
m ·
The tabulated de ign hear strength of a W2-tx76 beam (on p . 3-31 of the A1SC LRFD Manual) is. in
fact. 36ll k1p .
11.4. Two vertical partial-penetration groove welds. each with an effective throat thickness of
1in, arc used to join the two halves of a W2 x 176 beam Determine the design shear
strength of the web splice.
According to Table 11-1, for ;hear parallel to the axes of partial-penetration groove welds the following
l im 1t ;tatcs hould be con!.idercd:
Shear fracture of the base material (Eq. (14-1)]
<f>Rn = 0. 75(0.6A...,F,,)
= 0. 75 x 0.6(25.24 in x 0. 750 in) x 58 i s
m
= 494 kips
Shear y1elding of the base material (Eq. (15-J)]
cpR.= 0.90(0.6A
,.•F.)
=0.9 X0.6(25.:!41n X 0.750m) X 361..i <;

m·
= 368 kips a' in Prob . 11.3.
Shear yieldmg of the weld (Table I J-1)
</>F. = 0.75(0. 60F, n)
= { 0.75 X 0.6 X 70 k 1i1.5 k i for 1:::70
IJ.75 x 0.6 x flO k\1 = 27.01-.\1 for E60
The '>hear area for the two partial-penetration groove weld-." d x 2 x! in; 1.e.
A.= 25.24 in X 2 X 0.25 in= 12.62 In
31.5 -k-:i--p7"' x 12.62.m'· = for E7Cl

398 k1.ps
m•
kips ,
27.0 --:--T" X 12.62m·-34 1 !..1psfor E60
m·
In condu,ion. the des1gn shear strength at the !>plice b
368 kip'> (based on the limit state of shear yielding of the b<l\t: material) for c70 electrodes
341 !..1p'> (based on the limit state of shear y1elding of the "eld matenal) for E60 electrodes
U.S. In F1g. Il-l (c). the plates are 3 in and 4 in "'ide and in th1ck . The base material is A36
steel.
The two fillet welds arc each 3 in long. Determine the design tensile strength of the splice for
the minimum si..:e fillet weld: (a) E70. (b) E60.
Accord10g to Table 11-3. in is the minimum size fillet weld for -10 plates. The effccuvc area of
weld equal<; liS length ume the effective throat thicknes . A' hown 10 Fig. 11-7. a fillet "eld i
approximated
CHAP. II] CONNECTIONS 167
Throat = 0.707 x leg
,...Leg ..,
Fig. 11-7
as an equal-leg right triangle. The throat thickness (which is the minimum distance from the root of the
joint to the face of the fillet weld) is calculated as 0.707 times the leg dimension . In this case, for a
leg dimen sion of !in
Throat= 0.707 x 0.25 in = 0.18 in
The total effective area of weld
A,.= 2 X 3 in X 0. L8 in= 1.06 in:
According to Table ll-1, the de ign strength for fillet welds is
¢F. = 0.75(0. 60F£xx) = 0.45F£xx
(a) For E70 electrodes
kips _ kips
1/JF,. = 0.45 X 70-:----;- = 31.) -:---;-
m· m·
In kips. the design strength
cpf-.,.A,. = 31.5 -k:-i-p--;s- x I.06 ·m ' = 3.3 .4 kt·ps

m·
(b) For E60 dectrodes
kips kips
rf>F.. = 0.45 X 60-. , = 27 .0 -:---;-
tn" m·
In kips. the design
strength
1/J F•..A"- ?7 .0 kips X I.06·In - 28 • 6 k'tpS

m·
As indicated in Table Il - l , for tension paralle l to the axis of the weld. the design tensile strength of the
plates should also be checked, as follows.
kips kips
rJ>FnM = 0. 90F. = 0.90 X 2 = 32.4 -. ,
36.-
m m·
1/JP.= 1/JFn,,,A/JM
where A 11,., is the cross-sectional area of each plate . For the narrower plate , A""'= 3 in x in= 2.25 in• 1
rpP.= 32.4 ki s x 2.25 in 2 = 72.9 kips

m·
Since (¢P. = ¢F8,A 11..,) > F..A. the design tensile strengths of the plates are not critical in this case.
11.6. In Prob. 11.5, determine the design tensile strength for the maximum size of fillet weld :
(a) E70. (b) E60.
According to Sec. J2.2(b) of the AISC LRFD Specification. the maximum size of fillet weld s
Equals plate thickness. if <1 in
Equals plate thickness -111 , in. if plate thickness 2::! in
168 CONNECTIONS (CHAP. 11
In thts case. for a -in plate, the maximum fillet weld= C - , )m = 0.75 in- 0.06 in= 0.69 in. For a
leg dimension of 0.69 in. throat= 0.707 x 0.69 in= 0.49 in. The total effecuve area of weld A = 2 x 3
in x
0.49 in= 2.92 in 2
(a) For E70 electrodes. ¢F.= 31.5 ksi. as determined m Prob . 11.5. In ktps. the design strength
<PF A. = 31.5 k i x 2.92 in'= 91.9 kips. However . since the dc\tgn ten tle trengt h of the narrower
(3-in) plate is less, it governs. As determmed for Prob . 11.5. ¢P. = 72.9 kips. based on the limit
state of yieldmg of the plate.
(b) For E60 electrodes, ¢F.= 27.0 ksi. as determined in Proh. I 1.5. In kip . the design strength
_ kips
? 2 -78.8
</>F.A.- 27.0-:-;-X 2.9-tn _ .
ktpS
m·
Again. the design tensile strength of the plate govern : <PI'. = 72.9 kips.
11.7. Determine the design tensile strength of a -in-diameter bolt if it is (a) A325, (b) A490,
(c) A307.
The nominal cross-sectional area of a -in-diameter bolt is
.. (s '")' .'
-
7 . .,
D
( )
A = :r z = :r 2 = 0.60 m ·
The destgn tensile strength of a bolt
where 4> = 0.75 and F,. is as listed in Table 11.5.

(a) For a -in-diameter A325 bolt. the design tensile strength
kips • .
f/>P.= 0. 75 X 90-:-;- X 0.60 m·= 40.6 ktpS
m·
(b) For a !-in-diameter A490 bolt. the design ten ile strength
kip
</>P. =0.75 X 112.5-:-;- . . .
X 0.6010 =50.7 ktp
m·
(c) For a -in-diameter A307 bolt. the design tensile strength
1/J P,- 0 .75 X 45. 0 k.ip,s X ?O .3 k'tps·

In -
0.60 ·
2
m·
11.8. Determine t h e design shear strength of a -in-diameter bol t if it is (a) A325-N. (b) A325-X ,
(c) A490-N. (d) A490-X. (e)
A307.
Bolts may be utilized in single shear or double shear. As hown in Fig. 11-!\, the term single and
double shear refer to the number of planes across which shear · tramferred through the bolts. The
shear strength values in Table 11-5 are for single shear: for double hear, they may be doubled. Single
shear is
al>l.umed in this exercise.
Fig. 11-8
CHA P. II] CONNECfiON S 169
The suffix es N and X refer to a beari n g-type (i.e.. non-slip-critical) connection, where
N designates threads included in the shear plane .
X designates threads excluded from the shear plane .
The design shear strength of a bolt
where ¢ and F,." are as listed in Table 11-5.

2
The nomi nal cross-sectio nal area of a -in-diameter bolt is A= 0.60 in (as calculated in Prob .
11.7).
(a) For a -in-diameter A325-N bolt, the design shear strength
kips . , .
cp V,, = 0.65 X 54.0 X 0.60 = 21.1 S
--:'2 m· kip
m
(b) For a -in-diameter A325-X bolt. the design shear strength

kips . , .
cpV,, = 0.65 X 72.0-:-:;- X 0.60 in·= 28.1 kipS
m
·
(c) For a -in-diameter A490-N bolt, the design shear strength
cpv" = 0.65 X kips . , .
x 0.60 = 26.4
67.5-:-:;- m· kips
m·
(d) For a ij-i n-diameter A490-X boll, the design shear strength
k'
cpv. = 0.65 x 90.0 sx 0.60 in 2 = 35.2 kips
m
·
(e) For a -in-diameter A307 bolt, the design shear strength
cp V,, = 0.60 X kips . , .
X 0.60 = 9.7 S
27.0-:-:;- m· kip
m·
11.9. A -in-diameter A325 bolt is subjected to combined shear and tension. Determine the design
tensile force assuming the required shear force is 10 kips.
2
The nominal cross-sectional area of a -in-diameter bolt is 0.60 in •
2 2
The shear stress J,, = 10 kips/0.60 in = 16.6 kips/in
(a) According to Table 11-6. for A325-N bolts (thread s included in the shear plane), the design tensile
stress
F, = (85 - l.8[,, :s68) ksi
= (85- 1.8 x 16.6 < 68) ksi
= 55.1 ksi
The design tensile force
kips . , .
F,A =55. I -:-:;- X 0.60 m·= _,3.0 kipS
m·
(b) For A325-X bolts {threads excluded from the shear plane), the design tensile stress
F, = (85 - 1.4[.. < 68) ksi
= (85- 1.4 X 16.6 < 68) ksi
=61.7ksi
170 CONNECT I ONS (CHAP. 11
The design tensile force
kip .
F,A = 61.7 . , 0.6010 = 37.1 ktp
X
10"
11.10. Determine the shear strength of a -in-diameter A325 bolt in a slip-critical connection.
(Please nore : The strengths of slip-critical connection are expressed a unfactored force in Table 11-
7.)
As uming tandard-size holes. f,. = 17 ksi for A325 bolts. Shear strength
kips . • .
f,.A = 17 -:-;- x 0.60 10·= 10.2 ktps
m·
Maximum service load shear on the bolt is 10.2 kips. As noted in Table 1 1-7, j;. = 17 ksi and the other
hear strengths tabu lated therein are for class A surfaces (with slip coefficie n t 0.33). Higher shear
strength for high-strength bolts in slip-critical connections are available for cl:t s B (sl ip coefticient 0.50)
and cia; C (slip coefficient 0.40) surfaces. l11e higher values are given m the Specification for Structuml
Joint\ Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, which appears in Part 6 of the A ISC LRFD Manual.
11.11. Repeat Problem ll.IO for a service tensile force of 20 kips acting in combination with the
shear.
If tens• on " pre;ent. the shear values in Table 11-7 are to be muluphed b} ( 1 - TIT,). ' here T i
the '>ervice ten;ile force and T,is the minimum pretension load for the bolt 10 Table Il-4.
10.2 kips ( I- ) = l0.21o.ps (1-20 ki.ps ) =50 kip maxtmum scrvtce toad 'hear
x
T- x
T, 39 ktps
11.12. Check t he bearing strengths of the -in-diameter bolts 10 Probs. 11.8 and 11.10. Assume two
or more bolts in the line of force connecting two -in plates of A36 steel; standard holes;
center-to-center distance of 3 in; and edge distance of l! in.
Edge distance (L = 1.5 in)> (1.5d = 1.5 x in= 1.31in). Spacing (C = 3.0 in) >
(3.0d = 3.0 X in=
2.63 in). Equation (JJ-Ja) is appljcable and t h e desi gn bea ring strength is cpR... where cp = 0.75 and
R.. = 2.4 dt F,,.
(f>Rn = 0.75 X 2.4 X X in X 58 k ips/in
= 34.3 kip per bolt
In Prob. li.R. the only bolt governed by bearing strength is the A490-X in part (d). for which
(rpR. = 34.3 1-. ips) < (rf>V. = 35.2 kips). All the other bolts are governed by shear strength, because
rpV. < (rpR. = 3-t.3 kips) .
Regarding Prob . 11.10. where the bolt is in a :.lip-critical connecuon, the limiting service load shear
of 10.2 kip!> obviously go,erns over tbe limiting factored load bearing value of 34.3 kips
.
11.13. The end of a WJ2x87 beam (A36 steel) has been prepared as shown in Fig. 11-9 for
connection to a support ing member. The three holes are 10 diameter for -m-diameter
bolts. Determine the design shear strength of the beam web .
The applicable limit states are shear yielding. shear fracture. and block !>hear rupture. For shear yielding
CHAP. II] CONNEC..IIONS 171
2 in cope
---+-
I 1 in
-' 0
d I:!S.l1n 0 2 <it 3 tn = 6 In
7
<;>--0
l lrlf::==== = ===== W S9
cb
I
== l2 X
Fig. 11·9
[of gross section (I) in Fig. 11·91

cpR.. = 0.90 X (15-3)
0.6Av•F.
A • = (d-cope)t = (12.53 in- 2 in) x 0.515 in = 5.42
in !
cpR. = 0.9 X 0.6 X 5A2 in· X 36 ksi = 105
ktp) For shear fracture [of net section (I) in Fig. 11·91
(J.J-1)
1/>R.. = 0. 75 X 0.6A..,F,,
A,..= (d-copc-3d.)t = (12.53 in- 2 in- 3 x : in) x 0.515 in= 3.97 in'
1/>R. = 0.75 X 0.6 X 3.97 in' X 58 kM = 10-l kip;
For block shear rupture (of ;ection (2) in Fig. 11-9] q> = 0. 75 and R. = the greater value of
(C-14·1)
0.61\,.• F. + AJ.
(C-14-2)
0.6A.,..f. + A.F.
where A, • = gro; area of the vcrttca1 part of (2)
A ... = net area of the vertical part of (2)
A. = gro;s area of the horizontal part of (2)
A .. = net area of the horizontal part of (2)
A..= (I +2 x 3m) x0.515 in =3.86m'
10
A,,-- ( ,tn + 2 X - ._, ,X 16) X o.::>1c-' tn''

1
3 m' ·tn--2.66
A8 = I in x 0.515 in = 0.77 in!
A .. = (I in - x 1 in) X 0.515 in = 0.53 in'
R.is the greater of
. ,
kips . • • ktp .
0.6 x 3.86 m·x 36-;-;- + 0.53 m· x :>8-;-;- = 114 ktps
tn· •n·
. , _ kip . , kips .
0.6 X 2.66 sn· X :>8 77 + 0.77 1n· X 36-;--; = 120 kipS
1n· 1n·
R. = 120 k1p\
1/>R. = 0.75 X 120 kips= 90 k1p;
The design ;hear strength is 90 kips. based on the gove rning limit state of block shear rupture.
11.14. Design a base plate for a Wl4x90 column with a factored axial load of 700 kipl>. All '>tccl is
A36. The base plate is on a footing 2ft 0 in X 2ft 0 in;[;= 4 ksi .
•
172 CONNECTIONS [CHAP. 1l
The design beanng strength for steel bearing on concrete is determined from Eq. (11.5) or (11.6); the
former for bearing on the full area of concrete. and the latter for bearing on less than the full area. The
dimensions of the W 14X90 column d b1 = 14.02 in x 14.52 in . Try a 16in x 16 in base pl ate and
use
Eq. (11.7).
A = 24 in x 24 in = 576 inz A, = 16in x 16 in =256in 2
'_ kips
! ,.-4 . ., 4> = 0.60
Ill"
The design beanng strength
1/>rPp = 0 ·8)-J.r•;A, -
A,
2
lops . , v576 in
= 0.85 X 4-. -, X 256m· . ,
X 256 m·
m·
= 1306 kips > 700 kips required o.k.
Referring to Fig. 11·6
N= 16.0in, d=l4.0in m =0.5(N-0.95d)
= 0.5( 16m-0.95 x 14 in)= 1.35 in
B= 16.0in, b1 = 14.52 in n = 0.5(8- 0.80b1)
= 0.5(16 10-0.80 x 14.52 in)= 2.1910
To determme c, solve Eqs. [11.8] to I11.10)
P,, =
Nbrt 700 kips. x 14.021nX
. .
14.52m
16 m X I
P,,= .
8 6m
= 556 kips
556 kips
-::-0--:. 6-;:(0::-. 8:-:5;:-Vr.5;::7;:=6 in"1"J""( t47.'='52:=1,;.n,;,X=I4=. O:=i:=n:=-)4:-:k-:-i p-s-/-:;-;in2
> 556 kips
-0.6 x (1.7 x 4 kips/in:)
= 162 in 2 > 136 in 2
= 162 in
c = !f(d + b1 - t1) - V(d + b1 - td- 4(A" -t1b1))
(d +b1 -t1 )= (14.02+ 14.52-0.71)in=27.1Bin
c = ![27.83 in- Y(27 .83m)2 -4( 162 in - 0.71 in x 14.52 in)[
c = 4.26 in
Referring to Eq. [11.8)
m = 1.35 in, 11 = 2. 19 in c= 4.26 in

2 x 700 kips
v
= 0.9 X 36 kips ;· • X I 6"111 X J6 in =0.41
111·
= / 2 x 556 kips =
0 46
Y Yo.9 x 36 kips/i n 2
xl62 in 1 •
CH A P. II] CONNECTIONS 173
Base plate thickness rP ts the largest of ( 1.35 in x 0.41 = 0.55 tn). (2.19 in x 0.41 = 0.90 in),
and
(4.26 in x 0.46 = 1.96 in). Use a base plate 16 in >: 2 to v 16 tn .
11.15. Complete penetration groove welds are used to join the flange of the two halve of the W24x 176 beam
(A36 steel) in Prob . 11.3. Determine (a) the design flexural strength at the splice and (b) the
appropriate electrode .
An.f . (a) cphM, = 1115 kip-ft. (b) matching E70.
11.16. The flange of the two halves of the same W24X 176 beam are joined by Hn partial-penetration groove
welds. Determine (a) the design flexural strength at the splice and (b) the appropriate electrode.
AilS . cp.M , = 446 kip-ft for E70; cpbM• = 383 kip-ft for E60.
11.17. In Fig . 11-l(d), the plates are 3 in wide and in thick . the base material is A36 steel. Determine the
design tensile strength of the splice for the minimum size fillet weld : (a) E70. (b) E60.
AilS . (a) 33.4 kips , (b) 28.6 kips .
11.18. In Prob. 11.17. determ10e the design tensile strength for the maximum size fillet weld : (a) E70. {b) E60.
AilS. (a) 72.9 kips , (b) 72.9 kips.
11.19. Repeat Prob . ll. for a -in-diameter bolt.

Arts . (a) 15.5 kips , (b) 20.7 kips. (c) 19.4 kips. (d) 25.8 kips. (e) 7.2 kips .
11.20. Repeat Prob . 11.9 for a -in-diameter bolt.

Arts. (a) 19.6 kips. (b) 23.6 kips.
11.21. Repea t Probs. 11.10 and 11.11 for i-in-diameter bolts.

Arts . 7.5 kips, 2.1 kips.
11.22. Determtne the bearing strength of -in-diameter bolts connecting -in plates of A36 steel: standard
holes: center-to-cente r distance of 2! in; and edge distance oft!in .
A ItS. 19.6 ktps .
11.23. Determtne the destgn shear strength of the web of the W21X44 beam (A36 steel) in Fig. 11-10. The
five holes are 1 1 -in-diameter for l-in-diameter bolts.
Arts . 121 ktp .
174 CONNECTIONS [CHAP. 1I
1m
l'-----....,
2 10
0
0
0
0
0
W2 1 X 44
Fig. 11-10
11.24. Design a base plate for a W8x 67 column with a factored axial load of 450 kips. All steel is A36. The
base plate will occupy the full area of concrete support;r:
= 3.5 ksi .
Ans. Base plate 14 in x I in x 14 in.

Chapter 12
Other Design Considerations
NOTATION
b1 = flange WH.Ith ,
in
d = depth of the member , in
d, = web depth clear of fillets. in= d-
2k
F.. = specified minimum yield stress
K =effective length factor for columns
k = distance from outer face of the flange to web toe of the fillet , in
I =sti ffener height. in
N = length of bearing, in
P,= nominal axial compressive strength of the column, kips
P,, = required axial compressive strength of the column,
kips R, =nomin al st rength. kips
R,. =req uired strength,
kips
R,, = nominal shear strength. kips
r1 = flange thickness. in
r.. =web thickness. in
X = param eter in Eq s. ( K 1-6) and (K
1-7)
Y = parameter in Eqs. (Kl-6) and (K 1-7)
¢ = resist ance factor
¢R, =design mength, kips
¢R., = design !>hear strength , kips
INTRODUCfiOI'I
Additional provisions for steel structures are given in the final three chapters of the AlSC LRFD
Specification. as follows:
Chap. K-Strength Design Considera tions
Chap. L-Serviceability Design Considerations
Chap . M-Fabrication, Erection , and Quality Control
The strength and stability provisions relating to concentrated forces are discussed herein .
CONCENTRATED LOADS AND REACTIONS

A concentrated force acting on a member introduces high stresses in its vicinity. To prevent
failure , the required (or factored) concentrat ed load or reaction R,. (kips) must be checked
against the design strength ¢R, (kips). as determined b) the appropriate limit states. For each
limit state. ¢ is the resistance factor and R, is the nominal strength.
(I) Local Web Yielding. This limit st ate applies to aU concentrated forces (tensile or
compressive) in the plane of the web. The design strength of th e web at the toe of the fillet
175
176 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ICHAP. 12
is <f>R,. where <P = 1.0 and Rn depends on whether the concentrated force is a load or a
reaction.
a. For a concentrated load (acting along a member at a distance from either end greater
than d, the depth of the member)
Rn = (5k + N)F,t. (K/-2)
b. For a concentrated reaction (acting at or near the end of the member)
Rn = (2.5k + N)F,.r. (Kl-3)
In the preceding equations
k =distance from outer face of the flange to web toe of the fillet, in
N = length of bearing, in
F,, = specified minimum yield stress, ksi
t_. =web thickne ss, in
If a pair of st iffeners is provided on opposite sides of the web at th e concentrated force.
covering at least half the member depth. this limit state need not be considered.
(2) Web Crippling. This limit state applies to all concentrated compressive forces in the plane of
the web. The design compressive strength of the web is <J>R,, where 4> = 0.75 and Rn
depends on whether the concen trated force is a load or a reaction .
a. For a concentrated load (acting along a member at a distance from either end greater
than d/2)
(Kl-4)
b. For a concentrated reaction (acting at or near the end of the member)
- F.tr
I ._
(Kl-5)
where dis the depth of the member , in, and t1is flange thickness, in. If the concentrated
force exceeds <J>Rn, a pair of stiffeners must be provided in accordance with the Stiffener
Requirements section later in this chapter.
(3) Sidesway Web Buck ling. This limit state relates to concentra ted compressive force applied
to one flan ge in the plane of the web, where no lateral bracing or (h alf-depth ) stiffeners
arc provided. The design compressive strength is rJ>Rn, where <P = 0.85 and R, depends
on whether the loaded flange is restrained against rotation.
a. For the loaded flange restrained against rotation
If Y <2.3: R, =X( I + 0.4 Y ) (Kl-6)
If Y;:: 2.3: this limit state need not be checked
b. For the loaded flange not restrained against rotation
[f y < 1.7: Rn = X (0.4Y3) (Kl-7)
If y;:: 1.7: this limit state need not be checked
I n the preceding expressions
1
12 000r
X= ' "; however. if the web flexural stresses (due to the factored loads)< F,
at
d,
CHAP. 12) OTHER DESIGN CONSlDERA TIONS 177
the concentrat ed load. the value of X may be doubled.

y = d,b,
ft..
I= maximum laterally unbraced length along eith er flange at the point of load. in
b1 = flange width , in
c( = web depth clear of fillets, in= d -2k.
(4) Compression Buckling of the Web. This limit state relates to concentrated compressive
forces applied to both flanges. The design compressive strength is ¢R,,. wh ere 4> = 0.90
and
410
R,= \,l)\. (Kl-8)
c
If the concentrated force exceeds 1/JR,, a pair of stiffeners must be provided in accordance
with th e Stiff en er Requiremen ts section later in this chapter .
(5) Local Flange Bending. This limit state applies to a concentrat ed tensile force acting on one
flange . The design strength is IJ>R,, where
4> = 0.90 and R,= 6.25t F, (KJ-1)
I f the length of loading perpendicular to the member web < 0.15b1 (the member flange
width } or if a pair of (half-depth) web stiffeners is provided , this limit stat e need not be
con sidered .
(6) Column with Web Panel Subject to High Shear. Th1s hmit state applies to column webs at
beam-to-column moment connections. The design sh ear Mrength of the colum n web is
IJ>R,.. wh ere q> = 0.90 and R,.. the nominal shear strength . depend!> on the (factored)
column axial load P,,.
a. I
f
P,, <: 0.75P,,: R,, = 0.7F, d, t.. ( Kl -9)
b. I
f
P,, > 0. 75P,: R,, = 0.7F,.dc t,. [I.9 - 1.2( )] (Kl-10)
where P,, i s the required axial compressive strength of the column. kips. and f', is the
nominal axial compressive strength of the column , kips.
Column web shear can be determined as shown in Fig. 12.1. If it exceeds th e design shear
strength [calculated from Eqs. ( Kl -9) or (Kl-10)]. the column web must be reinforced with diagonal
stiffen ers or web doubler platt:s.
lA
v •
V '
•
•v.
-L d' 7
\1
'
Requ1rcd 'hear 'trength
-
, (,\(, \f ld
/I - \' I
Fig. U-1 Column web panel ;hear

178 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS [CHAP. 12
STIFFENER R EQUIR
EMENTS
When web '>llffeners are required at a concentrated force becau<,e of (2) crippling of the web or
(4) compression buckling of the web. they must satisfy the following additional provisions of the
A I SC LR FD Specification. They are to be designed as column (i.e .. as axially compressed
member\ , as in Chap. 4) with an effective length Kl = 0.75h. A!> specified in Sec. K 1.8 of the A T
SC LRFD Specification, part of the beam web can be considered as working with the pair of
stiffeners.
For all web stiffeners provided at concentrated loads and reacuons: If the concentrated force is
tensile, the stiffeners must be welded to the loaded flange. I f the force is compressive. the stiffeners
can either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange.
Solved Problems
12.1. The unstiffened end of a W21 x62 beam of A36 stcd rests on a concrete support (f; = 3
ksi).
Design a bearing plate for the beam and its (fact ored) end reaction of 100 kips. (See Fig.
12-2.J Assume the area of concrete support A 1= 6 x A 1 (the area of the bearing plate).
Lateral!) supponed b) Ooor

deck "'-...
'
S • 2 Sk
- '
+
-o- I
--- "
/I -;' k k
>+j
I I
n
t I 1 II /1 I
8 I \ I
• " '
I
I
Fig. 12-2
For the concentrated compressive reaction of 100 kip acllng on the bottom flange. the applicable
limit tntcs arc (I) local web yielding and (2) web crippling. (It is as umcd that the beam is welded to
the base pl ate and hoth arc anchor-bolted to the concrete :.upport. This hould rrovidc adequate
lateral bracing to prevent idesway web buck lin g.)
Corresponding to the applicable limit states arc Eqs. (K 1-3) and (K 1-5), each of which has N. the
length of hearing. a a
parameter.
Solving for N, we obtain
R.. < tf>R. = tf>(2.5k + N)F,t.
100 kips -;; JJJ(2 .5 x I in + N) x
36 kirs/in'x 0.40 in (K 1-3)
N?::3.5 in
(K 1-5)
k ps ·:. :. 6:. :. 15:. :. i:.n.:.

36
X
100 ktp s 0.75 X 68(0.40 in)··[I + _N )
3( (00.0460I1S11 )'
']
t _o
,
20 99111 111 in- 0.40111
in
,\'? 8.6
The m1111mum length of bearing tS N = 8.6 in. Roundtng up to the ne:>.t full inch. let V = 9111.
CHAP. 12) OTHER DESIGN CO SIDERA TIONS 179
The area of the bearing plate i determined by the bearing >trength of the concrete \upport. U mg
Eq. [ J1. 6] from Chap. II. the design bearing strength b
q>.,P,, = cp, x O.K5[,'A 1 !

A ,
where VA1/A , < 2.
Substituting in Ett . Ill . 6]. we obtam
. klp
100 kip> = 0.60 X 0.85 X 3 X A IX 2
m·
The area of the bearing plate A 1 = 32.7 in1 •
Becau>e the bcanng plate dimensions are
A, 32.7 in' .
BN>A,: 8 2: -=
1
= 3 611
N 9 in ·
However. 8 cannot be le,, than the flange width of the W21 x62 beam. br = 8.24. Rounding up. let
8 = 9 in . A formula for beanng plate thickness i> gl\'Cn on page 3-50 of the AISC LRFD Manual :
2 .22Rn 1
t=
A ,F.
where R = 100
kip• 8 - 2k 9m-2 X I in .
II = 3
=- 13 Ill
')
2 -
.
A 1 = BN = 9 in x 9 in = 81 in
F..= 36 ksi
2.22 x 100 kips x (3.13 inf .
t= , = 0.86m
81 in·x 36
k>•
Use a bearing plate I in x 9 m X 9 in .
12.2. ln Prob. 12.I. can the bearing plate be eliminated'?

For the W21 X62 beam to bear directly on the concrete upport. it bottom flange muM be ,ufficicntly
thick to act as a bearing plate.
Let
2 22 111
t= · RF = 0.615 in
AI •
the flange thickne•!> of the W21 X62 beam . Because 8 = b1 = i\.24 in

,, . ? I .
8 - 2k 8._.. Ill- -X •
= 2.75 Ill
Ill
n= '
-)
2
2.22 x 100 kips x (2.75 ml '
t= . ,. = 0.615 Ill
A 1 X 36 k 'IpS m·
A ,= 123 in 1 (>32.7 in 1 required for bearing on concrete)

A, A , 123 in1
N =-= - = = 15.0in
8 h1 8.24 in
By increasing the length of bearing of the beam on the concrete to 15 in. the bearing plate can be
eliminated .
180 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS [CHAP. 12
12.3. A column with a 12-in-long base plate rests on the top flange of a Wl8xSO beam (A36 steel).
20ft long. Determine the maximum column load if the beam is (a) not stiffen ed or
braced along its entire span and (b) not stiffened but braced at the load point.
(a) For a concentrated compressive force acting on the top flange of a beam. the applicable limit
states are (I) local web yielding. (2) web cripphng. and (3) sidesway web buckling. Th.:
corresponding equations are ( K 1-2), (Kl-·n. and (Kl -7) (assuming no restramt agatn t
rotation).
ktps
P.<cpR. = l.0(5k + N)F.t = 1.0(5 x 1.25 tn + 12tn)36 -:-;- ( K 1-2)
x0.355in
10
P. s233 kips
P. < cpR. = 0. 75 x 13541 + 3{;)CJ 1

( KJ-4)
] .J¥.
= 0.75 x 135(0.355 in)2
[ 1 + 3( 12 in ) (0.355 in
1
] j36 ksi X 0.570 in
)
17.99 in 0.570 in \ 0.355 in
P.< 192 kips
P. < ¢R. = 0.85 X X(0.4Y')
Y= dl,br _ de =d - 2k = (17.99in- 2 X 1.25 in)= 15.49

in
I.
15.49 in x 7.495tn ( K 1-7)

- . = 1.36< 1.7
(20 ft x 12 )o.355 '"
Since Y < I.7 and the loaded flange is not stiffened. braced. or restrained against rotation. Eq .
( KJ -7) must be checked.
X= l2,ooor: = 12.000(0.355tn)' =
d, 15.49 in 35
-
P. <0.85 X 35 X 0.4(1.36)'
s30 kips
The maximum (factored) column load is 30 kips based on the governing limit state of sidesway web
buckling [Eq. (KJ-7)].
(b) If the top flange is braced at the load point. the limit state of sideway web buckling does not
apply. The governing limit state is web cripplin g [Eq. (K /-4)], with a design strength of 192
kips. The shear strength of the web of the beam should alway be checked. For a WIR x50.
cp,. v. = o.90 x o.6r:d1,.
= 0.90 X 0.6 X 36 ki X 17.99 in X 0.355 in
m-
¢,. v.= 124 kips. If. for example. the concen trated column load P.. = 192 kips acts at midspan
and is the only load on the beam except for its own weight. the required hear strength
V _ 192 kips 0.050 kip/ ft x 20 ft

•- 2 + 2
(V. = 96.5 kips) < (¢,.V. = 124 ktpS) O.k.
12.4. Determine the maximum load that can be hung from a plate ( 12 in long x 7 in wide) welded to
the bottom flange of a Wl8x 50 beam. All steel is A36.
CHAP. 12) OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 181
For a concentrated tensile force acting on the bottom flange of a beam. the applicable limit states are
(I) local web yielding and (5) local flange bending. The corresponding equations are (Kl-2) and (K 1-
1). ln solving Eq. (Kl-2) for a Wl8X50 with a 12-in load bearing (in Prob . 12.3) it was
determined that P,, <233 kips.
Because the width of plate =7 in >0.15bd=0.15x 7.495in= 1.12in), Eq. (KI-1) must be
checked:
P,, ::: </JR,. = 0.90 X 6.25tjf',.
= 0.90 x 6.25(0.570 in) x 36 ksi

2
P,, < 66 kip
The maximum (factored) hanging load is 66 kips , based on the limit state of local ftange bending. If
stiffeners are provided or if the hanging load is confined to the central O.l.5b1 ( = 1.12 in) of the beam
flange, 233 kips can be hung .
12.5. Two W27x84 beams are rigidly connected to a Wl4X 145 column (all of A36 steel) . The
forces due to -rhe various loadings are shown in fig. 12-3. Determine whether column web
stiffeners are required.
! 360 kips ! 240 kips I 300 kips

t 125 kip-ft
100 kip-fl 100 kip- 125
150 kip-ft .J r 150 lop-fl ft kip·fi v
A
.J-1-
7
<..
7 -7
.
( <r
.J -"f - u
-lr'
Dead load Live load Wind load
(d- 2 x
r,/2)
= (d- tr ) = (26.71 in - 0.640
in)
= 26.07 in= 2.17 ft
Fig. U-3
In determining whether column web stiffeners are required. the significant parameters are F, the beam
flange forces (tension and compression); V, the column shear; and P, the column axial load.
Under dead load
F = 150 kip-ft = 69 kips

2.17 ft
V=O
P= 360 kips
Under live
load
F = 100 kip-ft = ki
2.17 ft 46 ps
V=O
P=240 kips
182 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATlONS (CHAP . 12
Under wind
load 125 kip-ft
F = =58 kips
2.17 ft
V = 250 kips- 2 x 58 ktp = 134 ktps
P= 300 kips
The relevant load combinations from Chap. 2 are
1.40 (A4-J)
F.. = 1.4 x 69 kips = 97 kips
v.=O
P., = 1.4 x 360 kips= 504 kips
1.20 + 1.6L (A4-2)
F,, = l.2 x 69 kips+ 1.6 x 46 kips= 156 kips
v;, = 0
P.= 1.2 X 360 kips+ l.6 X 240 kip = 816 kips
1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L (A4-4)
F..= l.2 x 69 kips+ 1.3 x 58 kips+ 0.5 x 46 kips = 181 kips
v.= 1.3 x 134 kips= 174 kips
P.= 1.2 X 360 kips+ 1.3 X 300 kips+ 0.5 X 240 l..tp) = 942
kips
(A.J-6)
0.90D- 1.3W
F..= 0.9 x 69 kips- 1.3 x 58 ktps = -13 kip
v. = -1.3 x 134 kips= -174 ktp)
P.= 0.9 X 360 kips- 1.3 X 300 ktp) = -66 ktp\
Regarding stiffenmg the web of the W14x 145 column. all the stgmficant rcqutred <>trcngths (F,., V•. and
P,,) arc maximum under load combination (A4-4): 1.1D +I 3W + 0.5L. They are a follows:
1-:, = 181 kip!>. v;, = 174 kip,, and P,, = 942 kip .
The applicable limit states are
(I) local web yielding. (2) web crippling, (4) compre,sion buckling of the web, (5) local flange bending,
and (6) columns with web panels subject to high shear.
The corresponding equations are Eqs. (KJ-2). (KJ-4), (KJ-8). and (K/- 1).
</>R,. = l.O(Sk + N)J- .r. (K /-2)
For the WI4X 145 column, k = 1.75 in. lw = 0.680 in. Let the length of hearing N = 0.640 in. the
flange thickncs) of the W27x!l4 beam
</> R,. = 1.0(5 X 1.75·10 + 0 .640 36 -k:i-p;s-X

t· n ) X 0.680 in
10-
= 230 kips ]
"Y7: (KJ-4)
lf!R. = 0.75 x 135r I+
3 d r
[ (N)(I) fF./, 15
. '[ (0.640
= 0.75 x 135 x (0.680 m)- 1 + 3
in)(0.680 m)'
. in I.090 36
ktps x 1.090
14 78 10
10
= 378 kips in 0.680
10
= 0 90 4100t !VF. (Kl-8)
</> R• . X
d,
CH AP. 12) OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 183
where d, =d -2k. For the W14XI45 column. d,= 14.781n- 2 x 1.75 tn = 11.28tn.
= x 4100(0.680 in)
tj>R. 0.9 11.28 tn
0
= 617 kips
tj>R. = 0.90 X 6.25r}F. (KI-1)
= 0.90 X 6.25 X (1.090 inf X 36

ksi
= 241 kips
Because (F.= 181 k1ps) < tj>R. for all the preceding limit states, horizontal stiffeners for the column web,
between beam flange . are not required.
Regarding the last limit state cited, column web panels subject to high shear, Eq. (KJ-9) or (Kl-10)
may apply. depending on P. and P•. Assuming the column is laterally supported by beams in both
perpendicular directions at the connection level (i.e., the unbraced length I= 0), P. = A,F.. [from
Chap. 4, Eqs. (£2-/) to (£2-4)]. For the Wl4Xl45 column
P. = 42.7 in x 36 ksi = 1537 k1ps
Since (P. = 942 kip) < (0.75P. = 0.75 x 1537 kips= 1153 k1ps), Eq. (KJ-9)
governs
tj>R,. = 0.90 X 0. 7F,d,r.
= 0.9() X 0.7 X 36 i X 11.28 in X 0.680 Ill

tn"
= 174 kips
Because v.. = tpR, = 174 k1ps. the shear capacity of the web panel1s suffic1ent; it need not be
remforced.
I f v. > tj>R,, the column web panel would require
reinforcement by either (a) a vertical plate
welded to the column web, to increase r. in the panel to that requ1red to make 1/>R.. > v•. or
(b)
diagonal Miffeners in the column web panel to resist the portion of the shear beyond the capacity of the
column web
.
Regardtng horizontal stiffeners in column webs between beam flanges for moment connections. a
stiffener design procedure and additional design aids are provided on pp . 2-12 to 2-14 of the AJSC
LRFD Manual.
12.6. The unstiffcned end of a WI6X50 beam of A36 steel rests on a concrete support {f;= 4 ksi). The beam
end reaction is 100 kips. Assume the area of concrete support equals the area of the bearing plate.
(a) Design a bearing plate for the beam.

(b) Can the beanng plate be eliminated?
Ans. (a) Beam bearing plate I in x 7 in x 7 in.

(b) Yes. 1f the length of bearing is increased from 7 in to II in.
U.7. A Wl4x82 column rests d1rectly on the top flange of a W27x 146 beam. 30ft long. If the beam bas no
suffener . but IS braced at the load point. determine the maximum column
load .
Ans P.= 495

kips .
184 OTHER DESIG:-.1 CONSIDERATIONS (CI I AP. 12
12.8. ln Fig. 12-3. assume there is a W27X8-I beam on th.: ldt side only. The forces on the W27 beam and the
Wl4x 145 column arc as hown . If column w.:b suffencr arc required. design them.
Ans. Stiffeners not required.
U.9. In Fig. 12-3, as,umc the column web panel has a required shear strength of 300 kips. Determine the
thicknes of the web plate to be we.lded to the panel.
I .
AilS =
I 1 10
.
Index
Allowable mess de tgn (ASD). 6-7 Column . 3. 23-30

American lnMitut e of Steel Construction, composite. 123-125
I nc. (AlSC), I. 6-7 Combined forces:
A lSC LRFD Manual , I , 6-7 flexure and compression. 91-95
A I SC LRFD Specification, I, 6-7 flexure and t<:n>ion. 84 85
Analysb: flexure and tor ion. 108
elastic. 44 Compact members:
fir t order. 93 beam >, 41
plastic, 44 columns. 24
second order. 93 Composite members, 122-130
Area. cross-sectional: beam-columns. 129-130
effective net, I S beams. 125-129
gros . 14, 48 effective slab width. 125
net, 14-15, -l8 full composite action. 126
Availability. 5 partial composite action, 126
A36 steel. 3-4 shear connector . 126-129
shoring. 126-127
steel decks. 127-129
column >. 123-125
Base plates. 16-1 compressive strength, 124
Beam-column . 3, 91- concrete-enca,ed beams. 129
95 flexural strength, 126-127
composne. I 29-130 hear strength. 130
mteracuon formulas. 92-93
Compresstve \lrcngth. 28. 124
prelimtnary de ign. 95 Compre sion members (.1ee Columns)
econd order analysts. 93-95 Concentrated loads and reactions. 175-178
Beam formulas. 49-50 Connections. 3. 152-164
Beams, 3 block shear rupture. 162
compact. 39-50 bolts. 156-161
composite. 125 129 high strength. 157
noncom pact. 41 .63-65 slip-critical joints, 157
ymme tric, 40-41, 64, 66 design strength , 154-156. 162
Bearing: moment. 163. 177
on concre te. 125. I 64 typical, 163
on steel, 164 weld s, 153-156 Cross-
plates, 178-179 sectional area:
Bending: (see Beams and Plate girders) effective net , 15
biaxial, 88-89 gross, 14, 28, 48
Bending coefficient, 46 nt:t. 14-15, 48
Block hear rupture, 162 Cross sections:
Bolts. 156 161 closed. 108-110
high trength. 156-157 compact. 24, 41
lip-cntical joints. 157 noncom pact. 24. 41
Braced frames. 25 26 open. 107-110
Buckling: sl.:nder element. 24
column. 25-28
clastic. 28
mela uc. 28 Definitions. 3
lateral-torsiOnal. 40. 44--l7. 63-65. 67 Deformation. torstonal. 110
local, 24. 40. 41 Design strength. 8
Hange.24.41.63-66, 67 compre >sive. 28. 12-l
web.24,-l1.63-65, 76-177 connection . 15-l-156. 162
Butlt-up members. 5-6. 66. 70
185
186
De ign strength (Cont.) INDEX
flexural. 44-47.63-65, fl7-6H, 126 127
shear, 48-49. 68. 130
tensile. 16
Displacements: Moment connections. 163, 177
compressive. 30 M oment of inertia, 26. 43-44
flexural. 49-50
tensile. 16
Net section. 14-16.48
Nominal strength or resistance. 8
Effective length. 25 Noncompact member :
Effecuve length factor: beam . 41. 63-65
analytical method, 26-27 column . 24
judgmental method. 25-26
Effective net section. 15- 16
Elastic analysis, 44 P-delta secondary effects. 94
Euler, 28 Pla tic analysis. 44
Plastic hmge, 40, 41, 43
Plate girders. 65-69
First order analvsis. 93 Probability theory . 9-10
'
Flange bending, 177 Propertie . mechanical. 3-4
FleAural member (see Beam'>)
Flexural strength. 4-1-47.63-65.67-68. 126-
U7 Required strength, 8. 10
Residual '>tresses. 43
Resistance. 8
Gross section , 14. 16. 48 Reststance factors. 8- J 0
compression. 28. 124
flexure. 4-1, 63. 67. 126, 129
llangers. 3. 14 shear. 48, 68. 130
tcnston . 16
tor ion . I 08
Rolled shapes. 5-6, 30. 70
Interaction formulas. 85. 92, 129
Instability. (see Buckhng)
Second order:
analyst . 93
Limit states. 8 effect . 9-1
Load and resistance factor destgn (LRFD). 6-7. moments. 92-95
8-11 Sectton modulus:
LRFD Manual, I, 6 7 ela\ttc. 43
LRFD Specification, I.6-7 plastic. 43
Load combinations. 8, I 0-11 Sections (see Cross sections)
Load factors, 8, I 0 Serviceability, 8
Loads: Shape . \tructural:
dead. 10 built-up. 5-6. 66.
earthquake. 10 70
factored, 8. 10 rolled . S-6, 30. 70
live. 10 Shear center. 41. 106-107
rain. 10 Shear connectors. 126-J 29
service, 11 Shear 'trength. 48--19. 68. 130
now, 10 Shoring. 126-127
wind. 10 Slender clement members. 24
Slenderness ratio. 25-28
Slip-critical joints. 157
Mechanical properties, 3 4 Stability (see Buckling)
Modulu of ela ticity. 4. 123 Stiffeners, web:
details. 69, 178
requirements, 65. 69. 176-178
Stiffnes\, 5
Stiffness reduction factors. 26-27
INDEX 187
Strength, 8 Unbraced length, 26, 44-47

Stress-strain diagram . 3-4, 41-43
Structural steel , 3-7
Sway forces, 93 Vibration of beams. 49-50
Temion field action. 67

Web :
Ten ion members. 14-16 huckhng. 176-177
Tensile strength. 4. 16 cnpphng. 176
Torsion. 106-110 paneb. 177
avo1ding or mimmiZing. I 07 lOX uffener (see Stiffeners. web)
deformation, 110 y•elding, 175-176
design criteria. 108 Weld . 153-156
St. Venant, 109 Width-thickness ratios. 24. 41, 63-65
hear center , 41, 106-107
warping. 110
Yield point. 3
Yield wcngth. 4
Unbraced frames, 25-27 Y1cld strcs . 4. 123
Master structural steel design they're perfect for preparing for

graduate or professional exams.
with Schaum's the high- Inside you will find:
performance study guide. It will • 112 solved problems w1th
help you cut study time, hone complete solutions
• 68 additional problems with
problem-solving skills, and answers .
• Clear explanations
achieve your personal best on that help you
understand the
exams! complete course:
concepts , definitions ,
and more.
• Effective methods for preparing
Students love Schaum's Outlines because they for class exams
produce results. Each year, hundreds of thousands of
students improve their test scores and final grades If you want top grades and thoroug
with these indispensable study guides. h understanding of structural steel
design, this powerful study tool is
Get the edge on your classmates . Use Schaum's! the best tutor you can have!
If you don't have a lot of time but want to excel in Chapters include: Structural Steel
class, use this • Introduction to LRFD • Tension
book to: Members • Column Numbers and
• Brush up before tests Other Compression Members •
• Find answers fast Compact Beams and Other
• Study quickly and more effect ively Flexural Members • Noncompact
• Get the big picture without spending hours poring Beams and Plate Girders •
over Members in Flexure and Tension
lengthy textbook s • Beam Columns: Combined
Flexure and Compression • Torsion
Schaum's Outlines give you the information your teachers • Composite Members •
expect you to know in a handy and succinc t format- Connections • Other Design
Considerations
without overwhelming you with unnecessary details . You
get a complete overview of the subject. Plus. you get plenty
of practice exercises to test your skill.
Compatible with any classroom text. Schaum's lets you
study at your McGraw -Hill
own pace and reminds you of all the important facts you
Il>n·r;wu u{ 11rt·M cGrau>·llill
need to remember-fast! And Schaum's are so complete , Conrp.mrcs
S18.95 U.S.A.
£10.99 U.K.
ISBN 0-07-053563-9
5
OVER 30 MILLION
9 780070 535633
SOLD
10

Schaum's Outline - Steel Structure Design

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Schaum's Outline - Steel Structure Design

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Up-to-date covers today's complete courses

Clarifies important theory and applications

Shows you how to solve problems step-by-step

Gives you 112

Prepares you for

Use with these courses: Engineering Mechanics Material Science

THEORY AND PROBLEMS

ABRAH Al\1 J. ROK AC II. :\I SCE

AUNG MYAT KYAW

SCHAUM'S OU TLINE SERIES

Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of

Ubrary of Congress Cataloging-in-PubUcation Data

Chapter 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3

Chapt er 2 INTROD UCTION TO • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8

Chapter J TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 4 COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . .. . . . 2

Chapter CO)'IPACT BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . 39

Chapter 6 NONCOMPACT BEAMS AND PLATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 7 MEMBERS I FLEXURE AND TENSION • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • 84

Chapter H BEAM-COLUMNS: COM BIN ED FLEXU RE AND COMPRESSION 91

Chapter 9 'l'ORSION • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • • • • 0 0 0 • • • • • 0 0 106

Chapter COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11 CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 12 OTHER DESIGN CONSIDERATION S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

INDEX .......................................................................................................................................................... 185

Fig. 1·1 Structural teel frame

Stram. '" '"

Table 1-1 Ava ilability of Structural Steel

Steel Type ASTM De igna tion F,. hi Plate Thicknes . in

Table 1-2 RoUed Structural Steel Shapes and Their Designations

W (wtde flange) ,-...J T Wl4x9Q• Nommal depth. 14m; wetght .

,........-' \......., ..L

' Cu ttmg a Wl-lx90 in half longitudinally results m two \vnx-IS .

Welded plate girder Cover plated W shape

W hape with helf angle

Fig. 1-3 Common built-up structural sh<tpes

Allowable stress= FFs.

''here t.f = mean value of

Load Combination Load at I ts Lifetime Maximum

(A4-J) D (during const ruction; other loads not

UD = I Ax SO kip-ft = 70 k1p-ft (A -1-1)

The six load combinations are

Load Combination Factored Axial Force, kips

(A4-1) 1.4 X 20() =280

2.5. Repeat Prob. 2.4 for a garage column.

Load Combination Factored Axial Force , kips

(A4 -Ja ') 1.2 X 2(Xl + I 6 X 25 + 1.0 X ISO =-BO

quantity J '!4g for each gage pace in the chain. where

Fig. 3-1 Definitions of.f and g

For welded members

Table 3- 1 Valu es of U for Bolted W, M , S. Wf , MT. and ST Shapes

DESI G"' TENSILE STRENGTH

h For fracture in the net cross section

Net area net Y.ldth x th1ckne :.

Cha111 ACDF (rwo holes. one space):

Becau e 10 54 in< 10.94 111 , chain ACDF is critical in thi ca e

A. = net width x thickne

ACEF 12 -2xl.06 = 9.88 in

Chatn ACEF with the mmtmum net width .9.88m. • critical.

For welded connection . effective net area

0. 90F.,A< = 0.90 X 36 ksi X 14..1 In:= 4()7 kip'

0.90F,A, =0.90 X 36 ksi X 14..1 in = 467 kip'

<jJ,P.= 31!8 kip . based on fracture of the net sectiOn